Digital PDFs

AA-0916F-TB

May 1988

420 pages

Original

14MB

Document:	AA 0916F Operating System Commands Manual Oct88
Order Number:	AA-0916F-TB
Revision:	0
Pages:	420
Original Filename:	AA_0916F_Operating_System_Commands_Manual_Oct88.pdf

OCR Text

TOPS-10
Operating System Commands
Manual
AA-0916F-TB

October 1988
This manual contains descriptions of the TOPS-10 monitor
commands, their formats and their usage. This manual
replaces the TOPS-10 Operating System Commands Manual,
. order number AA-0916E-TB.

Operating System:

TOPS-10 Version 7.04

Software:

GALAXY Version 5.1

digital equipment corporation, maynard, massachusetts

Firat Printing, July 1975
Revised, August 1977
Revised, March 1978
Revised, August 1980
Updated, July 1982
Updated, February 1984
Revised, April 1986
Revised, October 1988
The information in this document is subject to change without notice and should
not be construed as a commitment by Digital Equipment Corporation. Digital
Equipment Corporation assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear
in this document.
The software described in this document is furnished under a license and may be
used or copied only in accordance with the terms of such license.
No responsibility is assumed for the use or reliability of software on equipment
that is not supplied by Digital Equipment Corporation or its affiliated companies.
Copyright © 1975, 1984, 1988 Digital Equipment Corporation
All Rights Reserved.
Printed in U.S.A.
The Reader's Comments form on the last page of this document requests the
user's critical evaluation to assist in preparing future documentation.
The following are trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation:

CI
DDCMP
DEC
DECmail
DEC net
DECnet-VAX
DECserver
DECserver 100
DECserver 200
DECsystem-10
DECSYSTEM-20

DECtape
DECUS
DECwriter
DELNI
DELUA
HSC
HSC-50
KA10
KI
KL10
KS10

LA50
LN01
LN03
MASSBUS
PDP
PDP-11/24
PrintServer
PrintServer 40
Q-bus
ReGIS
RSX

SITGO-10
TOPS-10
TOPS-20
TOPS-20AN
UNIBUS
UETP
VAX
VAXNMS
VT50

~DmDDmDTM

CONTENTS

PREFACE
CHAPTER 1

INTRODUCTION

. . . . 1-1
JOBS . . . .
1.1
. . . .
CONNECTING TO THE SYSTEM . .
1.2
· . 1-1
OPERATING SYSTEM MODES . . . . . . . . . .
. 1-2
1.3
Interactive Mode . . . . . . . . .
. . . . 1-2
1.3.1
Batch Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3.2
· . 1-2
1-2
INTERACTIVE LEVELS . . . . . . . . .
1.4
Monitor Level
. . . . . . . . . . .
1.4.1
· . 1-2
User Level . . . .
1.4.2
· . 1-2
CONTEXTS . . . . . .
1.5
. 1-3
SPECIAL CHARACTERS .
1.6
· . 1-4
CTRL/C - Interrupt . .
. . . . . . . . 1-4
1.6.1
DELETE Key . . . . .
1.6.2
· . 1-4
CTRL/W - Delete Word
1-5
1.6.3
CTRL/U - Delete Line
. . . . . . . . 1-5
1.6.4
CTRL/R - Reprint-Line
1.6.5
1-6
CTRL/O - Cancel Output
1-6
1.6.6
CTRL/S - Hold Output
1-7
1.6.7
CTRL/Q - Resume Output
1-7
1.6.8
CTRL/T - Job status
1-7
1.6.9
TYPE-AHEAD CAPABILITY
. . . .
1.7
· . 1-8
COMMAND FORMATS
. . . . .
1.8
· . 1-8
. . . . .
Command Termination
1.8.1
· . 1-8
Line Continuation . . . .
.....
1.8.2
· . 1-9
Command Arguments
. . . . . . . . .
1.8.3
· . 1-9
Relative Date-Time Arguments . . . . .
1.8.3.1
· . 1-9
Absolute Date-Time Arguments .
1-10
1.8.3.2
Command Switches.
....
1-11
1.8.4
Temporary Switches . .
1.8.4.1
1-11
Permanent Switches .
1-12
1.8.4.2
Comments .
..... .
1-12
1.8.5
FILE SPECIFICATION
1-12
1.9
Device Names .
1-14
1.9.1
Generic Device Names .
1-15
1.9.1.1
Physical Device Names
1-16
1.9.1.2
1-16
File Structures
1.9.1.3
Logical Device Names . . . . . .
1-17
1.9.1.4
Ersatz Device Names
1.9.1.5
1-19
1.9.2
File Names . .
1-19
. . . .
Directory Names
. . . . . . . . .
1-20
1.9.3
Protection Codes . .
1-20
1.9.4
File Daemon
. . . .
1-22
1.9.5
SYSTEM DEFAULTS
. . . .
1-22
1.10
WILDCARD CONSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . .
1-22
1.11
1.12
SEARCH LISTS . . . . . . . .
.....
1-25
LIBRARIES
. . . .
1.13
1-26
. . . .
DIRECTORY PATHS
1.14
1-26
USER-DEFINABLE COMMANDS
. . . .
1-28
1.15
PROGRAMMING THE LN01 LASER PRINTER .
1-28
1.16
LN01 ESCAPE AND CONTROL SEQUENCES
1.16.1
1-28
1.16.1.1
ESCape Sequences . .
1-29
Control Sequences
. . . .
1-29
1.16.1.2
Font Management
. . . . . . . . . . . .
1.16.2
1-30
1.16.3
Loading Fonts
. . . .
1-30

iii

CHAPTER 2
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.1.4
2.1.5
2.1.6
2.1.7
2.1.8
2.1.9
2.1.10
2.2

SYSTEM COMMANDS
FUNCTIONAL GROUPS OF COMMANDS
Job-Control Commands .
. . . .
Information Commands . .
. . . .
Terminal-Control Commands
. . . . . .
Terminal-Communication Commands
. . . . . .
File-Handling Commands . . .
....
Device-Handling Commands .
. . . . .
Program-Preparation Commands
Program-Control Commands .. . . . . . . .
Network Commands .
. . . ..
....
MI C Commands .
....
. . . ..
COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS .
. . . . . ..
ACCOUNT Command
. . . . . . .
ALLOCATE Command.
.......
ASSIGN Command .
ATTACH Command . .
.....
....
BACKSPACE Command
. . . . . . . . . . .
CANCEL Command . . .
. . . . . . . ..
CCONTINUE Command
. . . . .
CLOSE Command . . . . . .
COMPILE Command . . . . . . . . . . .
CONTEXT Command . . . .
. . . . . .
CONTINUE Command
. . . . . . .
COpy Command . . . . .
CORE Command . .
. . . ..
CPUNCH Command .
CREF Command .
CSTART Command
. . . . . ..
DAYTIME Command
DDT Command
. . . . . . .
DEALLOCATE Command
......
DEASSIGN Command .
DEBUG Command
. . .
DECLARE Command
.....
. . . .
DELETE Command . . . . . . . . . .
DEPOSIT Command
. . . .
. . . ..
DETACH Command .
DIRECTORY Command
DISABLE Command
DISMOUNT Command . . . . . . . . .
DSK Command
ENABLE Command .
EOF Command
EXAMINE Command
EXECUTE Command
FILE Command .
FINISH Command .
. .
FUDGE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GET Command . . . .
. .
HALT Command .
HELP Command .
.
INITIA Command
JCONTINUE Command
KJOB Command .
. . . . . . . . . .
LABEL Command . . . .
. . . . .
LIST Command .
LOAD Command .
LOCATE Command
....
. . . . .
LOGIN Command . . . . .
MAIL Command . .
. . . . . . . . .
MAKE Command . .
. . . .
.
MERGE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iv

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
..
. .
.
.

.
.

·
.
.
·
.
·
.
.
·
·
.
·
·
.
·

2-1
2-1
2-2
2-2
2-2
2-2
2-3
2-3
2-3
2-3
2- 4

2-5
2-5
2-6
2-13
2-15
2-20
2-21
2-23
2-26
2-27
2-33
2-35
2-37
2-39
2-41
2-49
2-51
2-54
2-55
2-59
2-62
2-64
2-71
2-73
2-75
2-76
2-77
2-86
2-88
2-92
2-93
2-94
2-95
2-96
2-102
2-107
2-109
2-111
2-113
2-115
2-117
2-124
2-125
2-128
2-129
2-130
2-135
2-137
2-149
2-150
2-151

MIC Commands . . .
MOUNT Command . . . .
NETWORK Command
NODE Command . . .
PASSWORD Command
PJOB Command . .
· .
PLEASE Command . .
PLOT Command . . . . . . . . . . · .
POP Command
PRESERVE Command
· .
PRINT Command
PROTECT Command . . . . . . . . . .
PUNCH Command . . . . . .
PUSH Command . . .
QUEUE Command
R Command . . . .
REASSIGN Command .
REATTACH Command
REENTER Command . . . . . . . . . .
RENAME Command . . .
RESOURCES Command . . . .
REWIND Command . .
. . . . .
RUN Command
. . . . . . . .
SAVE Command . . . . . .
....
SCHED Command . . . .
... .
SEND Command . . .
SESSION Command
SET BLOCKSIZE Command
SET BREAK Command
SET CDR Command . . . . . . . . . .
SET CPU Command
SET DDT BREAKPOINT Command . . . . .
SET DEFAULT BIGBUF Command
SET DEFAULT BUFFERS Command . . . .
SET DEFAULT PROTECTION Command . .
SET DEFER Command . . . .
SET DENSITY Command
. . . .
SET DSKFUL Command .
..... .
SET DSKPRI Command
. . . .
SET FORMAT Command .
....
SET HOST Command . . . . . . . .
SET HPQ Command
SET PHYSICAL Command . . . . . .
SET RETRY Command
SET SPOOL Command
SET TERMINAL or TERMINAL Command . .
SET TIME Command . . . .
SET TTY or TTY Command . .
SET VIRTUAL LIMIT Command . . . .
SET WATCH Command
SHOW ALLOCATION Command
SHOW QUEUES Command
SKIP Command . .
START Command
SUBMIT Command .
SYSTAT Command
TECO Command .
TIME Command . .
TPUNCH Command .
TYPE Command .
UNLOAD Command .
USES TAT Command
VERSION Command
WHERE Command
v

.
.
.
.

.
.

.
.
.

.
·
·
· .
·
. . . .
·
. . . .
·
. . . .
·
.
·
·
· . .
·
·
·
·
....
·
· .
·
· .
·
·
·
·
·
·
. .
· .
.
·
·
·
·
· .
. . . .
· . .
· . .
·
·
·

·
·
·
· . . . .
·
·
· ....
....
·
·
·
·
· ..
·
·
·
· .
·
·

2-153
2-155
2-162
2-168
2-171
2-172
2-173
2-175
2-183
2-184
2-186
2-196
2-198
2-199
2-200
2-221
2-223
2-225
2-226
2-227
2-228
2-229
2-230
2-232
2-234
2-236
2-238
2-240
2-241
2-244
2-245
2-247
2-249
2-250
2-251
2-253
2-255
2-256
2-257
2-258
2-259
2-262
2-264
2-266
2-267
2-269
2-270
2-272
2-281
2-283
2-287
2-290
2-292
2-293
2-295
2-305
2-308
2-309
2-311
2-320
2-321
2-322
2-324
2-327

ZERO Conunand .
APPENDIX A

FUNCTIONAL GROUPS OF COMMANDS

APPENDIX B

SWITCH.INI FILES

APPENDIX C

COMPILE-CLASS COMMANDS

C.1
C.2
C.3
C.4
C.S
C.6
C.7

APPENDIX D
D.1
D.2
D.3

INDIRECT COMMANDS (@ CONSTRUCTION)
THE + CONSTRUCTION . .
THE = CONSTRUCTION . .
THE < > CONSTRUCTION .
DEFAULT COMPILER .
COMPILER SWITCHES
. . . . .
LINK SWITCHES
.

. 2-329

·
·
·
·
....
.......
. . . . ..

C-2
C-3
C-3
C-4
C-4
C-S
C-9

STANDARD SYSTEM NAMES
FILE NAME EXTENSIONS . .
RESERVED PROJECT-PROGRAMMER NUMBERS
ERSATZ DEVICE NAMES

APPENDIX E

CARD CODES

APPENDIX F

TEMPORARY FILES

APPENDIX G

SIXBIT/ASCII CHARACTER CODES

· . D-1
. . . . . D-6
· D-7

INDEX
TABLES
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
2-1
2-2
A-1

C-1
D-1
D-2
D-3
E-1
E-2
F-1

Device Names . .
Generic Device Names .
Protection Codes for Field 1
Protection Codes for Fields 2 and 3
Terminal Hardware Characteristics
Fill Characters
Functional Groups of Conunands
. . .
Processor Switches . . .
.....
File Name Extensions .
Project-Progranuner Numbers .
Ersatz Device Names
ASCII Card Codes .
DEC-026 Card Codes . .
Temporary Files
....

l-lS
1-16
1-21
1-21
· 2-272
· 2-27S
· A-1

·
· .
......
·
·

C-6
D-1
D-6
D-7
E-1
E-3
· F-1

PREFACE

The TOPS-IO Operating System Commands Manual describes the commands
available to the users of the TOPS-IO Operating System. See the
TOPS-IO Operator's Guide for a description of all operator-privileged
commands.
Commands to TOPS-IO are presented in alphabetical order in
for easy reference.

Chapter

Reference material for assembly language programming can be found in
the TOPS-IO Monitor Calls Manual Volumes 1 and 2, the DECsystem-10
MACRO Assembler Reference Manual, and the DECIO/20 Processor Reference
Manual.
Getting Started with DECsystem-10 introduces first-time users to the
TOPS-IO operating system command language.
You should read this
manual at least once before reading the TOPS-IO Operating System
Commands Manual.
You should also be familiar with Introduction to
DECsystem-10.
SYNOPSIS OF TOPS-l0 OPERATING SYSTEM COMMANDS MANUAL

Chapter 1 describes the components of the TOPS-IO operating system and
how to use them.
Chapter 2 lists the functional categories of commands, lists all the
commands
alphabetically,
and describes each command in detail.
Examples accompany the command descriptions.
The appendixes contain additional reference material.

vii

CONVENTIONS USED IN THIS MANUAL

The following conventions are used in this manual:
Convention

Meaning

addr

Program or location address

arg

An argument to a command

c (addr)

The contents of an octal address

core

Refers to main (processor) memory

CTRL/x

A control character.
in section 1.6.

date

date-time

The date and time in the standard
Section 1.8.3.)

Control characters are

date in the form of dd-mm-yy.
represents November 22, 1993.

For example,

explained
22-11-93
(Refer

density

The density of a magnetic tape

dev:
device-name

Any logical or physical device name. A colon (:)
must be included when a device name is part of
file specification. Refer to Section 1.9.1.

[directory]
[dir]

expression

file.ext

A file name and a file extension, separated by a period

file name

A name of a file

file-spec

File structure

High, referring to a job's high segment

hh:mm:ss

The time of day using a 24-hour clock (0 through 23),
where hh is hours, mm is minutes, and ss is seconds

An identifier

job

A job number

jobname

The name of the job.

key

A keyword to a command argument.

Low, referring to a job's low segment

letter

An alphabetic character

The left half of an octal word

line-number

Refers to the number of the line

directory
SFD.

name.

This can

format.

be either a

UFD or an

numeric expression

file
specification
dev:file.ext[directory] .

viii

written
in
the
format:
Refer to Section 1.9.

list

A list of arguments

logical-name
log-name
log

A logical device name, chosen by the user

memory

The decimal number of memory words measured in K or P.
1K is equal to 1024 words; 1P (page) is equal to 512
words.

MFD

A master file directory

<nnn>

A protection code

nnnn

A tape density

A decimal number, such as a unit number

"'name'"

A DECtape identifier

nodelist

A list of all the systems in a network environment

PPN

A project-programmer number

program

A program name

proj,prog

A project-programmer number

[proj, prog]
[ppn]

The name of a user-file directory

The right half of an octal word

SFD

A sub-file directory

spec

A specification of a file

str

A file structure name

/switch

A command line modifier

time

Refers to a time of day

UFD

A user-file directory

version number

A numeric or text variable

A node number in a device name

The symbol printed on your terminal when you press
ESCape (ALTmode) key
.

"'x

A character that is printed when you press the CONTROL
key while you type a character key.
For example,
typing a CTRL/C prints "'c at your terminal.

<DEL>

Indicates when you should press the DELETE (RUBOUT) key

<RET>

Indicates when you should press the RETURN key

octal number

the

<ESC>

Indicates when you should press
key

the

ESCape

(ALTmode)

Vertical bars (I) in the left margin denote changes or
additions to the TOPS-lO Operating System since the
last printing of this manual
o

Bullets Co) in the left margin denote deletions from
the TOPS-lO Operating System since the last printing of
this manual

All examples, commands, switches, values, and arguments are shown in
uppercase.
This is for the sake of distinction. Examples are shown
as they would appear on a terminal that does not have lowercase
ability.
MANUALS REFERENCED

The following manuals are referred to in the text of this manual:
Introduction to DECsystem-lO
Getting Started with DECsystem-lO
TOPS-lO/TOPS-20 Batch Reference Manual
TOPS-lO User Utilities Manual
TOPS-lO Monitor Calls Manual, Vols.

land 2

DECsystem-lO MACRO Assembler Reference Manual
DEClO/20 Processor Reference Manual
TOPS-lO Operator's Guide
TOPS-lO Software Installation Guide
TOPS-lO LINK Programmer's Reference Manual
TOPS-lO/TOPS-20 FORTRAN Language Manual
TOPS-lO/TOPS-20 DECmail/MS Manual
TOPS-lO DDT Manual
TOPS-lO MAKLIB User's Guide
VT52 Owner's Manual
LNOl Programmer's Reference Manual

CHAPTER 1
INTRODUCTION

TOPS-10 is the name of the Timesharing Operating System for use on
DIGITAL's KL10 and KS10 systems.
You communicate with the TOPS-10
operating system using the TOPS-10 command language.
The TOPS-10
operatjng system is also called the monitor.

1.1

JOBS

TOPS-10 is a timesharing system; that is, the system transfers control
rapidly among a number of jobs, so that all jobs appear to be running
simultaneously. The term job refers to the entire sequence of steps
that you start from your terminal'or card deck.
You start a job from
your terminal by using the LOGIN command, and you use the KJOB command
to end your job.
You can initiate a job at a central computer site
location.

from

remote

After you initiate a job,
you can initiate a second job without
terminating the first.
For example, you can initiate a timesharing
job and, using the SUBMIT command,
submit a second job for batch
processing.
(The SUBMIT command is discussed in Chapter 2.)
When configuring and loading TOPS-10, the system administrator
the maximum number of jobs the system can process.

1.2

sets

CONNECTING TO THE SYSTEM

Only authorized users have access
to
TOPS-10.
Your
system
administrator provides each authorized user with a user name, a
project programmer number (PPN) , and a password. These identify all
users and their corresponding areas on file structures. When you
specify a directory area, your project-programmer number identifies
you.
A comma separates the project and programmer numbers, and the
entire PPN is enclosed in square brackets. For example, [27,4072].
The project numbers range from 1 to 377777
(octal).
The programmer
numbers range from 1 to 777777
(octal). Numbers 1 through 7 are
reserved for DIGITAL, and numbers 400000 through 777777 are reserved
for special purposes.
Your password is one to thirty-nine characters long and is used when
you log in to the system and when you attach to another job.
(Refer
to the LOGIN and ATTACH commands, Chapter 2.)
To maintain password
secrecy,
the monitor does not echo your password on the terminal.
When you are using a terminal with local copy, a mask is printed when
you type your password, making the password unreadable.
1-1

INTRODUCTION
1.3

OPERATING SYSTEM MODES

You can run jobs on the TOPS-1e
interactive mode and batch mode.

1.3.1

operating

system

two

modes:

Interactive Mode

Jobs that run in interactive mode use a terminal to access the system.
The language you use to run a
job is the command language.
The
commands you type on the terminal are received and processed by the
command language interpreter of the TOPS-10 monitor.
When your job is
in interactive mode, you complete your work at two levels:
monitor
and user level.
Section 1.4. discusses interactive levels.

1.3.2

Batch Mode

Batch jobs communicate with the system in batch mode.
They are input
to the system from punched cards or from the terminal.
Batch jobs are
handled by the batch command interpreter.
For information about
TOPS-10 batch, refer to the TOPS-10/TOPS-20 Batch Reference Manual.

1.4

INTERACTIVE LEVELS

When your terminal is in interactive mode, your job is at one
levels, monitor level or user level.

1.4.1

two

Monitor Level

When your job is at monitor level,
you are communicating with the
monitor.
The command language interpreter processes each command you
type.
The monitor prompts you with a period
(.).
Every monitor
command should follow this prompt.
You end a monitor command by
pressing the RETURN key «RET».
The format of each command is variable because many commands are
followed by optional switches,
arguments, or values.
(See Section
1.8. )

Section 1.6 contains descriptions of the
special keys you use when typing commands.

1.4.2

control

characters

and

User Level

When you type the operating system command RUN, followed by a program
name,
your job moves from monitor level to user level.
To move back
to monitor level, type CTRL/C.
If the program is not' waiting for
terminal input,
it may be necessary to type CTRL/C twice.
(Refer to
Section 1.6.1.)
Other commands also bring your job to user level. When your job is at
user level,
you are working with a program other than the operating
system itself.
Each program has its own set of commands and its own
command interpreter.
This manual describes some system programs.
System programs usually prompt with an asterisk (*).
1-2

INTRODUCTION
At user level,
control characters and special keys can have a
different.
effect
than they have at monitor level.
Read the
description of each program to determine the effects of the control
characters and special keys.
The following example
interactive job:

shows

dialogue

with

the

system

Example
Monitor level:
.R SETSRC<RET>
User level and program response:
*T<RET>
DSKC:,DSKB:,FENCE
User level:
*A DSKN:<RET>
User level and program response:
*T<RET>
DSKC:,DSKB:,DSKN:,FENCE
CTRL/C to return to monitor level:
*"C
Monitor prompt at monitor level:

1.5

CONTEXTS

A core image is what a job's portion of memory contains at any given
time.
The core image,
as well as information about the monitor's
state with respect to your job,
constitute a context.
When you
initialize a program,
your context usually changes. For instance,
running the DIRECT program creates a core image with the DIRECT
program in it. Exiting DIRECT and then running SYSTAT, for example,
destroys what you had in memory (the DIRECT program)
and loads data
pertinent to SYSTAT.
Three commands allow you to display information about contexts,
and
manipulate them in various ways.
These commands are CONTEXT, PUSH,
and POP.
CONTEXT and PUSH create additional contexts.
POP returns
you to a superior context. When you work with multiple contexts, at
least one context is preserved while you work with the current
context.

1-3

INTRODUCTION
You can work with multiple contexts by creating parallel contexts,
or
creating inferior contexts.
The default maximum number of contexts,
including current, parallel, and inferior, is four.
The number of
contexts in use at any moment is shown by the CONTEXT command.
You
can also use the CONTEXT command to create parallel contexts.
You
might create a parallel context, run a frequently accessed program in
it, and then exit, returning to your previous context. Both contexts
now exist simultaneously.
When you need to use the program in the
created context, simply switch to that context.
You will not have to
wait for it to reinitialize.
The full description of the CONTEXT
command in Chapter 2 gives an example of this procedure, including how
to create and access a parallel context.
The PUSH command allows you to create an inferior context.
When you
return to your previous task in a superior context, the inferior
context is deleted.
You return to the superior context using the POP
command.
An
inferior context could be used in the following
situation:
If you were in the process of completing a task,
and
needed to see some HELP text, you could create an inferior context,
read the HELP text you needed, destroy the inferior context and return
to the unchanged superior context.
The system automatically creates a
new context for certain commands.
The system manager can set the
system to create a new context when any monitor command is issued.

1.6

SPECIAL CHARACTERS

The command language interpreter recognizes several special characters
that cause specific functions to be performed.
These special characters are described in the following sections.

1.6.1

CTRL/C - Interrupt

When you type a CTRL/C
(control-C),
the monitor interrupts your
current running program and returns your terminal to monitor mode.
You must type two CTRL/Cs if your program is not requesting input from
your terminal (that is, if your program is executing).
If you issue a
CTRL/C while typing a command in monitor mode, this character causes
the input line to be deleted.
If you issue two CTRL/Cs while output
is being printed on your terminal, the output is ended.

Example
This example shows a program prompt.
monitor level.

1.6.2

CTRL/C brings your

job

DELETE Key

When you press the DELETE (RUBOUT) key, the monitor deletes the last
character you typed.
This function permits you·to correct typing
errors. When you press the DELETE key n times,
the monitor deletes
the last n characters that you typed.
On hard-copy terminals the
monitor echoes all deleted characters on your terminal and encloses
the deleted characters in backslashes (\).
1-4

INTRODUCTION
On video terminals the deleted characters that you typed are removed
from the screen. However, you must inform the monitor of the kind of
terminal you are using.
(Refer to the SET TTY command in Chapter 2.)
After you press RETURN or ESCape, you cannot use the DELETE function
on that line.
Example
Type the characters SET TTY TYPE L036, press
times, then type the correct characters .

the

DELETE

key

. SET TTY TYPE L036\630\A36<RET>

1.6.3

CTRL/W - Delete Word

When you type CTRL/W (control-W), the monitor deletes
you typed.

the

A word is defined as all spaces,
tabs,
and alphanumeric
until a nonalphanumeric character is encountered.

last

word

characters

On video terminals, the deleted word is erased from the screen.
On hard-copy terminals, the deleted word is printed backwards
backslashes.

between

Example
Type the characters SET TTY TYPE L036, type CTRL/W, and type
correct characters .

the

. SET TTY TYPE L036\630L\LA36<RET>

1.6.4

CTRL/U - Delete Line

When you type CTRL/U (control-U), the monitor deletes your current
input line,
back to the last time you pressed RETURN.
On hard-copy
terminals, the monitor responds with a carriage-return/line-feed,
after which you can retype the line.
On video terminals, the entire
line that you typed is removed from the screen.
After you have
pressed RETURN,
you can no longer use the line-editing features (for
example, CTRL/U and DELETE) on that line.
Example
Type CTRL/U .
. SETTTY AU
Type the correct characters.
SET TTY LA36<RET>

1-5

INTRODUCTION
1.6.5

CTRL/R - Reprint Line

When you type CTRL/R (control-R), the monitor reprints the current
input line.
If you type a line incorrectly, then make corrections
using the DELETE key, the monitor will print the corrected line when
you type CTRL/R.
The following is an example of this operation using
a hard-copy terminal:
Example
If you type:
SET TTQ<DEL>Y NO<DEL>O FILE<DEL>L
The line appears as:
.SET TTQ\Q\Y NO\O\O FILE\E\L
If you then press CTRL/R:
.SET TTQ\Q\Y NO\O\O FILE\E\L AR
The monitor prinis:
SET TTY NO FILL
When you type CTRL/R, the monitor issues a carriage-return/line-feed
before printing the corrected input line.
The cursor or printing head
of your terminal is left at its previous location.
If a program such as your text editor uses CTRL/R for another purpose,
you can disable the CTRL/R function using the SET TTY RTCOMP command.
(See Chapter 2 for a complete description of this command.)

1.6.6

CTRL/O - Cancel Output

When you type CTRL/O (control-O), the monitor cancels output to your
terminal.
This function is useful when a program begins to print a
long message that you are not interested in reading.
If you do not
want to wait for the monitor to finish printing the message, you can
stop the monitor from printing the message one of two ways.
First,
you can type two CTRL/Cs, but this action also stops the execution of
the program.
Second, you can type a single CTRL/O.
When you type CTRL/O, the monitor continues executing your program,
but does not print any output on your terminal.
The monitor begins
printing to your terminal when one of the following conditions occurs:
o

The executing program requests input from your terminal.

The program ends and returns control to the monitor.

You type CTRL/C twice, which returns control to the monitor.

To start the output to your terminal again, type another CTRL/O.

1-6

INTRODUCTION
1.6.7

CTRL/S - Hold Output

When you type CTRL/S (control-S), the monitor holds output to your
terminal. - This control character works only after you have typed the
SET TTY PAGE command.
(See Chapter 2.)
This control character is
useful if you have a display terminal, and you have to stop the output
to read it.
To read the rest of the output, type CTRL/Q.

1.6.8

CTRL/Q - Resume Output

When you type CTRL/Q (control-Q), the monitor resumes output to your
terminal.
CTRL/S and CTRL/Q are useful when you are using a display
terminal.
Used in conjunction with CTRL/S, you can stop and continue
output to your terminal,
thus reading a file before it scrolls off
your display screen.

1.6.9

CTRL/T - Job Status

When you type CTRL/T
(control-T),
the
monitor
prints
status
information pertaining to your job on your terminal.
CTRL/T does not
echo on your terminal.
There are 10 items of information output to
your terminal.
These items are:
1.

The incremental daytime (which is the time since you last
issued a CTRL/T or a USES TAT command) or the time since you
logged in if you have not issued a CTRL/T or a USES TAT
command.
(For example, DAY: :05:43.)

The incremental runtime, which is the CPU time used since you
issued a CTRL/T,
USESTAT command,
LOGIN command, or TIME
command.
(For example, RUN:0.48.)

The incremental disk reads,
which is the number of disk
blocks read since you issued a CTRL/T, USESTAT command, LOGIN
command, or DSK command.
(For example, RD:75.)

Incremental disk writes, which is the number of disk blocks
written since you issued a CTRL/T, USESTAT, LOGIN, or DSK
command.
(For example, WR:8.)

The program name.

(For example, SOS.)

The memory size.

(For example, 12+19P.)

The current context number (for example, Ctx:1.)

The job state.
The job state codes are described in the
SYSTAT command description in Chapter 2.
(For example, AC.)
An ampersand after the job state code indicates the job is
locked in core. An asterisk indicates the job is being run
or swapped.

The program counter, which is the address
instruction.
(For example, PC:400275.)

10.

the

current

The job state, which can be INPUT WAIT or OUTPUT WAIT.
This
item is printed only when you type CTRL/T from user level.
(For example, OUTPUT WAIT FOR TTY21.)

1-7

INTRODUCTION
This information can be obtained with the USESTAT command at monitor
level.
However,
by typing CTRL/T,
you can determine your job's
progress without interrupting its 8xecution. When you type CTRL/T,
the character is not passed to your job as an input character.
However, some programs activate a special interrupt feature when you
type CTRL/T.
(See the TOPS-I0 Monitor Calls Manual.)
If a system program, such as your text editor uses CTRL/T for another
purpose,
you can disable the CTRL/T function using the SET TTY RTCOMP
command.
(See Chapter 2 for a complete description of this command.)
Example
DAY:

1.7

:05:43 RUN:0.48 RD:75 WR:8 SOS 12+19P Ctx:l PC:400275

TYPE-AHEAD CAPABILITY

Type-ahead allows you to type another command without waiting for the
monitor to respond to your first command.
If you want two operations
performed, you can begin typing the request for the second operation
before you receive the prompt that the monitor prints after completing
the first operation.
If an error occurs during the first operation,
the characters you typed ahead are ignored.

1.8

COMMAND FORMATS

The general format of each command is a line of ASCII uppercase or
lowercase
characters
or a mixture of uppercase and lowercase
characters.
You type the commands after the monitor prints the
TOPS-I0 prompt
(.).
The following are examples of valid TOPS-I0
commands:
. DIRECT
.direct
. dirECT
If you type spaces or tabs before a command name, the system ignores
them.
For example, the following commands produce the same result:
.DlRECT
DIRECT
The commands you type to the command language interpreter are one to
six characters long.
If you type any character past the sixth
character,
the monitor ignores it.
You need only type enough
characters to uniquely identify the command.
It is sometimes possible to abbreviate a command by typing characters
fewer than would make the command unique.
This is not encouraged,
however, because uniqueness of a command may vary from monitor release
to monitor release.
For this reason, you should use the whole command
in a batch control file.

1.8.1

Command Termination

You terminate every command to the command
pressing the RETURN key.
For example:
.DlRECT<RET>
1-8

language

interpreter

INTRODUCTION
1.8.2

Line Continuation

You can continue a command line to some system programs,
such as
DIRECT and QUEUE,
by placing a hyphen
(-) as the last nonblank,
noncomment character before you press the RETURN key.
These programs
treat continuation lines as part of the current command line.
This
feature allows you to type indefinitely long command lines. A line is
terminated by a <RET> that is not preceded by a hyphen.

1.8.3

Command Arguments

You specify arguments to a command after the command name and separate
them from the command name by a space.
If the command language
interpreter recognizes a command name, but cannot find a necessary
argument, the monitor responds with the error message:
?TOO FEW ARGUMENTS
Example
The ASSIGN command requires arguments .
. ASSIGN<RET>
System error message:
?TOO FEW ARGUMENTS
TOPS-10 prompt:

After the monitor prints the error message, your terminal is left in
monitor mode, as indicated by the monitor prompt.
You can then retype
the command.

1.8.3.1 Relative Date-Time Arguments - Certain
commands
require
arguments that specify a date or time.
Date and time arguments can be
either relative or absolute. A relative argument specifies a certain
length of time from the current date or time.
The format of a
relative argument is:
+number-of-daysD:hours:minutes:seconds
Where:
number-of-days

is optional.

is required if you specify number of days.

hours

is optional if you specify number of days with
the letter D.
Otherwise, hours is required.

minutes

is optional.

seconds

is optional.
However, if you specify seconds,
minutes must also be given or seconds will be
interpreted as minutes.

1-9

INTRODUCTION
You must type a colon to separate one field from the other.
You can
precede a relative argument with an optional plus (+) or minus (-)
sign. The sign implies either past (-) or future (+).
When you do
not specify number of days, you must precede the time with a plus sign
or a minus sign. For example:
-30:4:27:21
means 3 days, 4 hours, 27 minutes, and 21 seconds ago.

Similarly:

means 4 hours from now.

1.8.3.2 Absolute Date-Time Arguments - An absolute argument specifies
a particular date or time.
The format of an absolute argument is one
of the following:

Where:

weekday:hours:minutes:seconds

date:hours:minutes:seconds

keyword:hour~:minutes:seconds

weekday is the day of the week
YESTERDAY, TODAY, TOMORROW.
This part of the argument is
abbreviated as follows:
SUNDAY
MONDAY
TUESDAY
WEDNESDAY
THURSDAY
FRIDAY
SATURDAY

one

optional.

of
The

the

following:

weekdays

are

SUN
MON
TUES
WED
THUR
FRI
SAT

date is optional and has one of the following formats:
day-month-year (21-0CT-79)
month-day-year (OCT-21-79)
numeric month-day-year (10-21-79)
The month can be abbreviated.
The abbreviations for
the months are JA, F, MAR, AP, MAY, JUN, JUL, AU, S, 0,
N, and D.
The year and its preceding hyphen are optional, and, if
given,
can be one, two, or four digits. For example,
0, 90, and 1990 will all be interpreted as the year
1990.
keyword is one of the following options:
LOGIN (time of login)
NOON
MIDNIGHT
1-10

INTRODUCTION
hours is based on a 24-hour clock
(0 through 23)
and is
required if you omitted the weekday, date, or keyword, or if
-you specify minutes.
minutes is optional unless you specify seconds.
seconds is optional.
The following example specifies Wednesday at 9:15:06 AM.
Example
WED:09:15:06
Because the date is known to be past or future from either the switch
used
(/BEFORE and /SINCE imply past, /AFTER implies the future) or by
a plus or minus sign, an unspecified field is filled in so that the
result is the next or last occurrence of the specified date.
If you
omit the time argument, the time defaults to 00:00:00
(midnight)
if
past,
and 23:59:59
(11 o'clock,
59 minutes, and 59 second PM) if
future.
Examples
/AFTER:SAT is after 23:59:59 next Saturday
/BEFORE:25-FEB is before last February 25th
/SINCE:JUL-3-85 is since July 3, 1985 at midnight

1.8.4

Command Switches

You can modify some commands by including a switch in the command
line.
You precede each switch with a slash (/) and terminate it with
a nonalphanumeric character,
usually <RET>,
a comma,
or another
switch.
You can abbreviate the switch if its name remains unique.
Abbreviation is not recommended for batch control files.
Valid
switches for each command are documented as part of the command
descriptions in Chapter 2.
The following is an example of a command,
command argument, and command switch:
Example
.PRINT MYFILE.EXT/COPIES:2

1.8.4.1 Temporary Switches - The switches for COMPILE-class commands
are either temporary
(local)
or permanent (global).
COMPILE-class
commands are further described in Appendix C.
A temporary switch
applies only to the immediately preceding file.
Do not place a space
or comma between the file name and the switch.
In the command
construction:
.COMPILE PROG,TEST/MACRO,SUBLET
the /MACRO switch applies only to the file named TEST.

1-11

INTRODUCTION
1.8.4.2 Permanent Switches - A permanent switch, sometimes called a
sticky switch, applies to all files following it on the command line,
until you modify it by a subsequent switch.
You separate the switch
from the file name by spaces, commas, or a combination of both. For
example, using the /MACRO switch:
Examp1es
Temporary switch that affects PROG:
.COMPILE PROG/MACRO TEST, SUBLET
Temporary switch that affects PROG:
.COMPILE PROG/MACRO,TEST,SUBLET
Permanent switch that affects TEST and SUBLET:
.COMPILE PROG,/MACRO,TEST,SUBLET
Permanent switch that affects TEST and SUBLET:
.COMPILE PROG,/MACRO TEST, SUBLET
The COMPILE, LOAD, EXECUTE, and DEBUG command descriptions in
2 list the switches for these commands.

1.8.5

Chapter

Comments

You can type a comment on the same line as a command by preceding the
comment with a semicolon (;) or exclamation point (!).
The monitor
and the batch command language interpreters do not attempt to
interpret the characters after the semicolon.
Comment lines are
useful when you are using a hard-copy terminal,
or making control
files for batch jobs.
The following is an example of a line that
contains both a command and a comment:
.DIRECT

1.9

;will list names of files in default area <RET>

FILE SPECIFICATION

The system stores programs and data as named files.
When they are
stored
on
DECtape
or disk,
files are identified by a file
specification.
The file specification
includes
the
following
identifications:
1.

A device name or file structure name

A file name

A file name extension

ordered list of directory names

access protection code

The file specification is necessary to identify a disk file.
If you
issue a file specification for devices other than DECtape or disk, the
monitor ignores them. File specifications are used to choose a file
from a directory,
a set of files belonging to a specific user.
1-12

INTRODUCTION
DECtapes and disks are the only directory-oriented devices.
and 5 in the above list do not apply to DECtapes.

Items

The device name can be any valid device name described in the Section
1.9.1.
Always type a colon following the device name. An example of
a device name is DSKC:.
A file name is one to six alphanumeric characters.
The monitor
ignores all characters past the sixth. File names are discussed in
Section 1.9.2. An example of a device name and a file name is
DSKC:MYFILE.
The file name extension is a period (.)
followed by zero to three
characters.
It is used to indicate the type of information in the
file.
(Refer to Appendix D for a list of standard file name
extensions.)
For the most efficient use of system resources, use only
standard file name extensions, though other extensions can be valid.
Most programs recognize file names and extensions consisting only of
letters and digits.
Often the term file name refers to both the file
name and the file extension. An example of a device name, file name,
and file extension is DSKC:MYFILE.TXT.
The directory name identifies the disk area where the file is stored.
This list can be a user file directory (UFD) represented by the
owner's project-programmer number, or a user file directory followed
by one or more sub-file directories
(SFDs).
You must enclose a
directory name in square brackets ([]).
Directory names are discussed
in Section 1.9.3.
An
example of a device name, file name, file
extension and directory name is DSKC:MYFILE.TXT[21,589].
The access protection code of a file is a 3-digit octal code
designating the users who can read or write the file.
The code must
be enclosed in angle brackets « »,
and you specify it only for
output files.
For a given file, users are divided into three groups:
owner of the file, users with the same project number as the owner,
and all other users.
The standard protection code is <057>, allowing
users in the owner's project to read and execute the file,
and
preventing access by all other users.
The standard protection code
may be different at your installation.
Protection codes are described
in Section 1.9.4.
An
example of a full file specification is
DSKC:MYFILE.TXT[21,589]<055>.
The following information is necessary when you refer to a file:
o

The file name.

The device name, if the file is not on disk and not
default search list.

The directory name, if the file is not in your directory.

your

The following information is optional in a file specification:
o

The file name extension.

The device name, if the file is on a file structure
search list.

The directory name, if the file is in your directory.

The protection code (if an output file).

1-13

your

INTRODUCTION
Examples

File name and file name extension:
TEXT.MAC
Physical device name and file name:
DTA3:FILEA
Generic device name, file name, file name extension and directory
name:
DSK:PROG2.CBL[10,16]
A complete file specification:
device name, file name, file name
extension, directory name, and protection code:
DSKA:MAIN.F4[27,235]<057>

1.9.1

Device Names

TOPS-10 supports a number of peripheral input/output devices to handle
data acquisition, storage, retrieval, and display.
These devices are:
Card Punch
Disk
Hard-copy Terminal
Paper Tape Punch

Card Reader
Display Terminal
Line Printer
Paper Tape Reader

DECtape
Graphics Display
Magnetic Tape
Plotter

The monitor allocates a device to your job when you request access to
the device.
(Refer to the ASSIGN and MOUNT commands in Chapter 2.)
Until you request a device, it resides in the system pool of available
resources.
To reference a device, you must specify a device name.
In the command
descriptions in this manual,
places where you must supply a device
name have the symbol dev:
in the command line format.
The types of
device names are listed in Table 1.1 and are described in Sections
1.9.1.1 through 1.9.1.5.

1-14

INTRODUCTION
Table 1-1:

Device Names

Type of Name

Meaning

generic

These specify a generic type of device such
as a disk (DSK:) or a magnetic tape (MTA:).

physical

These specify a particular physical unit on
a
specific
controller
such as MTA1:,
magnetic-tape unit number 1.

logical

These are substitute names for devices.
You
assign these names with the ASSIGN command.

ersatz

These are names for ersatz
(pseudo-disk)
devices normally used to contain libraries
or special directories.

system defined
logical

These are names defined by the system.
Each name corresponds to a physical unit so
long as the unit is declared to be the
system default for that unit.

1.9.1.1 Generic Device Names - The most general type of device name
is the generic device name.
When you specify a generic name, the
monitor selects a free unit of the device type specified.
When your
computer is in a network environment, the monitor chooses the device
from those devices at your location, or, if none are available,
the
monitor chooses the device from the host (central) site.
A generic name can be two or three letters long and is followed
colon (:).
The generic names are listed in Table 1-2.

Two-character generic names are less specific than three-character
generic names.
For example,
MT: means any magnetic tape unit, but
MTA: means any magnetic tape unit on controller A.
When you specify
the generic name DSK: or DS:, the monitor uses your job search list to
determine which disk device should be selected for you.
(Refer to
Section 1.12.)

1-15

INTRODUCTION
Table 1-2:

Generic Device Names

Device

Card punch
Card reader
Console terminal
DECtape
Disk
Packs
Fixed head
Display
Line printer
lowercase/uppercase
uppercase
Magnetic tape
7-track
9-track
Operator terminal
Paper-tape punch
Paper-tape reader
Plotter
Pseudo-terminal
System library
Terminal

3-Letter
Device Name

2-Letter
Device Name

CDP:
CDR:
CTY:
DTx:
DSK:
DPx:
RPx:
FHx:
FSx:
DIS:
LPT:

CP:
CR:
DT:
DS:
DP:
RP:
FH:
FS:
LP:
LL:
LU:

MTx:
M7:
M9:
OPR:
PTP:
PTR:
PLT:
PTY:
SYS:
TTY:

PP:
PR:
SY:
TT:

When you specify a generic
name,
the
monitor
selects
the
lowest-numbered available unit of the device type specified.
There
are two defaults when you specify a generic name:

When your program specifies DSK or DS, the system
job search list.

uses

your

When you specify TTY: or TT:, the monitor always selects your
terminal (assuming that these are not logical names) .

1.9.1.2 Physical Device Names - Every I/O device has a physical name.
This name consists of the generic name,
a letter indicating the
controller, and one numeric character indicating the unit number.
For
example,
the generic name MTA: indicates any magnetic tape unit on
controller A.
However,
MTA1:
indicates magnetic tape unit 1 on
controller A.

1.9.1.3 File Structures - The TOPS-10 operating system organizes disk
devices
into
file
structures.
File
structures are logical
arrangements of 128-word blocks on one or more disk units.
A file
structure can exist on one disk unit, or it can be distributed over
several disk units designated by a single name.
However,· two file
structures cannot exist on the same unit.

1-16

INTRODUCTION
The operator or system administrator assigns a name to every file
structure when he or she defines the system's file structures.
This
name is one to four characters long, and cannot duplicate a physical
device name,
a unit name, or an existing file structure name.
The
recommended
names
for
public
file
structures
are
DSKA:,
DSKB:, ... ,DSKO: in order of decreasJng speed.
File structures are illustrated and explained in detail in the TOPS-I0
Monitor Calls Manual Vol.
1.

1.9.1.4 Logical Device Names - You can assign a logical name to a
physical device.
The monitor will recognize the name that you assign,
and associate the logical name with the physical device.
You can
assign a logical name to a device using the ASSIGN command.
The logical name that you assign may be up to six alphanumeric
characters and may optionally be ended by a colon (:).
Thereafter,
the monitor will use the device that you associated with the logical
name,
when you or your programs specify that logical name.
Logical
names are cleared by the DEASSIGN command.
That is, use the DEASSIGN
command to disassociate logical names from devices.
Logical names are
also cleared when you log off the system, and when you specify another
logical name for the same device.
Logical names are useful when you are writing a program that needs a
device,
but you will not know until program execution what device you
will need.
Use a logical name in the program to represent the device.
Before you run the program use the ASSIGN command to associate the
logical name with a physical device.
Logical names take precedence over physical names.
Therefore, if you
assign the logical name DSK: to the device MTA3: (magnetic tape unit 3
on controller A), all output to generic DSK will go to the magnetic
tape.
Some names are recognized by the monitor as special system-defined
logical names that the monitor translates into physical device names.
One example is the generic device name OPR:.
The generic name OPR: is
the system-default logical name for the operator's terminal.
Therefore, the terminal specified as OPR:
can change during system
operation; but if you send a message to OPR:, the message will be
routed to the last physical device declared to be the operator's
terminal at your node.
All devices except terminals can be designated as being restricted
devices.
You request a restricted device from the system pool of
available resources by issuing the MOUNT command.
This command
requires operator intervention before the specified device is assigned
to your job.
The system deassigns a restricted device from your job
when you log off the system or issue the DISMOUNT, DEASSIGN, or FINISH
command.
Unrestricted devices are assigned to your job on a first-come,
first-served basis when you lssue the MOUNT or ASSIGN command.
The
device assignment remains in effect until you release the device by
issuing a DEASSIGN command or a FINISH command, or you log off the
system.
The following example illustrates the use of both physical and logical
device names.

1-17

INTRODUCTION
Example

You request a DECtape drive with the logical name ABC:
.ASSIGN DTA: ABC:
The monitor gives you unrestricted device DTAO: (DECtape number 0
on controller A).
You then mount a DECtape on drive DTAO:
DTAO ASSIGNED
You request any paper-tape punch and
name ABC: be assigned to it .

request

that

the

logical

. ASSIGN PTP: ABC:
The monitor prints a warning message,
telling you that the
logical name was previously assigned to another device.
The
monitor changes the logical-name assignment, so that the logical
name ABC: now refers to the paper-tape punch.
%LOGICAL NAME WAS IN USE, PTPO ASSIGNED
You run the system program PIP .
. R PIP
You issue a command string to PIP asking that file FILEA.EXT be
transferred from device DTAO: to logical device ABC: (physical
device PTPO:).
*ABC:=DTAO:FILEA.EXT
You type a CTRL/C, returning your job to monitor mode.
*"C
You request another DECtape drive and request that
DEF: be assigned to it .

logical

name

. ASSIGN DTA: DEF:
The monitor prints a message telling you that all DECtape drives
are in use by the specified jobs.
The monitor does not assign a
DECtape drive or a logical name "to your job.
?ALREADY ASSIGNED TO JOB 13
You request that DECtape unit 0 (which you already have
to you) be assigned the logical name DEF:

assigned

.ASSIGN DTAO: DEF:
DECtape unit 0 takes on the logical name DEF:.
DTAO ASSIGNED
You deassign the paper-tape
ABC: .

punch,

. DEASSIGN PTP:
You run the system program PIP .
. R PIP
1-18

clearing

the

logical

name

INTRODUCTION
You request that the file FILEB is to be transferred from
DEF: to device ABC:

device

*ABC:=DEF:FILEB
TOPS-10 prints an error message indicating
device name ABC: is no longer assigned.

that

the

logical

?DEVICE ABC DOES NOT EXIST
You type a CTRL/C, returning your job to monitor mode.
*"C
You request drive DTAO: (DECtape drive 0) again and request
the logical DEF: be changed to XYZ:

that

.ASSIGN DTAO: XYZ:
The system disassociates the logical name DEF:
DECtape unit 0 takes on the logical name XYZ: .

from

DTAO:.

DTAO ASSIGNED

1.9.1.5 Ersatz Device Names - An ersatz device is a disk-simulated
library.
Although you specify an ersatz device like a file structure,
an ersatz device represents a particular project-programmer number on
a disk structure.
Ersatz device names are three characters long.
Appendix D contains a complete list of the ersatz device names used by
TOPS-10.

1.9.2

File Names

Data and programs are stored in the system files.
Files are used to
arrange and protect data and programs.
The essential part of a file
specification is the file name.
You name a
file when you create,
rename, or copy it.
The file name that you choose must be one to six alphanumeric
characters long.
It is possible to use non-alphanumeric characters,
but some symbols have a special meaning to the system
(see Section
1.10),
and
some
programs
may not recognize non-alphanumeric
characters.
The file name is divided into the
extension.
The format is:

name

the

file

and

the

file

FILE.EXT
Where FILE is the name you choose to distinguish the file, and .EXT is
a standard or non-standard file extension.
The period (.) is used to
separate the file name from the file extension.
It is recommended that you use standard file extensions where
applicable.
The standard file name extensions are listed in Appendix
D.
File extensions are optional.
You can name or specify a
file
without an extension.
File names and extensions can be changed using the RENAME command.

1-19

INTRODUCTION
1.9.3

Directory Names

Your directory is a file that serves as an index to your other files.
There are directories on three levels of file storage:
The directories in a file structure are
File Directory (MFD) of that structure.

indexed

the

Master

The files in your directory area are indexed by your User-File
Directory
(UFD) .
Your
UFD
is
designated
by
your
project-programmer number enclosed in brackets.
The following is
a valid directory name:
[30,112]
A Sub-File Directory (SFD), is a directory you can create to
arrange the files in your UFD. A file in your UFD points to the
SFD.
This file has the same name as the SFD, with an extension
of .SFD.
SFDs are discussed in Section 1.14.
The directory name is an optional part of a file specification.

1.9.4

Protection Codes

Every file has a protection code.
The code tells who can and cannot
access the file.
The protection code consists of three octal digits.
Each digit specifies the amount of protection against a group of
users.
The first
(leftmost)
digit is the protection code for the
owner of the file; the middle digit is the protection code for all
users having the same project number as the file owner; the last
(rightmost) digit is the protection code for all other users.
For
example:
7>
<0
5
I
I
I
I
I
I
Protection code for all other users.
I
I
I
I
I
I
Protection code for all members of file owner's
I
project.
I
I
I
Protection code for the file owner.

Ordinarily, the owner of a file is the user whose programmer number
matches the User File Directory (UFD) containing the file, regardless
of the project number.
That is, a user logged in under the
[27,4072]
project-programmer number is assumed to be the owner of files in the
User File Directory
[44,4072].
This feature can be set by the
installation; therefore it may not be set at your own installation.
The access protection codes for the Owner Field (Field 1)
are listed
in Table 1-3; the access protection codes for F~elds 2 and 3 are
listed in Table 1-4.

1-20

INTRODUCTION
Table 1-3:

Protection Codes for Field 1

Owner Protection Codes
Accessibility by Owner

Code

You can execute, read, or change the protection code
the file.

You have unlimited
renaming it.

except

for

You have unlimited access to the file.

You can execute, iead, or change the protection code
the file.

You have unlimited
renaming it.

for

7*,

access

the

file,

the

file,

except

You have unlimited access.

* The File Daemon is called on a protection failure on this file
Table 1-4:

Protection Codes for Fields 2 and 3

Project-members and Other User Protections
Code

Access Privileges

The user cannot access the file.

The user can only execute the file.

The user can execute or read the file.

The user can execute, read, or append to the file.

The user can execute, read, append
file.

The user can execute, read, append to, update, and write
to the file.

The user can execute, read, append to, update, write to,
and rename the file.

Unlimited access, including changing the protection code
of the file.

1-21

to,

update

the

INTRODUCTION
When you create a file, and you do not specify a protection code to be
associated with the file, the system uses one of the following default
protection codes:

1.9.5

The default protection code that is defined
in
your
SWITCH.INI file on the LOGIN line, using the /DEFPROT switch.

The default protection code you previously specified with the
SET DEFAULT PROTECTION command.

The standard TOPS-10 default protection code that is
by your installation (usually <055> or <057» .

defined

File Daemon

The File Daemon, a system program, may determine the protection status
of files with a file protection code of 4, 5, 6, or 7 in the owner's
protection field.
(Protection codes are discussed in Section 1.9.4.)
When you set such a protection, a protection violation causes the File
Daemon to access a file named ACCESS.USR.
The file ACCESS.USR is a
list of the protected files and the users who may access them.
If you
have no such file, or if the File Daemon is not running, the user who
attempted to access the file receives an error message, and cannot
access the file.
The File Daemon and the file ACCESS.USR are
described in the FILDAE Specification in the TOPS-10 Notebook Set.

1.10

SYSTEM DEFAULTS

The operating system contains defaults for many arguments,
switches
and parts of file specifications.
Defaults are the values or
instructions that the system uses if you do not specify those values
or instructions in the command string.
Some system defaults are set by the system administrator when he
generates the monitor.
Other defaults are set according to your
project-programmer number when you log in.
There are commands that
allow you to set some defaults, which will be effective until you
change those defaults or log off the system.
File specification defaults are determined by the system according to
the program you are running, the search list, and the directory path
of your job.
Search lists and directory paths are discussed in
Sections 1.12 and 1.14.

1.11

WILDCARD CONSTRUCTIONS

You can use wildcard constructions with many command strings.
A
wildcard
is
an
asterisk used to specify a part of a file
specification, or a question mark used to replace a character in a
file specification field.
You use the asterisk (*) as a wildcard to designate an entire part
a specification.

1-22

INTRODUCTION
Examples

All files with this file name and any extension:
file"';'name.*
All files with this extension and any file name:
*.ext
All files:
*.*
All files in directories
programmer number:

with

this

project

number

and

any

*.*[project,*]
You can use the question mark as a wildcard to designate a character
of a file specification.
You type a question mark for each character
that is to be matched.
For example, PR?? matches four characters or
less, of which the first two are PRo
Examples

All files with this file name and any extension beginning with M:
file-name.M??
All files with this extension and
characters, beginning with TES:

any

file

name

five

All files with file names of two characters or less
name extension of three characters or less:

and

file

TES??ext

?????

All files in directories with the
. programmer number 500 through 577:

project

number

and

*.*, [25,S??]
You can specify the asterisk and the question mark in the same command
construction:
All files with file names of two characters or less:
??*

1-23

INTRODUCTION

The DIRECTORY and QUEUE programs recognize a number sign
(#)
in
file specification to indicate that SIXBIT octal code follows.
example,

the
For

.DIR #640000000000.
gives the same directory listing as
.DIR T.
because 120000000000 is the 36-bit left-justified SIXBIT code for the
character "T".
This function is useful for file names which contain
special characters. Although the SIXBIT code for an asterisk is
120000000000, the command line
.DIR #120000000000.
would not give the same directory listing as
.DIR *
because the first command would list only a file literally named *
The second command would interpret the * as a wildcard and would list
all files without extensions.
You cannot mix SIXBIT code and regular characters within the file name
or within the file extension. However, you can combine a SIXBIT file
name with a regular file extension and vice versa.
Appendix G contains a chart of SIXBIT and ASCII character codes.
You can specify a directory name with the project number,
the
programmer number,
or both numbers missing from the specification.
The following examples represent directory specifications.
[15,23]

The User-File Directory [15,23]

[, 30]

The UFD that has your project number and
specified programmer number (30)

[36, ]

The UFD that has the specified project number
(36) and your programmer number

[, ]

Your UFD

[-]

Your default
directory,
which
can
be
different from your UFD.
{See the SETSRC
Program description in the TOPS-10
User
Utilities Manual.}

["SUB1,SUB2]

The sub-file directory
SUB2
under
sub-file directory SUB1 in your UFD

1-24

the

INTRODUCTION
1.12

SEARCH LISTS

A search list is a list of file structures listed in the order that
the operating system will search through them for a file.
There are
two types~ the system search list and a job search list.
The system search list, designated by the ersatz device name SSL:,
contains all files pertinent to the daily operation of the system.
It
is the same for every job on the system.
Only
the
system
administrator can define and change this list.
However, you may
display the system search list using the SETSRC program.
Some of the types of files kept in the system search list file
structures include:
accounting files, help and documentation files,
compilers, and system programs.
The job search list, designated by the ersatz device name DSK:,
lists
structures that contain user files for an individual job.
The system
administrator creates the default job search list for each new user
account.
You can display,
add,
remove,
and rearrange the file
structures in your job search list using the SETSRC program.
(Refer
to the TOPS-10 User Utilities Manual for more information about
SETSRC.) The MOUNT and DISMOUNT commands also modify your
job search
list.
(MOUNT and DISMOUNT are described in Chapter 2.)
For example, in the following command line
.MAKE TEST.LIS
the system uses the system search list to find the program
(TECO)
invoked by the MAKE command.
The system uses your job search list to
find your user file TEST.LIS.
The format of the job search list is:
fs/switch,fs/switch, ... FENCE,fs/switch ...
Where:

is the file structure name,

FENCE

is a logical delimiter to separate the active
list from the passive structures.

/switch

indicates how the file can be
for example) .

only,

accessed

(read

The job search list has two parts, the active search list and the
passive search list.
The active search list is the list of file
structures on the left side of the fence.
The system searches each of
these file structures from left to right.
The passive search list is to the right of the fence.
It is composed
of the file structures that you removed from the active search list
using the SETSRC program.
Therefore, when you first log in, you have
no structures in your passive search list.
The file structures in the
passive search list are not searched by the the monitor, but are used
to compute disk usage when you log off the system.

1-25

INTRODUCTION
1.13

LIBRARIES

The system libraries contain compilers,
system programs and other
important files.
Wherever a device can be specified, an ersatz device
may be specified instead.
An ersatz device is a monitor-defined
logical name for a directory specification.
There are several special
ersatz devices defined for some libraries.
There are three separate
PPNs,
[1,3],
[1,4],
and
[1,5],
where system library files can be
stored.
The standard version of a file or program is usually found on
SSL: [1,4].
The newest version of a file, sometimes in an experimental or untested
state,
can sometimes be found in the [1,5] system library.
NEW: is a
special ersatz device.
When the operating system looks for a file on
NEW: it will first look on SSL: [1,5].
If the file is not found there,
however, it will next look on SSL: [1,4] for the same file.
Likewise,
an outdated version of a file might be found on OLD:, which searches
SSL: [1,3] before SSL: [1,4].
The current system library for the job is called SYS:.
By default
SYS:
is SSL: [1,4] or the standard system library.
You may, however,
change the default definition of SYS: by specifying the /NEW switch to
LOGIN or to the SETSRC program.
This changes the definition of SYS:
to be NEW:.
In other words, the system looks on SSL: [1,5]
before
looking on SSL: [1;~].
When you use the R command, the program comes
from SYS: .
LIB: is the job's library directory.
If you define LIB:, any file the
system cannot find on DSK:
will be searched for in the user-file
directory (UFD) defined in LIB:.
LIB:
may be set by the SETSRC
program.

1.14

DIRECTORY PATHS

A directory path is an ordered list of directory names, starting with
a
user-file
directory,
that uniquely identifies a directory.
Directory names are discussed in Section 1.9.3.
The default directory path for your job can be any directory:
your
job's user-file directory
(UFD), a sub-file directory (SFD) in your
job's UFD, a UFD different from your
job's UFD,
or an SFD in a
different UFD.
You can change your default directory path using the SETSRC program.
See the TOPS-10 User utilities Manual for more information about
SETSRC.
Sub-file directories allow you to organize your files, and to access
them in sets. Any directory acts as an index to a set of files.
An
SFD is pointed to by a file in the UFD, or by a higher-level SFD.
You
create SFDs with the CREDIR program, and you can nest them in any
structure,
to the level that is predetermined by
the
system
administrator.
The maximum level to which SFDs can be nested is five.
(See the TOPS-I0 User utilities Manual for more information about the
CREDIR program.)~sted directories form a directory tree structure,
which is illustrated in the TOPS-10 Monitor Calls Manual.

1-26

INTRODUCTION

The following example shows
directory paths.

the

creation

and

use

SFD

and

Example

Show a list of all the files in your UFD with
.TST .

file

extension

. DIRECT *.TST<RET>
NUMB
109
FILL
PAY3
TOTAL OF

TST
a
<055>
dd-mmm-yy
TST
5
<055>
dd-mmm-yy
TST
1
<055>
dd-mmm-yy
TST
1
<055>
dd-mmm-yy
7 BLOCKS IN 4 FILES ON DSKC:

DSKC:

[27,5434]

Run the CREDIR program .
. R CRED IR<RET>
CREATE DIRECTORY: [27,5434,TEST]<RET>
CREATED DSKC: [27,5434,TEST] .SFD/PROTECTION:775
Create a sub-file directory called
CREDIR program.
CREATE DIRECTORY:

TEST.

Then

exit

from

the

Request a list of all your files named TEST .
. DIR TEST.*<RET>
TEST
FOR
1
<055>
dd-mmm-yy
TEST
SFD
1
<775>
dd-mmm-yy
TOTAL OF 2 BLOCKS IN 2 FILES ON DSKC:

DSKC:

[27,5434]

The directory shows an SFD named TEST.
Use the RENAME command to transfer all files with
.TST from your UFD to your SFD .

the

extension

the

extension

the

. RENAME [27,5434,TEST]=*.TST<RET>
FILES RENAMED:
DSKC:NUMB.TST
DSKC:109.TST
DSKC:FILL.TST
DSKC:PAY3.TST
Show that your UFD no longer lists the files with
.TST .
. DIR *.TST<RET>
%WLDNSF NO SUCH FILES AS DSKC:*.TST[27,5434]
Show that the
[27,5434, TEST] .

files

have

been

transferred

SFD

. DIR [27,5434,TEST]<RET>
<055>
dd-mnull-yy
a
DSKC: [27,5434, TEST]
TST
NUMB
<055>
dd-mmm-yy
TST
5
109
TST
1
<055>
dd-mmm-yy
FILL
TST
1
<055>
dd-mmm-yy
PAY3
TOTAL OF 7 BLOCKS IN 4 FILES ON DSKC: [27,5434,TEST]
1-27

INTRODUCTION
1.15

USER-DEFINABLE COMMANDS

User-definable commands are available at both the system programming
level and at the monitor command level for the timesharing user.
As a timesharing user, you use the DECLARE command to define a command
to run a specified program for your job. This can be done during a
timesharing session, or you can include the DECLARE command in a
SWITCH.INI file.
Any program can be invoked with a user-defined
command.
For example, you can define COMPAR as
execute the FILCOM program as follows:
.DECLARE

user-defined

command

list.

The

COMPAR=SYS:FILCOM.EXE<RET>

You can also use DECLARE to display your job's command
commands in the following list were defined previously .
. DECLARE/LIST<RET>
COMPAR

LOOK

EDIT

DISKSP

Use the COMPAR command.
Use CTRL/T to display the current state of
your job,
including the name of the program that is running.
Note
that, although CTRL/T is shown here,
it does not echo on your
terminal.
CTRL/Z is used to exit FILCOM and return to the monitor .
. COMPAR<RET>
*<CTRL/T>
Day: 14.83 Run: 0.14 R2.5 Wr:6 FILCOM 3+4P TI PC:401570
Input wait for TTY70:

For more information
command.

1.16

user-definable

commands,

see

the

DECLARE

PROGRAMMING THE LNOI LASER PRINTER

This section describes the use of escape and control sequences,
which
you use to direct printing on the LN01 laser printer. Font loading,
which is one application of control sequences, and font management are
also discussed. For a detailed discussion of programming on tne LN01,
refer to the LN01 Progra.mmer's Reference Manual.

1.16.1

LNOI ESCAPE AND CONTROL SEQUENCES

You can use escape and control sequences to specify tab stops or
margins,
change
fonts within a file,
or indicate the text's
orientation, for instance. ESCape and control seque,nces are typed in
as part of a file you want to print on the LN01 laser printer. Every
time the printer encounters the characters that introduce an escape or
control sequence, it regards the next few characters as instructions,
until it encounters a final character (described below). However, you
must specify the /PRINT:GRAPHICS switch to the PRINT or QUEUE command
in order for the sequences to be interpreted.
Otherwise,
these
characters will be printed as part of the file.

1-28

INTRODUCTION

For a complete description of all valid escape and control
please refer to the LN01 Programmer's Reference Manual.

sequences,

NOTE
You use the ESC control character as the first
character of all escape and control sequences.
When
referred to here, it means that you actually press the
ESC key.
Since the ESC key is interpreted as a
function by most text editors, consult the reference
manual to find out how your editor can actually print
the ESC control character.
The examples in this
section use a dollar sign ($) to show that the ESC
control character has been pressed.

1.16.1.1 ESCape Sequences - An escape sequence can
have
three
sections:
an introducer,
intermediate characters,
and a final
character.
You must include the escape sequence introducer, which is
the ESC control character, and the final character; the intermediate
characters are optional.
Intermediate
characters
define
the
interpretation of the sequence.
The final character indicates the end
of a string, and is defined by the function requested in the sequence.

The following sequence shows how to reset a printer to a known state:
ESC control character
I
Final character

I
I

I
I
c

The characters are spaced here for clarity only.
appear as $c to actually be interpreted by
significant when final characters are alphabetic.

The
the

sequence must
LN01.
Case is

1.16.1.2 Control Sequences - The format
for control sequences is
similar to that of escape sequences.
However, control sequences begin
with an ESC control character and a left square bracket. Also, one or
more parameters are allowed before the intermediate character(s) .
Parameters are separated by the use of a semicolon (;).

Numeric parameters that designate length (such as specifying 5 inches)
are given in terms of points or decipoints.
A point is a unit of
length equal to 1/72 of an inch. A decipoint, then, is a
length of
1/720 of an inch.
In these units, 5 inches equals 360 points or 3600
decipoints.
A sequence using length in points is below.
In this example, the left
margin is set to 5 inches (360 points), and the right to 8 inches (576
points) .
$[
36057 6
I
I
I
I
I
I
Numeric parameter
I
I
Control sequence characters

I
Final character

1-29

INTRODUCTION

In this example, a control sequence is used to
tab stops.
$[

I
I
I
Control

clear

all

horizontal

3
g
I
I
I
Final character
Numeric parameter
sequence characters

Remember, as with escape sequences, there should be no blank spaces
between the characters.
(They would appear in the file as "$[3g".)

1.16.2

Font Management

The LPTSPL program supports font management for the LN01 laser printer
by means of a font handler.
LPTSPL requires the LPFONT.INI file to
automatically process fonts by
name.
LPFONT.INI
resides
on
SSL: [5,36,LN01].
LPFONT.INI maps the font names to the files in which
the actual fonts are kept.
Font files must be kept in the same area.
LPFONT.INI has the format:
filenm = fontnm1<TAB>fontnm2<TAB> ... <TAB>fontnmN
Where:

filenm is the six character filename of the font.
fontnm is an alphanumeric string from 1 to 30 characters long,
representing a fontname.
Each fontname must be separated by
at least one tab character, and the line must be ended with a
carriage return/line feed.

1.16.3

Loading Fonts

When you want to print a file using non-standard fonts, you have two
options.
You may use the either /FONT:fontnm or /PRINT:GRAPHICS
switches to the PRINT or QUEUE commands.
Use the /FONT:fontnm switch when you want an entire file printed in
the same font.
LPTSPL loads the font you request, and the LN01 prints
your file in the font you specified.
The /PRINT:GRAPHICS switch allows you to dynamically load fonts,
so
that you can print a file in several different fonts.
The Load
Character Set (LCS) and Assign Character Set (ACS) sequences are used
to prepare the fonts for printing.
If you are using fonts which
reside on the ersatz device FNT: ([5,36,LN01]), you do not need to
explicitly specify the LCS sequence; LPTSPL loads the character sets
for you.
You will always need to place an ACS sequence at the
beginning of your file.
The ACS sequence assigns a font name to a
number.
You refer to this number immediately before the text you want
printed in that font.
The text continues printing in that font until
you specify a new font.
For example, if you assigned 13 to represent
a Times Bold font, and 14 to represent Times Italic, you could print
text in those fonts using the following:
$[13mPrint in Times Bold and $ [14mnow switch to Italic

1-30

INTRODUCTION

In the above example, the ESC/square bracket combination indicates a
control sequence is about to follow,
the 13 and 14 represent the
fonts, and the letter m is the fir.al character. For more information
on font programming on the LN01,
refer to the LN01 Programmer's
Reference Manual.

1-31

CHAPTER 2
SYSTEM COMMANDS

Not all TOPS-10 commands apply to all system configurations.
Also,
you or your system administrator can add and delete commands.
Therefore, although this chapter contains detailed information on all
of the TOPS-10 commands, not all of them may be available to you.

2.1

FUNCTIONAL GROUPS OF COMMANDS

In Section 2.1, the TOPS-10 commands
groups.
Each section contains:

are

divided

into

functional

A discussion of a functional group.

A list of the commands that make up the functional group.

Section 2.2 contains a detailed description
commands are arranged in alphabetical order.

each

command.

The

Appendix A of this manual contains a table that lists the commands by
functional description, including a short description of each command.
This table is included for reference, so that you can find a command
by its function.
Please read the description of each command in
Section 2.2 before using the command.

2.1.1

Job-Control Commands

Job-control commands control the state of your job.
You can use them
to create,
detach, and terminate your job. Also, you can change the
accounting profile and privilege status of your job.
The job control
commands are:
ATTACH
DETACH
KJOB
POP
SESSION

CONTEXT
DISABLE
LOGIN
PUSH

DECLARE
ENABLE
PASSWORD
REATTACH

2-1

SYSTEM COMMANDS
2.1.2

Information Commands

The information commands allow you to gain information from the
monitor.
You can obtain information about your job, your program, the
operating system, or your terminal characteristics.
The information
commands are:
ACCOUNT
CPUNCH
HELP
NODE
PUNCH
SET WATCH
SYSTAT
WHERE

2.1.3

ALLOCATE
CONTEXT
DIRECTORY
DAYTIME
INITIA
MOUNT
PJOB
PLOT
QUEUE
RESOURCES
SHOW ALLOCATION SHOW QUEUES
TPUNCH
USES TAT

CORE
DSK
NETWORK
PRINT
SCHEDULE
SUBMIT
VERSION

Terminal-Control Commands

Terminal-control commands allow you to set the characteristics of your
terminal,
and to see the characteristics that are set for your
terminal.
The terminal-control commands are:
INITIA
SET TTY
TTY

2.1.4

SET TERMINAL
TERMINAL

Terminal-Communication Commands

You can use the operating system to communicate with a user at another
terminal.
The commands that allow you to do this are:
MAIL

2.1.5

PLEASE

SEND

File-Handling Commands

You can use the operating system to create, change, and store files.
You can create and change directories.
You can output files to
various devices.
The file-handling commands are:
CLOSE
DELETE
FILE
PLOT
PROTECT
RENAME
TECO
ZERO

COpy
DIRECTORY
LIST
PRESERVE
PUNCH
SET DEFAULT PROTECTION
TPUNCH

2-2

CPUNCH
EOF
MAKE

PRINT
QUEUE
SUBMIT
TYPE

SYSTEM COMMANDS
2.1.6

Device-Handling Commands

You can use the operating system to control peripheral
device-handling commands are:
ALLOCATE
CANCEL
DEALLOCATE
EOF
LIST
PLOT
QUEUE
SET BLOCKSIZE
SET DENSITY
SET SPOOL
UNLOAD

2.1.7

devices.

The

BACKSPACE
CPUNCH
DISMOUNT
LABEL
MOUNT
PUNCH
REWIND
SET DEFER
SET RETRY
TPUNCH

ASSIGN
CLOSE
DEASSIGN
FINISH
LOCATE
PRINT
REASSIGN
SET CDR
SET FORMAT
SKIP

Program-Preparation Commands

The program-preparation commands help you to write a program,
change
it,
debug it,
and obtain information about it.
These commands help
you
to
run
programs
more
easily
and
effectively.
The
program-preparation commands are:
CLOSE
DDT
EOF
LOAD
SET BREAK

2.1.8

COMPILE
DEBUG
EXAMINE
MAKE

SET DDT BREAKPOINT

CREF
DEPOSIT
FUDGE
MERGE
TECO

Program-Control Commands

Program-control commands help you to control your program while it is
running and after it has been run.
These commands are used to start
and stop execution, save the core image, manipulate the core area, and
to facilitate the execution of your program.
The program-control
commands are:
CCONTINUE
CORE
GET
LOAD
PUSH
RUN
SET BREAK
SET DEFAULT BUFFERS
SET HPQ
SET VIRTUAL

2.1.9

CONTEXT
CSTART
HALT (CTRL/C)
MERGE
R

SAVE
SET CPU
SET DSKFUL
SET PHYSICAL
START

CONTINUE
EXECUTE
JCONTINUE
POP
REENTER
SSAVE
SET DEFAULT BIGBUF
SET DSKPRI
SET TIME

Network Commands

Network commands help you to use a data network system.
They allow
you to use the resources on another system, and get information about
the network configuration.
The network commands are:
ASSIGN
NETWORK
SET HOST

LOCATE
NODE
WHERE
2-3

SYSTEM COMMANDS

2.1.10

HIC Commands

MIC (Monitor Interpreted Commands) allows you to create a new command
by writing any desired sequence of monitor and MIC commands in a
command file.
Some MIC commands are briefly described here,
and are
more fully described in the file MICV2.DOC.
DO
or

Executes a MIC command file.

BACKTO
GOTO

Specifies a
label at which MIC processing is to
resume within the command file.

COJOB

Creates a COJOB.

ERROR/
NOERRQR

Specifies

Conditionally processes a monitor command.

LET

Changes the values of user parameters.

MIC

Passes a subcommand to MIC.

OPERATOR/
NOOPERATOR

Introduces a line requiring user attention.

SILENCE/
REVIVE

Suppresses/resumes output to the terminal.

WHENEVER/
ON

Changes the default
event occurs.

error

2-4

condition

action

character.

wherever a particular

SYSTEM COMMANDS
ACCOUNT Command

2.2

COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
ACCOUNT Command

Function

If the monitor is running usage file accounting software,
the
ACCOUNT command prints the account you are logged in under (set
by a LOGIN or SESSION command) on your terminal.
If you do not
have an account, the monitor issues only a carriage-return.
Format

ACCOUNT
After you press RETURN, the monitor prints the
logged in under.

account

you

are

have

account

Characteristics

Leaves your terminal in monitor mode.
Requires LOGIN.
Examples

This example indicates
string .

that

you

not

. ACCOUNT<RET>

The ACCOUNT command prints the string TS547 as
your account .
. ACCOUNT <RET>
TS547

2-5

the

name

SYSTEM COMMANDS

ALLOCATE Command
ALLOCATE Command

Function
The ALLOCATE command informs the system that you will need a
resource. A resource is a tape or disk unit. With ALLOCATE, you
can reserve a resource from the system and assign a logical name
to the resource you will use.
allocated resource can contain all
the
specifications
necessary when the resource is mounted.
The switches that you
specify with the ALLOCATE command will be retained and applied
when you use the MOUNT command to mount the same resource.

The ALLOCATE command allocates a resource,
and
the
SHOW
ALLOCATION display will show such a resource as both allocated
and mounted.
If you use the ALLOCATE command to explicitly
allocate a resource, you will be granted extended ownership over
the resource.
For example,
if a resource that you
have
explicitly allocated and mounted goes off-line unexpectedly (as
when the operator dismounts it),
your mount request for that
resource will be automatically requeued, and the resource will be
mounted for your job when it comes on line.
Format
ALLOCATE resource:log-name/switch/switch ...
Where:

resource is the name of the resource that is to be
allocated.
The colon
(:)
in the resource name is
optional.
The resource name is one of the following:
o

A disk structure or volume set name, such as DSKB:.

A tape volume set name and volume identifiers, such
as PAY-WK(PM34,PM35) where PAY-WK is the volume set
name, and (PM34,PM35) is a list of the volumes in
the volume set.

A tape volume identifier of
set.

The logical
resource.

A physical device name.

name

single-tape

volume

previously

associated

with

Note that a tape allocation request requires a volume
identification.
If you do not include the volume set
name followed by volume identifiers,
you must supply
the /VOLID switch.
log-name is the logical name you can assign to the
resource that you will use.
The logical name can be up
to 6 alphanumeric characters. A tape volume set must
always have a logical name.
If you do not specify a
logical name for a tape volume set, the system defaults
to the first six characters of the volume set name, or
up to the first non-alphanumeric character of the
volume set name. A disk volume set does not require a
logical-name.
2-6

SYSTEM COMMANDS
ALLOCATE Command
To allocate more than one volume set,
volume set identifications with commas.

separate

the

/switches are always preceded by a
slash.
Some
switches can be used for any kind of volume set; others
are restricted to either tape or disk volume sets only.

NOTE
The logical name and switches that you specify
in the ALLOCATE command string are saved by the
system, and are applied when you MOUNT the
volume set.
You can obtain a list of the resources that are allocated and
mounted for your job by typing ALLOCATE with no arguments or
switches.
The output is the same as the output from the SHOW
ALLOCATION command.
The following is a list of the switches you can use with
ALLOCATE.
The center column lists the kind of resource(s) the
switch applies to.
Device

Function

/ACTIVE

Disk

Requests that the volume set be placed
in your job's active search list when
the structure is mounted.
(See SETSRC
in the TOPS-10 User utilities Manual) .
The structure will become part of the
list that the system automatically uses
to search for a file.
This is the
default.
Complement to /PASSIVE.

/CHECK

Tape
Disk

Prints a list of all the allocation
requests for your
job.
(Same
as
ALLOCATE with no arguments or switches.)

/CREATE

Disk

Allows files to be created on this
structure.
This
switch
is
the
complement to /NOCREATE and implies the
/ACTIVE switch.

/DENSITY:n-BPI

Tape

Specifies
the
recording
density
(bits-per-inch)
of the volume set.
The
density (n)
can be:
200,
556,
800,
1600,
or 6250.
The -BPI portion of the
value is optional.

/DISK

Disk

Identifies the
volume set.

/EXCLUSIVE

Disk

Ensures that you will have exclusive
access to the resource.
No other users
will be allowed to access the resource.
You must have the same project number as
the owner of the volume set.

/HELP

Tape
Disk

Prints a
command.

Switch

2-7

volume

brief

set

description

disk

the

SYSTEM COMMANDS

ALLOCATE Command
/LABEL-TYPE:arg Tape

Specifies the kind of label processing
to be used and indicates the label
status of the tape.
The arguments and
their meanings are:
ANSI

The
label
is
formatted
according to ANSI standards.

BLP
BYPASS

The tape mayor may not have
labels, but it is treated as
if it were unlabeled.
Only
privileged users can use this
switch.

EBCDIC
IBM

The label
EBCDIC.

USER-EOT

The
tape
does
not
have
standard labels.
However, you
will be informed at the end of
tape.
Volume switching (for
multivolume tape volume sets)
will
not
be
performed
automatically.
Therefore, the
user program is responsible
for mounting subsequent tapes.
This is useful for programs
that create unique
labels,
such as BACKUP.

formatted in

UNLABELED The tape is not labeled.
When
NONE
a new tape is mounted from the
NOLABELS same volume set, you will not
be notified.
The switching of
tapes in the volume set will
be handled automatically by
the system.
You will not be
informed when the end of tape
is reached.
/NEW-VOLUME-SET Tape

Specifies that a new volume set is going
to be created.
The operator will choose
tapes for your
job from a pool of
available tapes.
This switch implies
/WRITE-ENABLE.

/NOCREATE

Disk

Prevents the creation of files on this
volume
set,
unless you specify the
volume set when you write the file.
This switch is the complement to /CREATE
and it implies /ACTIVE.

/NONOTIFY

Tape
Disk

Does not inform you when the resource is
mounted or dismounted.

2-8

SYSTEM COMMANDS

ALLOCATE Command
/NOTIFY

Tape
Disk

Sets the system to inform you when the
resource is mounted or dismounted.
The
system sends a message to your terminal
when any of the following occurs:
o

The resource is physically mounted.

The resource is dismounted by the
operator without a request by your
job.

Another volume in a tape volume
is mounted.

set

The disk structure is locked
unlocked by the operator.

/PASSIVE

Disk

Requests that the structure be placed in
your job's passive search list.
(Refer
to SETSRC program.) The system will not
search for files in the structure unless
you specify the structure name in the
file specification.
This switch is the
complement to /ACTIVE.

/QUOTA

Disk

Removed.

/READ-ONLY

Tape
Disk

Specifies that you will not write on the
volume set.
Tape volume sets will be
checked as they are mounted, to ensure
that they are write-locked.
This is the
default for tape volume sets.
On disk volume sets,
the monitor will
not update access dates.
If you specify
both /EXCLUSIVE and /READ-ONLY,
the
operator may write-lock the structure.

/REMARK:"text"

Tape
Disk

Allows you to send a message to the
operator identifying the volume to be
mounted.
The argument (text) can be up
to 50 characters long.
Use quotation
marks around the text if it contains
spaces or punctuation marks.

/SCRATCH

Tape

Instructs the operator to
mount
a
scratch tape.
By implication, a scratch
tape will be returned to the system's
pool of available tapes, after you are
finished with it.
This switch implies
/WRITE-ENABLE.

/SHARABLE

Disk

Allows other users
to
access
the
resource.
This is the default function.
This switch is
the
co~plement
to
/EXCLUSIVE.

/TAPE

Tape

Specifies that the volume set is a tape
volume set.
This switch is required
when the volume set has the same name as
a catalogued disk volume set.

2-9

SYSTEM COMMANDS

ALLOCATE Command
/TRACKS:n

Tape

Specifies the number of tracks on
tape.
The value n can be 7 or 9.

the

/VOLID:volid

Tape

Identifies the volumes in a tape volume
set.
This switch can be used only if
the
volid-list
was
not
specified
previously.
If
the volume set is
comprised of more than one volume,
the
volids should be separated by commas,
and the volid-list should be enclosed in
parentheses.

/WRITE-ENABLE

Tape
Disk

Ensures
that you can write on the
volume set. For tape, the system checks
each volume as it is mounted to be sure
that it is write-enabled.
This is the
default for disk volume sets.

Associated Commands
MOUNT

Makes a device available to you.

DISMOUNT

Removes the specified volume set from your job's
search list.
Dismounts the volume set if you
have exclusive access to it.

DEALLOCATE

Removes the specified resources(s)
job's list of allocated resources.

from

your

SHOW ALLOCATION

Prints a list of the resources
allocated and mounted for your job.

that

are

SHOW QUEUE

Prints a list of system queues.

CANCEL

Cancels a mount or queue request.

Characteristics
Runs the QUEUE program.
Destroys your core image.
Requires LOGIN.
Example
The following example shows the use of the ALLOCATE,
DEALLOCATE,
MOUNT, DISMOUNT, and SHOW ALLOCATION commands.
The resources are
reserved for a multivolume tape volume set with the ALLOCATE
command.
The name of the volume set is TAPE-SET, and it contains
three volumes.
The logical name TS is assigned to the tape set.
The tape is write enabled, and it does not have standard labels .
. ALLOCATE TAPE-SET (VOL1,VOL2,VOL3) : TS/WRITE-ENABLE/LABEL:NONE<RET>
[ALLOCATE REQUEST TS QUEUED, REQUEST #672]
A file structure named DSKR: is mounted for the job:
.MOUNT DSKR:<RET>
[MOUNT REQUEST DSKR QUEUED, REQUEST #673]
[STRUCTURE DSKR MOUNTED]

2-10

SYSTEM COMMANDS
ALLOCATE Command

The job's resources are shown using the SHOW ALLOCATION command:
.SHOW ALLOCATION<RET>
ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
VOLUME SET
RESOURCES
TYPE

----------------

-----------------

------------

DSKB
DSKC
DSKR
TAPE-SET
TAPE-SET
TAPE-SET

9 TK 800/1600
RP06
RP20
DSKB
DSKC
DSKR
VOL1
VOL2
VOL3

MAGTAPE UNIT
DISK UNIT
DISK UNIT
STRUCTURE
STRUCTURE
STRUCTURE
MAGTAPE VOL.
MAGTAPE VOL.
MAGTAPE VOL.

ALL

OWN

1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

0
2
1
1
1
1
0
0
0

----------------

-----------------

------------

DSKB
DSKC
DSKR
TAPE-SET
TAPE-SET
TAPE-SET

9TK 800/1600
RP06
RP20
DSKB
DSKC
DSKR
VOLI
VOL2
VOL3

MAGTAPE UNIT
DISK UNIT
DISK UNIT
STRUCTURE
STRUCTURE
STRUCTURE
MAGTAPE VOL.
MAGTAPE VOL.
MAGTAPE VOL.

ALL

OWN

1
2
1

1
1

1
1
1

1
1
1
0
0

After work is finished by accessing the tape set and the
structure,
the structure is dismounted.
Because the structure
was not explicitly allocated, it is automatically deallocated:
.DISMOUNT DSKR<RET>
[STRUCTURE DSKR DISMOUNTED]
The tape volume set is dismounted:
.DISMOUNT TS<RET>
[VOLUME SET TS DISMOUNTED]

2-11

SYSTEM COMMANDS

ALLOCATE Command
The job's resources are displayed:
. SHOW ALLOCATION<RET>
ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
VOLUME SET
RESOURCES
TYPE

ALL

OWN

MAGTAPE UNIT
DISK UNIT
DISK UNIT
STRUCTURE
STRUCTURE
MAGTAPE VOL.
MAGTAPE VOL.
MAGTAPE VOL.

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

At this point, the tape set can again be mounted, or
deallocated.
The tape set is dismounted:

can

ALL

OWN

1
1
1
1

DSKB
DSKC
TAPE-SET
TAPE-SET
TAPE-SET

9 TK 800/1600
RP06
RP20
DSKB
DSKC
VOL1
VOL2
VOL3

1
1
1
1

o
o
o

.DEALLOCATE TS<RET>
[VOLUME SET TS HAS BEEN DEALLOCATED]
. SHOW ALLOCATION<RET>
ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
VOLUME SET
RESOURCES
TYPE

DSKB
DSKC

RP06
RP20
DSKB
DSKC

DISK UNIT
DISK UNIT
STRUCTURE
STRUCTURE

2-12

1
1

SYSTEM COMMANDS
ASSIGN Conunand
ASSIGN Command

Function

The ASSIGN conunand allocates an input/output device to your
job
until you log out or until you issue a REASSIGN, FINISH, or
DEASSIGN conunand.
(Device names are discussed in Section 1.9.1.)
When an assignment is performed,
the system prints a message
indicating the name of the physical device assigned to your job.
You can ASSIGN any unrestricted device to your job.
Format

ASSIGN node-id_device-name: logical-name:
Where:

node-id is an identifier of the node from which the
device is to be assigned.
This identifier can be
either a node name or a node number.
The node-id is
optional.
If you omit the node-id, the node to which
your terminal is connected is assumed.

The node-id and the device name must be separated by an
underscore (_).
device-name:
is any physical device name or previously
assigned logical name.
(Device names are discussed in
Section 1.9.1.)
logical-name is a logical name that you request to be
assigned to the physical device.
Separate the physical
device name from the logical name with a
space.
This
argument
is optional.
Subsequent ASSIGN conunands
replace the old logical name with the new one.
Logical
names are disassociated from the devices when you issue
the DEASSIGN conunand.
Characteristics

Leaves your job at monitor level.
Does not destroy your core image.
Associated Messages

If the assignment is successful, the system prints a
the following format:

message

device-name: ASSIGNED
where device-name is the physical device name.
If you specify a
restricted device, the monitor prints the following message:
?DEVICE NOT ASSIGNABLE

2-13

SYSTEM COMMANDS

ASSIGN Command
The
You can access restricted devices using the MOUNT command.
following message occurs when the device is assigned to another
job:
?Already assigned to job n
Where:

n is the number of the
assigned.

job

which

the

Examples
1.

Assign line-printer number 2 .
. ASSIGN LPT2:<RET>
LPT262 ASSIGNED

Assign the logical name SYS to DSKB .
. ASSIGN DSKB: SYS:<RET>
DSKB:

ASSIGNED

Assign the logical name TAPE to DTA5 .
. ASSIGN DTA5: TAPE<RET>
DTA5:

ASSIGNED

Assign a card reader from node COMET to your job .
. ASSIGN COMET CDR:<RET>
CDR701:

ASSIGNED

2-14

device

SYSTEM COMMANDS
ATTACH Command
ATTACH Command

Function

The ATTACH command detaches your current job (if you
in) and connects your terminal to a detached job.

are

logged

To prevent unauthorized access to detached jobs, the monitor
temporarily
creates
a
new
job
when
you
specify the
project-programmer number argument.
This temporary job runs
LOGIN,
which asks for your password.
If the temporary job
exceeds the system's maximum job capacity, you may be unable to
attach to the specified job.
In this case, your first job
remains detached.
You will be unable to ATTACH to any job until
there is room in the system.
Formats

ATTACH
ATTACH job [ppn]/switch
ATTACH job/switch
ATTACH [ppn]/switch
ATTACH user/switch
Where:

job is the job-number of the job to which your terminal
is to be attached.
[ppnJ is the project-programmer number of
the desired
job.
You must enclose the PPN in square brackets ([]).
If you are trying to attach from one job to another,
and
both
have the same PPN,
you can omit the
project-programmer number argument.

user is the user-name associated with the desired job.
/switch is one of the following options:

/HELP:keyword

Prints the HELP text.
Valid keywords
are ARGUMENTS, SWITCHES, and TEXT.
The
ARGUMENTS keyword displays a list of
valid
switches
and arguments.
The
SWITCHES keyword displays only a list of
switches without detailed information.
The TEXT keyword displays the full HELP
text.
TEXT is the default keyword.
/HELP may be abbreviated to /H.

/MAILCHECK:
YES or NO

If YES,
checks
new mail.

/MONITOR

Leaves

/SETTTY:
YES or NO

If YES,
sets
terminal parameters
specified with the /TERMINAL switch.

2-15

for

your terminal

the

existence of

at monitor level.
as

SYSTEM COMMANDS
ATTACH Command

/TERMINAL:key

Defines the terminal characteristics.
key is a keyword.
The keywords for
/TERMINAL are
described
after
the
switches.

/USER

Leaves your terminal at user level.

/Terminal Keywords
The /TERMINAL switch takes a list of parameters to specify
terminal attributes.
You can include multiple keywords for the
/TERMINAL switch,
in which case you must enclose them in
parentheses and separate them with commas. Valid keywords are:
ALTMODE:yes-no

Do [not] convert ASCII 175
ESCAPE (Altmode (ASCII 33».

BLANKS:yes-no

Do [not] print blank lines.

CRLF:yes-no

Do [not] give a free CRLF at right margin.

DEFER: yes-no

Do [not] set deferred echo mode.

DISPLAY:yes-no

Terminal is [not] a display terminal.

ECHO:yes-no

Do [not] set terminal echo.

EIGHTBIT:yes-no

Do [not] set a-bit mode.

ESCAPE:chr

Set <ESCAPE> translation character to chr.

FILL:dnum

Set filler class to dnum (O<=dnum<=3).

FORM:yes-no

Terminal does
feeds.

GAG:yes-no

Do [not]
level.

SEND

messages

LC:yes-no

Terminal
does
characters.

[not]

have

LENGTH:dnum

Set the terminal screen length to dnum.

LOCALCOPY:yes-no

Do [not] set terminal to local copy.

NOFILL

Do not set terminal fill

QUOTE:yes-no

Do
[not]
quoting.

RTCOMP:yes-no

Do [not] disable special effects of Rand
T.

RCVSPEED:n

Set terminal receive speed to n baud.

SBELL:yes-no

Do [not] ring the bell when output is
stopped due to exceeding STOP/SSTOP value.

2-16

[not]

enable

have

and

176

hardware
at

form
user

lowercase

(same as FILL:O).

control-V

character

SYSTEM COMMANDS
ATTACH Corrunand

SPEED:dnum

Set receive and
baud.

transmit

STOP:dnum

Set the terminal STOP counter to dnum.

SSTOP:dnum

Set the terminal SSTOP counter to dnum.

TABS:yes-no

Terminal does [not] have hardware tabs.

TAPE:yes-no

Do [not] allow
reader.

TYPE:xxx

Set terminal type to xxx.

UNPAUSE:chr

Set the unpause character to chr.

UC:yes-no

Terminal
does
characters only.

WIDTH:dnum

Set carriage width to dnum columns.

XONXOFF:yes-no

Do [not] allow S/Q to pause output.

XMTSPEED:dnum

Set terminal transmit speed to dnum baud.

XON

speed

start

[not]

have

dnum

paper-tape

uppercase

Switches of the form /*xxxxxx are unique to one character.
The asterisk is NOT part of the switch name.
The following
is a list of possible arguments which may be accepted by
some switches and keywords:
args

A list of keywords and optional arguments.

atxt

A possibly quoted string of ASCII characters.
You must include quotation marks if the string
contains any characters other than alphanumerics
or a dash.

chr

A single, possibly quoted character or
constant.

cnum

Core argument:
optional K or P.

dnum

Decimal number followed by optional K, M, or G.

filespec

A standard TOPS-10 file designator
dev:file.ext[path] .

onum

Octal number followed by optional K, M, or G.

pathspec

A standard TOPS-10 path designator of the form:
[project#,prograrruner#,sfd1,sfd2, ... ].

prefix

A prefix is the last three characters of
"[LGNxxx ... ]n or n%LGNxxx ... n messages.

stxt

A possibly quoted string of SIXBIT characters.
You must include quotation marks if the string
contains any characters other than alphanumerics
or a dash.

2-17

decimal

number

octal

followed

the

form

the

SYSTEM COMMANDS
ATTACH Command
yes-no

Switch and keyword arguments may either be NO,
YES,
OFF (no), ON (yes), 0 (no), or 1 (yes).
In
addition, you can precede the switch or keyword
name with NO to negate its action
(such as
/NOxxxxxx instead of /xxxxxx:NO) .

Characteristics
Does not destroy the core image of either job.
Does not require that you be logged in.

Restrictions
Remote users cannot attach to jobs with a project number of 1.
Batch programs cannot use this command.

Examp1es
1.

Look at jobs 1 and 5 with SYSTAT .
. SYSTAT 1 5<RET>
1
27,5434
DET
QUOLST
#MEANS NON-SYSTEM HI-SEG
5
27,5434
TTY31 SYSTAT
$ MEANS EXECUTE ONLY

36+62

6 #

19+5PY

25 $

Output shows that job 1 is detached, and job 5 is attached to
terminal number 31.
You attach to job 1 from job 5 .
. ATTACH 1<RET>
FROM JOB 5
The two jobs have the same project-programmer
therefore,
neither the project-programmer number
password is required.
Check jobs 1 and 5 again.
.SYSTAT 1 5<RET>
1

27,5434

TTY31

SYSTAT

19+5PY

SYSTAT

24+SPY "'C

25 $

$ MEANS EXECUTE ONLY

27,5434

DET

23 $

$ MEANS EXECUTE ONLY

Job 1 is now attached to TTY31, and job 5 is detached.

2-18

number;
nor the

SYSTEM COMMANDS
ATTACH Conunand

You log in to the system.
You are given
number 116 is attached to your job (7) .

job

terminal

. LOGIN 27,235<RET>
JOB 7 R5743A SYS #40/2 TTYl16
PASSWORD:
<RET>
hh:nun
dd-mnun-yyyy
TUE
You attach to an existing detached job (35) with a different
PPN.
This automatically detaches your current job (7).
You
enter the correct password at the prompt and LOGIN attaches
your terminal to job 35 .
. ATTACH 35<RET>
PASSWORD:<RET>
FROM JOB 7
You do not need
You attach to job 7 again.
password because job 7 has your original PPN .

enter

. ATTACH 7<RET>
FROM JOB 35
You attach to job 35 again, but you mis-type
LOGIN does not give you a second chance .
. ATTACH 35<RET>
PASSWORD:<RET>
?CAN'T ATTACH TO JOB

2-19

the

password.

SYSTEM COMMANDS

BACKSPACE Command
BACKSPACE Command

Function

The BACKSPACE command spaces a magnetic tape backward a specified
number of files or physical records.
This command runs the
COMPIL program, which interprets the command before running PIP.
Formats

BACKSPACE MTAn:

x FILES

This command skips backward x files.
BACKSPACE MTAn:

x RECORDS

This command skips backward x records.
Characteristics

Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Runs the PIP program.
Destroys your core image.
Examp1es
1.

Backspace 7 records on the tape on MTA2 .
. BACKSPACE MTA2: 7 RECORDS<RET>

Backspace 11 files on the tape on MTA3 .
. BACKSPACE MTA3: 11 FILES<RET>

2-20

SYSTEM COMMANDS
CANCEL Command
CANCEL Command

Function

The CANCEL command deletes the specified request from the
specified queue.
You can delete the request before it is
started, or you can terminate the request after it has been
started.
Format

CANCEL request-type request-id/switch
Where:

request-type is any of the following:

BATCH-REQUEST
CARD-PUNCH-REQUEST
MOUNT-REQUEST
PAPER-TAPE-REQUEST
PLOTTER-REQUEST
PRINTER-REQUEST
The request-type argument
unique set of characters.

can

abbreviated

request-id is a request identification.
anyone of the following:

This

can

The request-id number.
The request-id number is
assigned to the request when it is made, and it is
displayed with the SHOW QUEUES command.

The job name of the request.

A wildcard constructioe representing the job names
of several requests.
IThe standard wildcards (* and
?) are valid, as well as the percent sign
(%)
to
represent
a
single character.
Wildcards are
described in Section 1.11.
Note, however, that the
asterisk
(*)
wildcard cannot be used to specify
mount requests.

There are two switches that can be used
command:

specify

the

CANCEL

Function

Switch

/HELP

Prints information on your terminal about the
CANCEL command.
When you use this switch, no
requests are cancelled.

/JOBNAME:name

Specifies the name of the job.
This switch is
used to specify the name of the job when the
request-id is the same as the name of another
job.

2-21

SYSTEM COMMANDS

CANCEL Conunand
Associated Messages
The following
cancelled:

message

printed

the

request

cannot

NO JOBS CANCELED
This may be the result of trying to cancel a request
you have no authority.

over

which

Characteristics
Runs the QUEUE program.
Destroys your core image.
Examp1e

The following example illustrates the use of the
and SHOW QUEUES conunands.

CANCEL,

MOUNT,

A mount request is made for the structure GALO:
.MOUNT GALO:/NOWAIT<RET>
The mount queue is displayed with the SHOW QUEUES command:
.SHOW QUEUES MOUNT<RET>
MOUNT QUEUE:
VOLUME STATUS

TYPE

WRITE

REQ#

JOB#

USER

BLKA
WAITING DISK ENABLE
650
GAL 0
WAITING DISK LOCKED
672
THERE ARE 2 REQUESTS IN THE QUEUE

35
59

MARTIN,C
[30,5621]
MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]

To cancel the mount request, the user issues the CANCEL command:
.CANCEL MOUNT GALO<RET>
[MOUNT REQUEST FOR GALO CANCELED]
Again, the mount queue is displayed:
. SHOW QUEUES MOUNT<RET>
MOUNT QUEUE:
VOLUME STATUS

TYPE

WRITE

REQ#

JOB#

BLKA
WAITING DISK ENABLED
650
THERE IS 1 REQUEST IN THE QUEUE

2-22

USER
MARTIN,C

[30,5621]

SYSTEM COMMANDS
CCONTINUE Command
CCONTINUE Command

Function

The CCONTINUE command starts
terminal at monitor level.

program

execution,

leaving

your

Format

CCONTINUE
To use:
1.

Begin running a program.

Exit from user mode by typing two CTRL/Cs.

Type CCONTINUE to allow the previously begun program to
continue running from the point at which you interrupted it.
Your terminal is left at monitor level.

You can now use commands that do not require core, or you can
detach from your job and create a new job to run other
programs.

Characteristics

Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Requires core.
Associated Commands

CONTINUE - Continues the operation of your program, bringing your
terminal back to user level.
START - Starts the program from the beginning or from
specified address, leaving your terminal at user level.

the

CSTART - Starts the program from the specified address or
the beginning, but leaves your terminal at monitor level.

from

NOTE
If your program requires terminal I/O,
the
CCONTINUE command allows the program to run only
to that point.
The program then waits for
terminal I/O, before it continues executing. Use
the CONTINUE command to re-enter user level and
accept or input the required I/O.
.

2-23

SYSTEM COMMANDS
CCONTINUE Command
Example

This is a program that finds all the numbers
writes them out to disk .

10,000

and

. TYPE NUMBER.FOR<RET>
100

201
300

N = 0
N = N + 1
IF (N .EQ. 10000) GO TO 300
WRITE (22, 201) N
GO TO 100
FORMAT (lX, I14,' IS BETWEEN 1 AND 10000')
STOP 'DONE'
END

Execute the program .
. EXECUTE NUMBER. FOR<RET>
FORTRAN: NUMBER
NUMBER
LINK:
LOADING
[LNKXCT NUMBER EXECUTION]
"'C
"'C

Type two CTRL/C's to halt the program.
Continue the program, leaving your terminal at monitor level .
. CCONTINUE<RET>
Type CTRL/T for
terminal.

job

DAY:

2.05 RD:O WR:O NUMBER 4+15P RN* PC:000175

8.85 RUN:

status.

CTRL/T

does

not

echo

your

The status message RN* indicates the program NUMBER is running.
Detach from the job to do work on another job .
. DETACH<RET>
FROM JOB 19

Later, attach to your original job .
. ATTACH 19 [27,5434]<RET>
PASSWORD:<RET>

2-24

SYSTEM COMMANDS
CCONTINUE Command

Type CONTINUE to re-enter user level .
. CONTINUE<RET>
System message (see NOTE) .
?PLEASE TYPE AC FIRST
Type CTRL/C and CONTINUE, to enter user level .

. CONTINUE<RET>
Program message indicates execution is finished.
The file
containing data from this program is named FOR22.DAT, and is
stored in your default disk area.
DONE
END OF EXECUTION
CPU TIME:4.60

ELAPSED TIME:12:12.83

EXIT

NOTE
It is necessary to type CTRL/C to re-enter user level,
because the program is running.
The program must be
interrupted so that your terminal can access it.

2-25

SYSTEM COMMANDS
CLOSE Command
CLOSE Command

Function

The CLOSE command terminates any input
progress on the specified device.

output

currently

Although most programs close files when they finish executing a
command string, the CLOSE command is provided for a program that
does not terminate or a program that is being debugged.
This
command causes all files which are open for output to be closed.
If a CLOSE is not done, the next RESET by a command (R, RUN, GET)
or program deletes any partially written disk files.
Format

CLOSE dev:
Where:

dey:
is the logical or physical name of the device on
which I/O is to be terminated.
dev:
cannot refer to a
disk device.
This argument is optional.

If dev:
is omitted, I/O is terminated on all devices,
except for the job's controlling terminal, and all
files are CLOSEd.
Characteristics

Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Restrictions

You cannot continue the program after using CLOSE,
but you can
restart at the beginning of your program or you can access DDT.
You cannot specify a disk device as an argument.
Examples

Terminate input from the paper-tape reader number 2 .
. CLOSE PTR2:<RET>

Terminate I/O from all devices except your terminal .
. CLOSE<RET>

Attempt to terminate I/O from DSKB:
DEVA .
. ASSIGN DSKB:
DEVA<RET>
DSKB assigned

.CLOSE DEVA<RET>
?Not legal for disk-like devices
2-26

assigned

logical

name

SYSTEM COMMANDS
COMPILE Command
COMPILE Command

Function
The COMPILE command produces relocatable binary files
(.REL
files)
and/or compilation listings for specified source program
files.
The system determines which language compiler to use by
the source file extension or by switches you specify in the
command string.
If you do not supply any switches in the command
string,
but you do use a standard extension, the system uses the
following compilers:
Source File Extension

Compiler Used

.ALG
.BLI, .BI0
.CBL
.F4 or .FOR
.FAI
. MAC
. PAL
.PAS
.PII
.SAI
.SIM
.SNO

ALGOL compiler
BLISS-I0 compiler
COBOL compiler
FORTRAN compiler
FAIL compiler
MACRO assembler
PALlO compiler
Pascal compiler
MACYII assembler
SAIL compiler
SIMULA compiler
SNOBOL compiler
NOTE

The compiler cannot be changed with a switch,
but it
can be specified with a switch when the source file
has an unrecognizable or no extension.
If the source
file has a non-standard extension,
and you do not
specify the compiler in a switch, FORTRAN is used as
the default compiler.
All standard file extensions
are listed in Appendix D.
Usually, the system translates the source file
if there is no
corresponding binary (.REL) file, or if the date and time of the
source file is later than the date and time of the binary file.
If the binary file is newer than the source file, the system does
not generate a new .REL file.
This command runs the COMPIL program,
which interprets
command before running the appropriate language compiler.

the

FAIL, MACYII , SAIL, and SNOBOL are recognized as compilers
if
the
appropriate
assembly
switches
are set at
installation.

only
your

LOAD,
EXECUTE,
Each time you issue the COMPILE,
or DEBUG
commands,
the system remembers the command, with its arguments,
in a temporary file on disk or in TMPCOR if they are small
When you issue one of these commands without an
enough.
argument, it causes the system to use the argument saved in the
temporary file.
The COMPILE command accepts several command constructions:
the @
construction
(indirect commands),
the + construction,
the =
construction, and the < > construction.
Refer to Appendix C for
a complete description of each of these constructions.
2-27

SYSTEM COMMANDS
COMPILE Command
Format

COMPILE file-spec/switch,file-spec/switch, ...
Where:

file-spec is a single file- specification or a string of
file specifications, separated by commas.
The standard
file specification consists of:
a device name, a file
name
(with or without an extension), and a directory
name.
If you omit the file specification argument, the
system uses the argument specified in a previous
COMPILE-class command, if possible.
(Refer to Section
1.9.)

NOTE
Note that a maximum of 150 processor switch
characters can be passed to the compiler.
You can use the following switches as temporary or permanent
switches.
(Refer to Section 1.8.4.) Switches relevant to COMPILE
follow; all switches allowed with COMPILE can be used with LOAD,
EXECUTE and DEBUG.
Function

Switch
IALGOL

Compiles with ALGOL.
.ALG extension.

Assumed for

files

IBINARY

Generates a binary file for each file compiled.
The file name of the binary file is .REL.
This is
the default action.

IBLISS

Compiles the file with BLISS-10. Assumed for files
with the extension of .B10 and .BLI.

IC68

Compiles with COBOL-68.

IC74

Compiles with COBOL-74.

ICOBOL

Compiles the file with COBOL.
with the extension of .CBL.

ICOMPILE

Forces a compilation of this source file even if
the relocatable binary file is newer.
Use this
switch to obtain an extra compilation (for example,
to obtain a listing of the compilation). NOCOMPILE
is the default switch.

ICREF

Produces a listing file on the disk for each file
compiled, for later processing by the CREF program.
The file extension of the listing file is
.CRF.
The file can then be listed with the CREF command.
With COBOL files, the CREF file is appended to the
output file;
additional commands are needed to
obtain the cross-referenced file.

lOOT

Loads the program debugger DDT with the file.

Assumed

with

for

the

files

IDEBUG: (arg, arg, ... )

Passes the arguments to FORTRAN.
Refer
TOPS-10/TOPS-20 FORTRAN Language Manual.

2-28

the

SYSTEM COMMANDS
COMPILE Command
/DLIST

Creates a listing file with the extension .LST and
stores it in your disk area.
You can have this
file printed on the line printer by using the PRINT
command.

/F66

Applies FORTRAN-66 rules for DO loops and
statements.

/FAIL

Assembles the file with FAIL.
with the .FAI extension.

/FORTRAN

Compiles the file with a FORTRAN compiler. Assumed
for files with either the extension of .F4 or .FOR
and for all files with unrecognizable compiler
extensions, if FORTRAN is the standard compiler for
your system.
This switch is necessary if the file
has a unrecognizable compiler extension and FORTRAN
is not the standard compiler or is not the current
default.

/FORDDT

Loads the FORDDT debugger with the program.

/FOROTS
/FORSE

Obsolete

/FUDGE:file

Creates a temporary file that contains the library
file name and the names of the .REL files produced
by the command string. When you issue the FUDGE
command,
PIP reads this file to generate the
library .REL file.
(See the TOPS-lO MAKLIB User's
Guide for information about library files.)

Assumed

EXTERNAL
for

files

The argument to /FUDGE is the
library
file
specification.
If you omit the file extension, the
default is .REL.
This switch is permanent
(sticky) .
That is,
it
pertains to all
.REL files generated by this
command string.
/GFLOAT

Indicates that double-precision numbers are to be
stored in G-floating format.
This format has an
expanded exponent range.
This option is available
on KLlO processors only.

/K?lO

Designates the machine on which the program will
execute after it has been loaded.
The default is
the processor that is executing the command.
The?
can be replaced by L or S.
To designate a KS
processor, use /KSlO.

/LIBRARY

Loads the program
in
library
(/LIBRARY is identical to /SEARCH.)

/LINK

Obsolete

/LIST

Prints the listing file on the line printer (LPT:).
If the line printer is spooled or available to your
job, the listing file is automatically printed.

/LMAP:file

Produces a loader map
contains local symbols.

2-29

while

mode.

The

map

SYSTEM COMMANDS
COMPILE Conunand

/MACRO

Assembles the file with MACRO.
with the extension of .MAC.

/MACY11

Assembles the file with MACY11. Assumed for files
with the extension .P11. MACY11 is recognized as a
compiler only if the appropriate assembly switch is
set.
This switch is not supported.

/MAP:file

Produces a loader map while loading.
file name is MAP.MAP.

/NEW

Runs the appropriate language compiler from the
experimental library area [1,5] (device NEW:).
If
the compiler does not exist on device NEW:,
COMPIL
tries to obtain it from device SYS:.

/NOBINARY

Does not generate binary files.
This switch,
when
combined with the /CREF or /LIST switch, is useful
when compiling
programs
solely
to
generate
listings.

/NOCOMPILE

Compiles the source file if there is no relocatable
file
newer than the source file.
Note that
/COMPILE always compiles, /REL never compiles,
and
/NOCOMPILE
(the
default
switch)
compiles
conditionally.

/NODEBUG

Does not pass
FORTRAN.

/NOLIST

Does not generate listing files.
This
default action.
Complement to /LIST.

the

/NOOPTIMIZE

Does not optimize the object source code.
the default.
Complement to /OPTIMIZE.

This

/NOSEARCH

Does not load the program in library
Complement to /SEARCH.

/OPTIMIZE

Optimizes the object code of a FORTRAN program.

/OLD

Runs the appropriate language compiler from the
system library [1,3] of old programs (device OLD:).
If the compiler does not exist on device OLD:,
COMPIL tries to obtain it from device SYS:.

/PAL10

Assembles the file with PALlO.
with the .PAL extension.

Assumed

for

files

/PASCAL

Compiles the file with Pascal.
with the .PAS extension.

Assumed

for

files

/REL

Loads an existing .REL file rather than compiling a
new one.
Refer also to /COMPILE and /NOCOMPILE.

/SAIL

Compiles the file with SAIL.
with the .SAI extension.

for

files

/SAVE

Saves the core image to disk in an executable
after it is loaded.

file

/SEARCH

Loads the program in library search mode.
is identical to /LIBRARY.)

previously

2-30

Assumed

specified

for

The

files

default

arguments

Assumed

mode.

(/SEARCH

SYSTEM COMMANDS
COMPILE Command

/SELF

Runs the appropriate language compiler from device
DSK:
instead of from the system library (device
SYS:).
This switch is useful if you keep a private
copy of a compiler, in your own disk area.

/SIMULA

Compiles the file with SIMULA.
with the .SIM extension.

/SNOBOL

Compiles the file with SNOBOL. Assumed for files
with the extension .SNO.
SNOBOL is recognized as a
compiler only if the appropriate assembly switch is
set.
This switch is not supported.

/SSAVE

Saves the core image in a sharable executable
after the program is loaded.

file

/SYS

Compiles the program with the compiler
This is the default.

SYS:.

Assumed

for

from

files

Characteristics

Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Runs the appropriate language compiler, destroying your
core image.

original

Restrictions

You cannot use wildcard constructions with COMPILE.
A language compiler appearing more than once within a
single
command string cannot access more than one disk area.
For
example, the following is invalid:
.COMPILE TESPRG.F10/NEW,SUBRTN.F10/SYS
However, the following is valid:
.COMPILE TESPRG.F10/NEW
.COMPILE SUBRTN.F10/SYS
Examples

Compile PROG (with the null extension) with FORTRAN, TEST.MAC
with MACRO, and MANAGE (with the null extension) with MACRO.
A listing file is generated for MANAGE.
The files generated
are PROG.REL, TEST.REL, MANAGE.REL, and MANAGE.LST .
. COMPILE PROG,TEST.MAC,MANAGE/MACRO/LIST<RET>
FORTRAN:
PROG
MAIN
MACRO:
TEST
MANAGE
EXIT

2-31

SYSTEM COMMANDS
COMPILE Command

Compile SIGN.MAC with MACRO, TABLES (with the null extension)
with FORTRAN,
and MULTI.ALG with ALGOL.
Listing files are
generated for SIGN.MAC and MULTI.ALG .
. COMPILE/LIST SIGN.MAC,TABLES/NOLIST,MULTI.ALG<RET>
MACRO:
SIGN
FORTRAN:
TABLES
MAIN
ALGOL: MULTI
EXIT

Compile the files DIVIDE, SUBTRC, and ADD with the FORTRAN
compiler,
even if current .REL files exist.
Generate files
to be processed by CREF.
The files generated are DIVIDE.CRF,
DIVIDE.REL, SUBTRC.CRF, SUBTRC.REL, ADD.CRF and ADD.REL .
. COMPILE/CREF/COMPILE DIVIDE,SUBTRC,ADD<RET>
FORTRAN:
MAIN.
FORTRAN:
MAIN.
FORTRAN:
MAIN.

DIVIDE
SUBTRC
ADD

Compile the files contained in the command file LIBALL.
Create a temporary file which contains all the .REL file
names and the library file name
(MONITR.REL).
The FUDGE
command creates the library file, MONITR.REL, with the .REL
files in the same order as they were specified in the command
file .
. COMPILE/FUDGE:MONITR.REL@LIBALL<RET>
FORTRAN:
MAIN.
FORTRAN:
MAIN.
FORTRAN:
MAIN .

DIVIDE
SUBTRC
ADD

. FUDGE<RET>
5.

Compile and execute the program NUMBER. FOR .
. COMPILE NUMB2.FOR<RET>
FORTRAN:
MAIN .

NUMB2

. EXECUTE
LINK:
LOADING
[LNKXCT NUMB2 EXECUTION]
DONE
END OF EXECUTION
CPU TIME:
0.12 ELAPSED TIME:
EXIT

2-32

0.53

SYSTEM COMMANDS
CONTEXT Command
CONTEXT Command
Function

The CONTEXT command displays the status of a job's context.
It
also allows you to create, kill, and switch between contexts.
When issued without arguments, the command gives you information
about your current contexts, such as the name of the program in
core for that particular context.
You can also use CONTEXT to
create parallel contexts.
Parallel contexts permit you to switch
between programs (in separate contexts) without waiting for them
to reinitialize.
You can specify switches to list the status of
a particular context or delete a context.
(Section 1.5 contains
a discussion of contexts.)
Format

CONTEXT argument/switch
Where:

argument is optional.
With no arguments,
CONTEXT
displays information about all of your job's contexts,
including the program loaded in each context.
/switch is one of the options listed below.

Argument, when specified, can be one of the following:
handle

A context name or number.
This
argument
switches your
job's current context to the
specified one.
A period
(.)
can replace a
context name for the current context only.

name=number

Where name is a
one
to
six
character
alphanumeric string to be associated with the
specified context number.
An equal sign can be used to create a new,
parallel context, without switching the current
context to the newly created context.

/Switch, when specified with the handle argument, can be
the following:

one

/KILL

Deletes the specified parallel context.

/LIST

Lists information about the specified context only.

Characteristics

Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Requires LOGIN.
Preserves your core image.
Restrictions

To use the CONTEXT command, you must be at monitor level, and the
job must be halted.

2-33

SYSTEM COMMANDS
CONTEXT Command
Associated Commands

POP

Returns you to a previous superior context,
the current context.

PUSH

Creates an inferior context.

and

destroys

Examples

Name context 1 (the current context, in this case) TOPLVL .
. CONTEXT TOPLVL=l

Display the status of the current context .
. CONTEXT
Contexts used/quota = 1/4, pages used/quota = 0/1000
Contexts
Superior
Prog
Idle time
* TOPLVL 1
PATH
Notice that the current context,
TOPLVL,
is marked by an
asterisk
(*).
For this particular example,
one of four
allotted contexts is being used,
none
of
the
1,000
saved-pages is in use,
the context name is TOPLVL, the
context number is 1, and the PATH program is running in this
context.

Create an adjacent context, run MAIL
Then look at the context status .

under

it,

and

exit.

. CONTEXT=
.MAIL
21 messages, 116 blocks.
MS>quit
. CONTEXT
Contexts used/quota = 2/4, pages used/quota
Context
Superior
Prog
Idle time
TOPLVL 1
PATH
19.78
*
2
MS

4/1000

Note the differences from the previous status.
There are now
two contexts in use, and the current, unnamed context 2 is
running MS. Also, PATH has been idle for 19.78 seconds since
the last CONTEXT command was issued. MS will restart very
quickly if you type CONTINUE, because it does not have to
re-initialize.
4.

Finally, kill one context that is running MS,
and examine
your status.
You have to move to another context to do this,
because you cannot kill the current context .
. CONTEXT 1
.CONTEXT 2/KILL
. CONTEXT
Contexts used/quota = 1/4, pages used/quota = 0/1000
Context
Superior
Prog
Idle time
* TOPLVL
1
PATH
Context 1 is now the current and only context.
2-34

SYSTEM COMMANDS
CONTINUE Command
CONTINUE Command

Function

The CONTINUE command continues your program from the point at
which you interrupted it.
You interrupt program execution with
CTRL/C. After you use CONTINUE, your terminal returns to user
level.
Format

CONTINUE
Characteristics

Places your terminal at user level;
Requires core.
Example

This is a program that finds all the numbers up to 10,000 .
. TYPE NUMBER.FOR<RET>
100

201
300

N = a
N = N + 1
IF (N .EQ.
10000) GO TO 300
WRITE (22, 201) N
GO TO 100
FORMAT (lX, I14,' IS BETWEEN 1 AND 10000')
STOP 'DONE'
END

Execute the program .
. EXECUTE NUMBER. FOR<RET>
FORTRAN:NUMBER
NUMBER
LINK: LOADING
[LNKXCT NUMBER EXECUTION]
"C
"C

Type two CTRL/Cs to halt the program.
Detach from the job to do work on another job .
. DETACH<RET>
FROM JOB 19

2-35

SYSTEM COMMANDS

CONTINUE Conunand
Later, attach to your original job .
. ATTACH 19 [27,5434]<RET>
PASSWORD:<RET>
Type CONTINUE to enter user level .
. CONTINUE<RET>
?PLEASE TYPE AC FIRST
System message (see NOTE) .
Type CTRL/C and CONTINUE to enter user level .

. CONTINUE<RET>
DONE
END OF EXECUTION
CPU TIME:4.60

ELAPSED TIME:12:12.83

EXIT

Program message indicates execution is finished.
The file
containing data from this program is named FOR22.DAT, and is
stored in your default disk area.
NOTE
You must type CTRL/C to re-enter user level, because
the
program
is
running.
The program must be
interrupted so that your terminal can access it.

2-36

SYSTEM COMMANDS

COpy Conunand
COpy Command

FWlction
The COpy command copies a file from one device to another,
or
within a device,
file structure,
or directory.
The conunand
string can contain one output specification and any number of
input specifications.

Fo:rmat
COpy dev:file.ext [directory]<nnn>=dev:file.ext [directory] , ...
Where:

The file to the left of the equal sign
(=)
is the
destination,
or output file,
and the file(s) to the
right of the equal sign is the source,
or input
file(s) .
dey:
is a physical or logical device name.
omit a device name, the system assumes DSK:.

you

file.ext is the name of the file(s) to be used in input
or output.
If you omit the output file name, the
system defaults to the input file name.
If you
transfer many input files to one output file, the
system combines the files.
You can use wildcard
constructions with the COpy conunand.
[directory] is the disk area in which the files are to
be read or written.
If you type this area before the
file name, the system uses this area as the default for
all succeeding files.
If you omit this argument, your
default directory is accessed.
You can transfer files
to or from another directory only if you have access to
that directory.

<nnn> is the protection code to be given to the

output
file.
If you omit this argument, the system ass1gns
the system standard protection code, even if the input
file
already
has a non-standard protection code
associated with it.
Protection codes are described in
Section 1.9.4.
Use the equal sign
(=)
to separate the destination
(output) side from the source (input) side.

Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Destroys your core image.
Runs the PIP program.

2-37

SYSTEM COMMANDS
COPY Conunand
Example

Find file NOTICE. TXT in SYS:
.DIRECT SYS:NOTICE.TXT<RET>
NOTICE TXT 2 <155> 6-SEP-79 DSKC: [1,4]
Search your own directory .
. DIRECT DSKB:NOTICE<RET>
%WLDNSF No such files as NOTICE.TXT
Copy NOTICE from SYS: into your directory on DSKB:
.COPY DSKB:NOTICE.TXT=SYS:NOTICE.TXT<RET>
Check your directory to find NOTICE on DSKB:
.DIR NOTICE<RET>
NOTICE TXT 2 <055> 6-SEP-79 DSKB: [27,5434]

2-38

SYSTEM COMMANDS
CORE Command
CORE Command

Function

The CORE command prints or changes the amount of core memory
assigned to your
job.
Because programs usually allocate core,
you generally do not need this command.
If your job is locked in core and you issue this command
nonzero argument, the monitor prints an error message.

with

is a decimal number; this argument is optional.
You may not assign more than one section of core
your job.

Format

CORE nx
Where:

If n is 0, the low and high segments are removed
the vi-rtual addressing space of your job.

from

If n is greater than 0, n represents the total number
of blocks of core to be assigned to your job from this
point on.
If n is less than the high-segment size plus the
minimum low-segment size, n plus the high-segment size
is assumed.
x is either K or P.
K represents units of 1024 words.
P
represents
512-word
pages.
For example,
3P
represents three pages or 1536 words.
If you do not
specify x, K is assumed.
If you omit nx, the monitor prints the amount of core currently
being used by your job, as well as the octal page number, page
(accessibility) status, and the origin of the pages.
This form
of the CORE command does not change the core assignment.
Page status can be any of the following:
0

executable

readable

(RD)

writable

(WR)

sharable

(SH)

locked

allocated-but-zero

(EX)

(LK)

Origin can be
specification.

(AZ) .

private

pages,

spy

pages,

The total pages in the space is also displayed.

2-39

the

file

SYSTEM COMMANDS
CORE Command
Characteristics

Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Does not operate when your job is in run state.
Example

Use CORE to look at the amount and contents
after using MAIL .

memory

assigned

. CORE<RET>
Page number
Page status
0-74
EX RD WR
76-165
EX RD WR
620-674
EX RD SH
Total of 162 pages

Origin
Private pages
Private pages
DSKA:MS[1,4]

virt. memo assigned 118+45P (Current limit: 16384P Max limit: 16384P)
Phys. memo assigned 118+45P (Guideline: 16384P Max limit: 999P)
Swap space left: 81502P

2-40

SYSTEM COMMANDS

CPUNCH Corrunand
CPUNCH Command

Function

The CPUNCH corrunand places entries in the card punch queue.
to the QUEUE corrunand for further information and examples.

Refer

Format

CPUNCH dev:jobname=file-spec/switches
Where:

is the name of the individual device on which the
file is to be punched.
(For example, CDP2:
is card
punch number 2.) The device name is optional.
To punch
the file on a card punch at a different node, use
devSxx;, where xx is the node number.
(For example,
CDPS22:
is a card punch on node number 22.)
dey:

jobname is the name of the job you are entering into
the queue.
The default job name is the name of the
first file in the request.

The equal sign is required if you
device or job name.

specify

either

the

fi1e-spec is a single file specification or a string of
file specifications, separated by corrunas, for the files
being processed. A file specification is in the form
dev:file.ext[directory].
(Refer to Section 1.9.)

If you specify neither a job name nor a file-spec,
a
list of all the jobs in the card punch queue will be
printed on your terminal.
The wildcard construction can
specifications.

used

for

the

file

/switches are listed below.
The switches to this
corrunand can be divided into two categories, depending
on whether the switch can be used only once, or can be
used more times, in a single corrunand string.
The two
categories are:

Queue-Operation Switches

These switches can be used only once in a corrunand
string.
They affect the entire request, and you
can place them anywhere in the corrunand string.
If
you have used one of these switches in a corrunand
string, you cannot use it again in the same string.
Many corrunands have a INO construction, which takes
a negative effect. Be sure you do not use the INO
construction of a switch i~ the same corrunand string
with the positive construction.

2-41

SYSTEM COMMANDS
CPUNCH Command
o

File-Control Switches

These switches can be used any number of times in
the command string.
You can also use the /NO
construction of a switch in the same command
string.
To achieve a temporary or permanent effect
by the placement of the switch,
refer to Section
1.8.4.

Switches

Category

Function

/ABEFORE:
date-time

File
control

Queues the file only if the access
date is before the specified date
and time.

/ACCOUNT:name

Queue
operation

Specifies the account to which the
job should be charged.

/AFTER:
date-time

Queue
operation

Processes the request
specified time.

/ALLFILES:
YES or NO

Queue
operation

Accepts the request only if all of
the files in the request exist. By
default, if any of the files do not
exist, the others will be processed
appropriately.
This
switch
specifies that if any file does not
exist,
no
files
should
be
processed.
The value YES or NO is
optional.
If you use YES, all of
the files you specified must exist.
If
NO,
existing
files
are
processed, and warning messages are
printed
for files that do not
exist.

/ASINCE:
date-time

File
control

Queues the file only if the access
date is later than the specified
date and time.

/BEFORE:
date-time

File
control

Queues only the files with creation
dates before the specified date and
time.

after

the

/CHARACTERISTIC: Queue
arg
operation

Specifies an output characteristic.
You can find a
list
of
the
characteristics arguments defined
for your system
in
the
file
SYS:CHARTY.DAT.

/CHECK

Queue
operation

Prints on your terminal a list of
the queue entries made by your job.

/COPIES:n

File
control

Repeats the output the specified
number of times
(n must be less
than 64).
The default is one copy.

/CREATE

Queue
operation

Makes a new entry in the specified
queue.
This
function
is
the
default,
except when listing queue
entries.

2-42

SYSTEM COMMANDS
CPUNCH Command

/DEFERRED

Queue
operation

Causes
deferred
output
to be
released to the card punch queue.
You must use one of the following
switches with /DEFERRED.
/CREATE to complete
output requests.

the

released

/KILL to eliminate
output requests.

the

released

Refer to the SET DEFER command
more information.

for

/DELETE

File
control

Deletes the file after processing
it.
Same as /DISPOSE:DELETE.

/DESTINATION:
node

Queue
operation

Specifies the node at which the
file will be punched.
Use the node
name or node number to specify the
node.
The files will
not
be
punched at any host other than the
host to which the terminal
is
connected.

/DISPOSE:arg

File
control

Controls the disposition of
file after it is processed.
arguments to this switch are:

the
The

DELETE deletes the file from your
directory after processing it.
PRESERVE preserves the
processing it.

file

after

RENAME renames the file from your
directory into the spooling area.
Thus,
the file
is
effectively
deleted immediately.
/DISTRIBUTION:
"text"

Queue
operation

Specifies text to place in the
distribution field, on the banner
page of output.
You can use this
field
to
include
mailing
information,
or the location where
the operator should
leave
the
listing.
The text field may be up
to 39
alphanumeric
characters,
including punctuation and spaces if
the text is placed in quotation
marks.

/ERBINARY

File
control

Prints an error message if a binary
file is included 1n the queue.
This is the default.

/ERNONE

Queue
operation

Prints an error message if no files
match the file specification.
This
is the default.

/ERPROTECTION

Queue
operation

Prints an error message if the
the request involves a protection
violation.
This is the default.
2-43

SYSTEM COMMANDS
CPUNCH Command

/FAST

Queue
operation

Prints the entries in the queue
your terminal.

/FILE:arg

File
control

Specifies how the file format is to
interpreted.
The
following
arguments can be used with this
switch:
ASCII interprets the file as
text.

ASCII

ELEVEN interprets the file as four
8-bit bytes in each 36-bit word.
The bits are arranged as follows:
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte

1:
2:
3:
4:

bits
bits
bits
bits

10-17
2-9
28-35
20-27

/FORMS:arg

Queue
operation

Specifies any special cards to be
used. Available forms are listed
in SYS:FORMST.DAT.

/GENERIC

File
control

Sends output to the next available
card punch. Complement to /UNIT.

/HEADER:
YES or NO

File
control

Makes header cards for
The default is YES.

/HELP:arg

Queue
operation

Prints information on your terminal
about the QUEUE command.
This
switch does not queue any files.
The switch can be
used
alone
(/HELP)
or
with
one
of the
following arguments:

the

file.

TEXT prints a message with the
format and switches of the QUEUE
command.
This is the same as /HELP
with no arguments.
SWITCHES prints a list of all the
switches available with the QUEUE
command.
/JOBNAME:name

Queue
operation

Specifies the name of the job.
The
name can be up to 6 alphanumeric
characters.

/KILL

Queue
operation

Removes the specified entry from
the queue.
You must specify the
job name, /REQUESTID, or /SEQUENCE,
left of the equal sign in the
command line.

/LENGTH:n:m

File
control

Processes
only the files whose
length is between nand m blocks in
length.

/LIMIT:n

Queue
operation

Limits the output to the specified
number of cards.

2-44

SYSTEM COMMANDS
CPUNCH Corrunand

/LIST:arg

Queue
operation

Prints information about the jobs
in the queue.
If you use /LIST
alone,
it shows the jobs in the
queue.
This is equivalent to using
the
CPUNCH
corrunand
with
no
arguments and no switches.
/LIST
can be abbreviated to /L.
The
switch can also take one of the
following arguments:
ALL shows all data about each queue
request.
FAST shows a fast list of the queue
requests.
JOBS shows a list of the jobs in
the queue.
(Same as /LIST with no
arguments. )
SUMMARY shows only the surrunary line
of the queue display.

/MESSAGE:arg

Queue
operation

Specifies
the information to be
output if an error occurs.
The
arguments are:
ADDRESS

Prints the location
in memory where the
error occurred.

CONTINUATION

Prints
information
about the error.

FIRST

Prints a
one-line
error message.

PREFIX

Prints
the
six
character prefix.

/MODIFY

Queue
operation

Alters the specified parameter in
the specified job.
This switch
requires
that
you have access
rights to the job.
You
must
specify the job name, /REQUESTID,
or /SEQUENCE,
left of the equal
sign in the corrunand line.
This
switch can be used to modify a
previously
submitted request as
long as the request has not been
started.

/NEW:
YES or NO

File
control

Accepts
file
specifications
files that do not exist.

/NOHEADER

File
control

Does not make header cards for each
file.

/NONEW

File
control

Does not accept file specifications
of files that do not yet exist.
This is the default.

2-45

SYSTEM COMMANDS
CPUNCH Conunand
/NONOTIFY

Queue
operation

Does not notify you when the job is
finished.
This is the default.

/NONULL

Queue
operation

Prints a fatal error message on a
null request.
This is the default.

/NOOPTION

Queue
operation

Suppresses
file.

/NOPHYSICAL

File
control

Allows logical names for devices in
the conunand string.

/NOSTRS

File
control

When scanning structures for the
takes
only
the
first
file,
This is the default
occurrence.
function.

/NOTES:"text"

Queue
operation

Prints the text in the header card.

/NOTIFY:
YES or NO

Queue
operation

Notifies you on your terminal when
your request is completed.
To be
notified,
use
/NOTIFY with no
argument, or with YES or 1 as an
argument.
To
suppress
notification,
use
/NOTIFY:O
or
/NOTIFY:NO.
By default,
you are
not notified when a
request is
finished.
Special cases, such as
printing of batch log files
and
output of deferred requests, will
never notify you when they are
completed.

/NULL:
YES or .NO

Queue
operation

Does
not
print a
fatal error
message if the specified files do
not exist.

/OKBINARY

File
control

Accepts files
whose
extensions
indicate that they include binary
information.
Normally, files with
extensions .SAV, .SHR, .LOW,
.REL,
.EXE, and .HGH will not be accepted
for processing.

/OKNONE

Queue
operation

Does not produce a warning message
if no
files
match
the
file
specification.

/OKPROTECTION

Queue
operation

Does not print an error message if
a file protection violation occurs.

/OPTION:name

Queue
operation

Uses
the option line QUEUE:name
in the SWITCH.INI file.
SWITCH.INI
files are described in Appendix B.

/PHYSICAL

File
control

Ignores logical device names in the
command line.

/PRESERVE

File
control

Saves
the
file
after
processing
it.
This
is
the
default.
This switch is the same
as /DISPOSE:PRESERVE.
2-46

reading

the SWITCH.INI

SYSTEM COMMANDS
CPUNCH Corrunand
/PRIORITY:n

Queue
operation

Assigns the specified priority (n
is 1 to 63)
to the request.
A
larger number has greater priority.

/PROTECTION:nnn

Queue
operation

Specifies a protection code to be
associated with the request.
Queue
requests may have protection codes.
These
are
exactly
like
file
protection codes.
Refer to Section
1.9.4.

/PUNCH:arg

File
control

Punches the file in the specified
mode.
If you omit this switch, the
file
is punched according to the
data mode specified in the file.
The following arguments can be used
with this switch:
026

Punches the files
Hollerith mode.

ASCII

Punches the files in
card mode.

BCD

Punches the files
Hollerith mode.
026. )

BINARY

Punches the
checksurruned
mode.

IMAGE

Punches the files in
card format.

026
ASCII

in 026
(Same as

files
in
a
binary
card
image

/REMOTE

Queue
operation

Prints on your terminal a
list of
remote queues.
Must be used with
/DESTINATION.

/REQUESTID:n

Queue
operation

Specifies
the
request
identification number of the
job
you wish to modify or terminate.
The request identification number
is assigned when you queue the
request.

/RUN:file

Queue
operation

Executes the specified file after
the request is accepted.

/RUNCORE:n

Queue
operation

Executes the specified file in nK
of core after the
request
is
accepted.

/RUNOFFSET:n

Queue
operation

Executes the specified file with
start offset n after the request is
accepted.

/SEQUENCE:n

Queue
operation

Specifies a sequence number to aid
in identifying a
request to be
modified or deleted.

/SINCE:
date-time

File
control

Queues only the files with creation
dates after the specified date and
time.
2-47

SYSTEM COMMANDS
CPUNCH Command
/STRS:
YES or NO

Queue
operation

Searches for
the
file on all
structures in the search list and
takes
every
occurrence.
The
default is to take just the first
occurrence of the file.

/TMPFIL:file:
text

Queue
operation

Creates a temporary file on TMP:
and enters the text into the file.

/UNIT:n

Queue
operation

Specifies the unit number of the
device you want the output sent to.

/USERNAME:
"name"

Queue
operation

Specifies the user name field for
the banner page of output.
This
field
can
contain
up
to 39
alphanumeric characters,
and may
include punctuation and spaces if
the name is placed in quotation
marks.

Associated Messages
When a new entry is made in a system queue, the system prints
message on the user's terminal.
The message is in the form:

[CARD-PUNCH JOB name QUEUED, REQUEST #nnn, LIMIT xxx]
Where:

name is the name of the job in the
can be specified by the user.
defaults to the name of the first
request.

queue.
This
Otherwise, it
file in the

nnn is the

number that represents the
identification of the job in the queue.

request

xxx is the maximum number of cards
will use.

the

that

job

Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Runs the QUEUE program.
Destroys your core image.
Does not require LOGIN if you desire a list of queue entries.
Examples
1.

Punch the file SYSTAT.MAC in ASCII format .
. CPUNCH SYSTAT.MAC/PUNCH:ASCII<RET>
[CARD-PUNCH JOB SYSTAT QUEUED, REQUEST #75, LIMIT 33]

Punch the file SYSTAT.REL in binary format, but do not
output until after 5:00 P.M .
. CPUNCH SYSTAT.REL/PUNCH:BINARY/AFTER:17:00<RET>
[CARD-PUNCH JOB SYSTAT QUEUED, REQUEST #43, LIMIT 200]

2-48

begin

SYSTEM COMMANDS
CREF Command
CREF Command

Function

The CREF command runs the CREF program.
If you have created any
files to be processed with CREF (using the /CREF switch with a
COMPILE, LOAD, DEBUG, or EXECUTE command),
CREF processes them
and prints them on the line printer.
The file containing the
names of these CREF files is then deleted so that subsequent CREF
commands will not list them again.
When the logical device name LPT:
is assigned to a device other
than the line printer, the CREF files are stored on that device
with the same file name and the extension .LST.
(See the CREF
manual in the TOPS-10 Software Notebooks for more information.)
Format

CREF file-spec
Where:

file-spec is a valid file
specification.
(Refer to
Section 1.9.)
When you supply a file specification in
the command line,
CREF produces a cross-referenced
listing file for the specified file.
If you do not
give an argument to the command, CREF uses the argument
saved from a previous COMPILE-class command.
If there
is no stored argument, CREF prompts with an asterisk
(*) .

You can use the following switches with the CREF command.
Function

Switch

Advances magtape by one file

Backspaces magtape by one file

Cancels SWITCH.INI switch defaulting.

Permits default switches as for SWITCH.INI.

Types this text.

Kills user-defined symbol table listing.

Suppresses user macro's, OPDEF's, symbol table.

Lists the opcodes.

Preserves (does not delete)

Restarts listing and prompts for line number.

Suppresses
tables.

Rewinds tape.

Indicates zero DECtape directory.

program

listing

2-49

(may be repeated) .
(may be repeated)

input files.

and

lists

only

symbol

SYSTEM COMMANDS
CREF Command
Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Destroys your core image.
Requires LOGIN.
Examp1es
1.

Compile the files contained in the command
produce CREF listing files on the disk .

file

PROMAC

and

. COMPILE/CREF@PROMAC<RET>
FORTRAN:
INPUT1
MAIN.
INPUT2
FORTRAN:
MAIN.
Process and list the cross-referenced listing files produced
by the COMPILE command.
The argument is the stored argument
that was used in the COMPILE command .
. SET SPOOL LPT<RET>
.CREF<RET>
CREF:INPUT1
CREF:INPUT2
2.

Compile and load the files contained in the command file
CONALL.
Produce a
loader map with the file name NAME and
CREF files on disk .
. LOAD/CREF/MAP:NAME@CONALL<RET>
MACRO:
HIGH
MACRO:
SHARE
EXIT
Assign the logical name LPT to magnetic tape unit 1.
the CREF files on MTA1: to be output at a later time .
. ASSIGN MTA1 LPT<RET>
MTA261 ASSIGNED
.CREF<RET>
CREF:
HIGH
CREF:
SHARE

2-50

Store

SYSTEM COMMANDS

CSTART Conunand
CSTART Command

Function

The CSTART conunand begins executing the program from
the
beginning,
or from the address you specify in the command,
leaving your terminal at monitor level.
The CSTART command is
the same as the START conunand,
except that it leaves your
terminal at monitor level.
Format

CSTART addr
Where:

addr is the address at which execution is to

begin if
it is other than the location specified within the file
(.JBSA) .
If you do not specify an address,
the
starting address comes from .JBSA (stored in the job
data area) .
To use CSTART:
1.

Use LOAD or GET to bring a program into memory.

Type one or two CTRL/Cs to halt your job with
terminal at monitor level.

your

Type CSTART to begin running the program
beginning.

the

You can now type additional commands from your
terminal if they do not require core, or you can
detach your terminal from the job, using the DETACH
conunand.

from

Characteristics

Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Requires core.
Restrictions

This conunand should not be used if your program requests input
from the terminal.
This conunand is not available to batch users.
NOTE
The CSTART command allows the program to run from the
beginning or from the specified address.
If the
program requires terminal I/O, the program will wait
until you access user level with the START or CONTINUE
conunands.
Then your terminal can accept output or
provide input.

2-51

SYSTEM COMMANDS
CSTART Command
Example

This is a program to find all the numbers up to 10,000 .
. TYPE NUMBER.FOR<RET>
N = 0
100
N = N + 1
IF(N .EQ.
10000) GO TO 300
WRITE(22,201) N
GO TO 100
201
FORMAT (lX, I14, 'IS BETWEEN 1 AND 10000')
300
STOP 'DONE'
END
Execute the program .
. EXECUTE NUMBER. FOR<RET>
FORTRAN:NUMBER
NUMBER
LINK: LOADING
[LNKXCT NUMBER EXECUTION]
"C
"C
Type two CTRL/C's to halt the program.
Type CSTART .
. CSTART<RET>
Type CTRL/T for
terminal.

job

DAY:

:01:00 RD:1093 WR:21 NUMBER 4+15P RN* PC000200

:07:20 RUN:

status.

CTRL/T

does

not

echo

your

The status message RN* indicates the NUMBER program is running.
Detach from the job to do work on another job .
. DETACH<RET>
FROM JOB 19

Later, attach to your original job .
. ATTACH 19 [27,5434]<RET>
PASSWORD:<RET>

2-52

SYSTEM COMMANDS
CSTART Command

Type CONTINUE to return
NOTE) .

user

level.

System

message

(see

. CONTINUE<RET>
?PLEASE TYPE AC FIRST
Type CTRL/C and CONTINUE, to access user level .

. CONTINUE<RET>
DONE
END OF EXECUTION
CPU TIME:4:6.88

ELAPSED TIME:5:30.97

EXIT

Program message indicates execution is finished.
The file
containing data from this program is named FOR22.DAT, and is
stored in your default disk area.
NOTE
It is necessary to type CTRL/C to re-enter user level,
because the program is running.
The program must be
interrupted so that your terminal can access it.

2-53

SYSTEM COMMANDS
DAYTIME Command
DAYTIME Command

Function
The DAYTIME command prints the date and the time of day,
following format:
wkdy dd-mmm-yy hh:mm:ss
Where:

wkdy is the name of day of the week
dd is the day of the month
mmm is the name of the month
yy is the year
hh is the hour
mm is the minute
ss is the second to the nearest hundredth

Format
DAYTIME
Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Does not require LOGIN.
Does not destroy your core image.
Example
.DAYTIME<RET>
MONDAY 29-FEB-88 16:46:42

2-54

the

SYSTEM COMMANDS
DDT Command
DDT Command

Function
The DDT command starts DDT, the dynamic system debugger.
If DDT
is already loaded with your core image, DDT starts at the address
given by the right half of .JBDDT in the Job Data Area.
(The Job
Data Area stores information pertinent to your
job.
It is
described in the TOPS-IO Monitor Calls Manual.) If DDT is not yet
loaded,
the monitor tries to merge a special version of DDT
(called VMDDT)
into the address space starting at location
700000.
If DDT is not yet loaded and the monitor cannot read in VMDDT, it
prints the message:
?NO START ADDRESS.
The monitor will not
read in VMDDT if your core image is execute-only.
The DDT command copies the saved program counter value into
.JBOPC and starts the program at an alternate entry point
specified in .JBDDT (beginning address of DDT as set by the
monitor) .
DDT contains commands to allow you to start or resume
at any desired address.
If your job was executing a monitor call when interrupted
(at
monitor level and not in TTY input wait or SLEEP mode), the
monitor sets a status bit (UTRP) and continues the
job at the
location where it was interrupted.
When the monitor call
processing is complete, the monitor clears the status bit,
sets
.JBOPC to the address following the monitor call, and then traps
to the DDT address found in .JBDDT.
If your job is at monitor level and in TTY INPUT WAIT or SLEEP
mode,
the trap to the DDT address occurs immediately and .JBOPC
contains the address of the monitor call.
If your job is at user
level, the trap also occurs immediately.
Therefore, it is always
possible to continue the interrupted program after trapping to
DDT by executing a JRSTF @.JBOPC.
(For additional information on the
TOPS-IO DDT Manual.)

DDT

program,

refer

SYS:VMDDT.EXE

Format
DDT

Characteristics
Places your terminal at user level.
If .JBDDT is zero, the monitor will merge
location 700000.

2-55

the

SYSTEM COMMANDS
DDT Command
Example
The following example shows how the DEBUG and DDT commands are
used.
Begin by writing a
simple program with a
spelling
(syntactical) error .
. TYPE TEST.MAC<RET>
TITLE
TEST
SIMPLE PROGRAM
SEARCH MACTEN,UUOSYM
HIMSG:

ASCIZ

\HI THERE - THIS IS A SIMPLE TEST PROGRAM!

\
TEST:

JCLF
RESET
OUTSTR
MONRT.
END

HIMSG
TEST

Use DEBUG to compile and load the program:
.DEBUG TEST.MAC<RET>
MACRO: TEST
LINK: LOADING
?LNKUGS 1 UNDEFINED GLOBAL SYMBOL
JCLF
0
[LNKDEB DDT EXECUTION]
DDT

Loading showed that the program contained an error, which is then
corrected by using the SOS editor to replace "JCLF" with the
correct "JFCL" .
. SOS TEST.MAC<RET>
EDIT: TEST.MAC
*SJCLF<ESC>JFCL<ESC>.<ESC><RET>
600 TEST: JFCL
*ES<RET>
[DSKC:TEST.MAC]
After correcting the file,

reload the program, again using DEBUG .

. DEBUG TEST.MAC<RET>
MACRO: TEST
LINK: LOADING
[LNKDEB DDT EXECUTION]
DDT

SYSTEM COMMANDS
DDT Command
The program ran successfully.
However, when you try to run the
program again with the CONTINUE command, the command fails.
No
provision has been made for rerunning the program .
. CONTINUE<RET>
?ILLEGAL UUO AT USER PC 013303
Start the debugger, using the DDT command:
.DDT<RET>
DDT
133031 0 "
TEST+31 MONRT.<LF>
PAT .. I 0 JRST TEST<RET>
"Z
While running DDT, alter the core image of
the error was reported at address 13303
address.
Then type an uparrow (")
to see
which is the last line of program code.
«LF» to see the next line.
"PAT .. " is on
insert the call "JRST TEST," then exit DDT.
Next,

the program:
since
(octal), examine that
the previous line,
Then type a line-feed
the next line.
Here,

start the program:

. START<RET>
HI THERE - THIS IS A SIMPLE TEST PROGRAM!
Then CONTINUE the program.

The execution is successful .

. CONTINUE<RET>
HI THERE - THIS IS A SIMPLE TEST PROGRAM!
Finally, edit the file with the changes made to the core image:
.SOS TEST.MAC<RET>
EDIT:TEST.MAC
*P":*<RET>
100 TITLE TEST SIMPLE PROGRAM
200 SEARCH MACTEN,UUOSYM
300
400 HIMSG: ASCIZ \HI THERE - THIS IS A SIMPLE TEST PROGRAM!
500 \
600 TEST: JFCL
700 RESET
800 OUTSTR HIMSG
900 MONRT.
1000
1100 END TEST
*I950<RET>
950 JRST TEST
*ES<RET>
[DSKC:TEST.MAC]

2-57

SYSTEM COMMANDS
DDT Conunand

Load the program, begin execution, and rerun the program:

.LOAD TEST.MAC<RET>
LINK: LOADING
EXIT
.START<RET>
HI THERE - THIS IS A SIMPLE TEST PROGRAM!
.CONTINUE<RET>
HI THERE - THIS IS A SIMPLE TEST PROGRAM!

Execution is successful.

2-58

SYSTEM COMMANDS
DEALLOCATE Command
DEALLOCATE Command

Function
The DEALLOCATE command removes a volume set from your job's list
of allocated resources.
DEALLOCATE implies a DISMOUNT of the
specified resource.
The logical name for the volume set is
cleared,
and you will not be able to use that logical-name to
refer to the volume set.
Format
DEALLOCATE resource-name,resource-name ...
For disk volume sets, the resource-name is
set-name or the structure name.

Where:

the

volume

For tape volume sets, the resource-name is the
name ...

logical

DEALLOCATE has one switch:
/HELP

Prints a short description of the command.
If you
specify an argument with this switch, the argument will
be ignored.

Associated Commands
ALLOCATE

Informs the system of your
resource.

future

need

MOUNT

Requests ownership of a resource.

DISMOUNT

Removes the resource from your job's search
list.
Dismounts the volume set from the unit if
no other users are accessing the resource.

SHOW ALLOCATION

Prints a list of the resources
allocated and mounted for your job.

SHOW QUEUE

Prints a list of the jobs in the system queues.

that

for

are

SYSTEM COMMANDS
DEALLOCATE Command
A file structure named DSKR: is mounted for the job:
.MOUNT DSKR:<RET>
[MOUNT REQUEST DSKR QUEUED, REQUEST #673]
[STRUCTURE DSKR MOUNTED]
The job's resources are shown using the SHOW ALLOCATION command:
. SHOW ALLOCATION<RET>
ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
VOLUME SET
TYPE
RESOURCES

--------------------- -----------------

DSKB
DSKC
DSKR
TAPE-SET
TAPE-SET
TAPE-SET

9 TK 800/1600
RP06
RP20
DSKB
DSKC
DSKR
VOL1
VOL2
VOL3

------------

MAGTAPE UNIT
DISK UNIT
DISK UNIT
STRUCTURE
STRUCTURE
STRUCTURE
MAGTAPE VOL.
MAGTAPE VOL.
MAGTAPE VOL.

ALL

OWN

1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

0
2
1
1
1
1
0
0
0

The tape set is mounted, and the resources are again displayed:
.MOUNT TS<RET>
[MOUNT REQUEST TS QUEUED, REQUEST #673]
[MAGTAPE TS MOUNTED]
.SHOW ALLOCATION<RET>
ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
RESOURCES
VOLUME SET
TYPE
ALL
--------------------- ----------------- -----------9TK 800/1600
MAGTAPE UNIT 1
RP06
DISK UNIT
2
RP20
DISK UNIT
1
DSKB
DSKB
STRUCTURE
1
DSKC
DSKC
STRUCTURE
1
DSKR
DSKR
STRUCTURE
1
VOLl
TAPE-SET
MAGTAPE VOL.
1
VOL2
TAPE-SET
MAGTAPE VOL.
1
TAPE-SET
VOL3
MAGTAPE VOL.
1

OWN
1
2
1
1
1
1
1

0
0

After work is finished by accessing the tape set and the
structure,
the structure is dismounted.
Because the structure
was not explicitly allocated, it is automatically deallocated .
. DISMOUNT DSKR<RET>
[STRUCTURE DSKR DISMOUNTED]
The tape volume set is dismounted:
.DISMOUNT TS<RET>
[VOLUME SET TS DISMOUNTED]

2-60

SYSTEM COMMANDS
DEALLOCATE Command

The job's resources are displayed:
. SHOW ALLOCATION<RET>
ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
VOLUME SET
RESOURCES
TYPE
9 TK 800/1600
RP06
RP20
DSKB
DSKC
VOL1
VOL2
VOL3

ALL

OWN

MAGTAPE UNIT
DISK UNIT
DISK UNIT
STRUCTURE
STRUCTURE
MAGTAPE VOL.
MAGTAPE VOL.
MAGTAPE VOL.

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

At this point, the tape set can again be mounted, or
deallocated.
The tape set is deallocated:

can

ALL

OWN

1
1
1

DSKB
DSKC
TAPE-SET
TAPE-SET
TAPE-SET

1
1
1

o
o

.DEALLOCATE TS<RET>
[VOLUME SET TS HAS BEEN DEALLOCATED]
. SHOW ALLOCATION<RET>
ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
VOLUME SET
RESOURCES
TYPE

DSKB
DSKC

RP06
RP20
DSKB
DSKC

DISK UNIT
DISK UNIT
STRUCTURE
STRUCTURE

2-61

SYSTEM COMMANDS
DEASSIGN Command
DEASSIGN Command

Function
The DEASSIGN command returns one or more devices currently
assigned to your job to the monitor's pool of available devices
and clears the logical names associated with them.
If you are
running an assembly-language program,
and have an INITialized
device, it is not returned to the system's pool unless you have
issued a RELEASE or RESET monitor call; only the device's logical
name is cleared.

Format
DEASSIGN dev:
Where:

dev:
is either the logical or the physical device
name.
This argument is optional.
If you do not
specify this argument, the system deassigns all devices
from your
job except your job's controlling terminal.
Also, the system clears any logical name that might be
associated with the controlling terminal.

Associated Messages
If you specify a nonexistent device, the monitor prints:
?NO SUCH DEVICE
and leaves all current device assignments.
If you specify a
device that has never been ASSIGNed to your job, the monitor
prints:
?devxxn WASN'T ASSIGNED
and leaves all current job assignments.

Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Does not destroy your core image.
Requires LOGIN.

2-62

SYSTEM COMMANDS
DEASSIGN Command
Examp1e

Assign a card reader to
assigned .

your

job.

Card

reader

number

. ASSIGN CDR:<RET>
CDR261 ASSIGNED
Card reader number 1 is busy because it is assigned to your
Show the devices that are busy .

job.

. SYSTAT B<RET>
BUSY DEVICES:
DEVICE
JOB

WHY

TTY144
TTY235
LPT260
LPT261
LPT263
CDR260
CDR261

INIT
INIT
INIT
INIT
INIT
INIT
AS

18
18
18
18
18
18
24

LOGICAL

Deassign the card reader .
. DEASSIGN CDR<RET>
Again, show the busy devices .
. SYSTAT B<RET>
BUSY DEVICES:
DEVICE
JOB

WHY

18
18
18
18
18
18

INIT
INIT
INIT
INIT
INIT
INIT

TTY144
TTY235
LPT260
LPT261
LPT263
CDR260

LOGICAL

Card reader 1 is not in the list of busy devices.
is available to any user.

2-63

Therefore,

SYSTEM COMMANDS

DEBUG Command
DEBUG Command

Function
The DEBUG command compiles the specified source files, loads the
resulting
.REL files
(if necessary),
and prepares the loaded
program for debugging.
A system debugging program is loaded
first,
followed by your program, including local symbols.
Upon
completion of loading,
the system transfers control to the
debugging program.
The debugging program that is used depends on the first
file in
the command string.
If this file is a COBOL source file, COBDDT
(the COBOL debugging program) is used.
If the file is a FORTRAN
source file, FORDDT is used.
Generally, a program debugged with the DEBUG command requires
more core to execute than the same program compiled with the
EXECUTE command requires.
Extra space 1S occupied by the
debugging program and additional debugging information, such as
local symbols.
Each time the system executes a COMPILE, LOAD, EXECUTE, or DEBUG
command,
the system stores the command argument in a temporary
file.
When you issue one of these commands without arguments,
the system uses the arguments stored in the temporary file.
(Refer to Appendix C).
EXECUTE runs the COMPIL program before it
runs the appropriate compiler and debugger.
Format
DEBUG file-spec
Where:

file-spec is a single file specification or a string of
file specifications, separated by commas.

The following switches can be used to modify the command string:
Switch

Function

/ALGOL

Compiles the file with ALGOL.
Assumed
files with the extension of .ALG.

/BIN

Generates a binary file for
each
file
compiled.
The file extension of the output
file is .REL.
This is the default action.

/BLISS

Compiles the file with BLISS-IO. Assumed for
files with the extension of .BIO and .BLI.

/C68
/C74

Runs the specified COBOL version.

/COBOL

Compiles the file with COBOL.
Assumed
files with the extension of .CBL.

/COMPILE

Forces a compilation of this file even if a
binary file exists with a newer date and time
than the source file.
This switch causes an
extra compilation, because compilation is not
normally performed if the binary file is
newer than the source file.
2-64

for

SYSTEM COMMANDS

DEBUG Command
/CREF

Produces a cross-referenced listing file on
the disk for each file compiled for later
processing by the CREF program.
The file
extension of the output file is .CRF.
The
file can then be listed with the
CREF
command.
However,
with COBOL files,
the
cross-referenced listing is always appended
to the listing file.
You must issue the CREF
command to obtain the listing.

/DDT

Loads DDT and disregards the extension of the
first file in the command string.
This
switch applies to all subsequent files.

/DEBUG:
(arg f arg f • • • )

Passes the specified arguments to FORTRAN.
Refer to the TOPS-10/TOPS-20 FORTRAN Language
Manual.

/DLIST

Creates a .LST file in your disk area.
You
can list the file on the line printer with
the PRINT command.

/F10
/F40

Obsolete

/F66

Applies FORTRAN-66 rules
EXTERNAL statements.

/FOROTS
/FORSE

Obsolete

/FORTRAN

Compiles the file with a FORTRAN compiler.
Assumed for files with the extension .F4 and
.FOR and all files
with
unrecognizable
compiler
extensions,
if FORTRAN is the
standard compiler.
This switch is necessary
if the file has a unrecognizable compiler
extension and FORTRAN is not the standard
compiler or is not the current default.

/FUDGE:file

Creates a disk file containing the names of
the
.REL files produced by the command
string. When the FUDGE switch is given,
PIP
reads this file to generate a library .REL
file.
(Refer
to
the
FUDGE
command
description.)
The argument to this switch is
a valid file specification, as described in
Section 1.9.

/GFLOAT

Indicates that double-precision numbers are
to be stored in G-floating format.
This
format has an extended exponent range.
This
option is available on KL10 processors only.

/K?10

Designates the processor where the program
will execute after it has been loaded.
These
switches
are
necessary
for
FORTRAN-10
programs
because
the compiler generates
different codes for different processors.
The default is the processor where your
program is running.
The? can be replaced
by L or S.

2-65

for

loops

and

SYSTEM COMMANDS
DEBUG Conunand
/LIBRARY

Loads the file in library search mode.
This
mode causes a program file in a special
library to be loaded only if one or more of
its
declared entry symbols satisfies an
undefined global request in the source file.
The system libraries are always searched.
(See the LINK documentation.) /LIBRARY is the
same as /SEARCH.

/LINK

Obsolete

/LIST

Generates a disk listing file for each file
compiled.
The file extension of the output
file is .LST.
These files can be listed
later with the PRINT conunand.
If the line
printer is being spooled for this
job,
the
listing files are written on device LPT:
and
are automatically spooled when you log out.

/LMAP

Produces a
loader map during the loading
process that contains the local symbols.

/LOADER

Obsolete

/MACRO

Assembles the file with MACRO.
files with the .MAC extension.

/MACY11

Assembles the file with MACY11.
Assumed for
files with the .P11 extension.
This switch
is not supported.

/MANTIS

Compiles the file with the MANTIS debugging
information.
This switch affects FORTRAN-40
programs only.
This switch is not supported.

/MAP:file

Produces a loader map during loading.
The
file name can be specified.
If the file is
not specified, the default is MAP.MAP.

/NEW

Runs the appropriate language compiler from
the experimental system library (device NEW:)
area [1,5].
If the compiler does not exist
on device NEW:,
COMPIL tries to obtain it
from device SYS:.

/NOBIN

Does not generate binary files.
Binary files
are generated unless you give this switch.
This switch, when combined with the /LIST or
/CREF
switch,
is useful when compiling
programs solely for the purpose of generating
a listing.

/NOCOMPILE

Complement to the /COMPILE switch,
this
switch does not force a compilation on a
source file whose date is not as recent as
the date on the binary file.
This switch
differs from the /REL switch,
in that it
turns off all compilation, even if the source
file is newer than the .REL file.
/NOCOMPILE
is the default action.

2-66

Assumed

for

SYSTEM COMMANDS

DEBUG Command
/NODEBUG

Does not pass arguments that were
specified to FORTRAN.

previously

/NOLIST

Does not generate listing files.
default action.

This is the

/NOMANTIS

Compiles the
file
without
the
MANTIS
debugging information.
This switch affects
FORTRAN-40 programs only.
This switch is not
supported.

/NOOPTIMIZE

Does not optimize the object source code
FORTRAN programs.

/NOSEARCH

Loads all routines of the file whether the
routines are referenced or not.
Because this
is the default action, this switch is used
only
to
turn
off library search mode
(/LIBRARY) .
The /NOSEARCH default is to
search the system libraries.

/OLD

Runs the appropriate language compiler from
the system library of old programs (device
OLD:), which resides on disk area [1,3].
If
the compiler does not exist on device OLD:,
COMPIL tries to obtain it from device SYS:.

/OPTIMIZE

Optimizes the object source code for
programs.

/PAL10

Assembles the file with PALlO.
files with the .PAL extension.

Assumed

for

/PASCAL

Compiles the file with Pascal.
files with the .PAS extension.

Assumed

for

/~L

Uses the existing .~L files although
source files might be present.

/SAVE

Saves the core image of the loaded program.

/SEARCH

Loads the files in library search mode.
The
action is identical to that of the /LIBRARY
switch.

/SELF

Runs the appropriate language compiler from
device DSK:
instead of from the system
library (device SYS:).
This switch is useful
if you keep a private copy of a compiler in
your own disk area.

/SNOBOL

Compiles the file with SNOBOL.
Assumed for
files with the .SNO extension.
This switch
is not supported.

/SSAVE

Saves the core image of the loaded program in
a sharable executable file.

/SYS

Runs the appropriate language processor from
the system library
(device SYS:)
area of
[1,4].
This is the default action.

2-67

for

FORTRAN

newer

SYSTEM COMMANDS
DEBUG Command
Restriction
A language processor appearing more than once within a
single
command string cannot specify more than one disk area.
For
example, the following is invalid:
.DEBUG MAIN.MAC/SELF,PART1.MAC/OLD
However, the following is valid:
.COMPILE MAIN.MAC/SELF
.COMPILE PART1.MAC/OLD
.DEBUG /REL MAIN,PARTl
Characteristics
Places your terminal at user level.
Runs the
appropriate processor,
destroying your core image.

LINK,

and

the

debugger,

Examp1e
The following example shows how the DEBUG and DDT commands are
used.
Begin by writing a
simple program with a
spelling
(syntactical) error .
. TYPE TEST.MAC<RET>
TITLE TEST SIMPLE PROGRAM
SEARCH MACTEN,UUOSYM
HIMSG: ASCIZ \HI THERE - THIS IS A SIMPLE TEST PROGRAM!

\
TEST: JCLF
RESET
OUTSTR HIMSG
MONRT.
END TEST
Use DEBUG to compile and load the program:
.DEBUG TEST.MAC<RET>
MACRO: TEST
LINK: LOADING
?LNKUGS 1 UNDEFINED GLOBAL SYMBOL
JCLF 0
[LNKDEB DDT EXECUTION]
DDT

SYSTEM COMMANDS
DEBUG Command

After correcting the file,

reload the program, again using DEBUG .

. DEBUG TEST.MAC<RET>
MACRO: TEST
LINK: LOADING
[LNKDEB DDT EXECUTION]
DDT

"z .

The debugger successfully loaded the program;
no errors were
detected.
The new TEST.REL file automatically supersedes the old
.REL file.
Next, save the core image of the loaded program,
and
begin execution .
. SAVE TEST<RET>
TEST SAVED
.START<RET>
HI THERE - THIS IS A SIMPLE TEST PROGRAM!
The program :an successfully. However, when you try to run the
program aga1n with the CONTINUE command, the command fails.
No
provision has been made for rerunning the program .
. CONTINUE<RET>
?ILLEGAL UUO AT USER PC 013303
Start the debugger, using the DDT command:
.DDT<RET>
DDT
133031 0 "
TEST+31 MONRT.<LF>

PAT .

. 1 0 JRST TEST<RET>

While running DDT, alter the core image of the program:
since
the error was reported at address 13303 (octal), examine that
address.
Then type an uparrow (")
to see the previous line,
which is the last line of program code.
Then type a line-feed
«LF» to see the next line.
"PAT .. " is on the next line.
Here,
insert the call "JRST TEST," then exit DDT.
Next, START the program:
.START<RET>
HI THERE - THIS IS A SIMPLE TEST PROGRAM!
Then CONTINUE the program.

The execution is successful .

. CONTINUE<RET>
HI THERE - THIS IS A SIMPLE TEST PROGRAM!

2-69

SYSTEM COMMANDS
DEBUG Corrunand

Finally, edit the file with the changes made to the core image:
.SOS TEST.MAC<RET>
EDIT:TEST.MAC
*p .... : *<RET>
100 TITLE TEST SIMPLE PROGRAM
200 SEARCH MACTEN,UUOSYM
300
400 HIMSG: ASCIZ \HI THERE - THIS IS A SIMPLE TEST PROGRAM!
500 \
600 TEST: JFCL
700 RESET
800 OUTSTR HIMSG
900 MONRT.
1000
TEST
1100 END
*I950<RET>
950 JRST TEST
*ES<RET>
[DSKC:TEST.MAC]

Load the program, begin execution, and run the program again:
.LOAD TEST.MAC<RET>
LINK: LOADING
EXIT
.START<RET>
HI THERE - THIS IS A SIMPLE TEST PROGRAM!
.CONTINUE<RET>
HI THERE - THIS IS A SIMPLE TEST PROGRAM!

Execution is successful.

2-70

SYSTEM COMMANDS
DECLARE Command
DECLARE Command

Function

The DECLARE command defines new monitor commands to run specified
programs for your job.
You can invoke any program with a
user-defined command. When you define a command,
the monitor
searches your command table and then the monitor command table.
Exact definitions are given precedence.
An
exact definition
occurs if you type the complete, exact command name.
Inexact
definitions occur when a command is abbreviated.
If there are
conflicts within the exact definitions,
your definitions are
given precedence.
To use abbreviations when typing a command,
you can define
"uniqueness" for a command.
The monitor will behave as if the
command had been given an exact definition.
If conflicts arise,
the monitor searches its own command table without searching your
command table.
Format

DECLARE name/switch=filespec
Where:

name is a
characters.

command

name

alphanumeric

fi1espec is the complete file
specification of
executable program.
There is no default filespec.

/switch is one of the optional switches listed below.

Switches allowed by this command are:
Function

Switch

/AUTOPUSH

Defines a command to automatically PUSH to a new,
temporary context,
in which the called program
will run.
When the program is completed,
the
original context is restored, and the temporary
context is destroyed.
NOTE
Do not define the PATH or DECLARE programs
with the AUTOPUSH switch.
This is because
the original context is restored and all
changes made in the temporary context are
destroyed when they finish running.

/CLEAR

Clears all user-defined commands.
a command name with this switch.

/KILL

Removes the definition of a command.
command name.

/LIST

Lists the command names currently defined by your
job.
Do not include a command name with this
switch.

2-71

Do not

include

Requires

SYSTEM COMMANDS
DECLARE Command

/UNIQUE:n

Defines the number of characters in the command
that must be typed to be interpreted as your
definition and that cannot be overridden by a
monitor command.
The variable n can be 1, 2, 3,
4, ALL, NONE, or a list of these values separated
by commas and enclosed in parentheses.
/NOUNIQUE
is the same as /UNIQUE:NONE.

Characteristics

Requires LOGIN.
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Destroys your core image.
Example

Use DECLARE to define a command, LOOK, to run the SETSRC program .
. DECLARE LOOK=SYS:SETSRC.EXE<RET>
Use DECLARE to display your job's command list.
Other
in the following example were defined previously .

commands

. DECLARE/LIST<RET>
EDIT DSR

TAPE LOOK

Use the new command.
Use CTRL/T to display the current state of
your job,
including the name of the program that is running.
Note that, although CTRL/T is shown here, it does not echo on
your terminal .
. LOOK<RET>
*<CTRL/T>
Day:
1:02:23 Run:
0.13 Rd:32 Wr:O SETSRC 4+0P Tl PC:002030
Input wait for TTY52:
<CTRL/Z>
EXIT

2-72

SYSTEM COMMANDS
DELETE Command
DELETE Command

Function
The DELETE command deletes files.
Because of protection codes
associated with files, it is not usually possible to delete files
in another user's directory.
Once a file is deleted,
it cannot
be recovered.
Format
DELETE file-spec
Where:

file-spec is a single file specification or a string of
file specifications,
separated by commas.
The full
wildcard construction (* and ?) can be used in the file
specification.
(Refer to Section 1.11.)
If you do not specify a device name or a file structure
name,
your job's search list is used.
You can specify
a directory name before the file names and that
directory becomes the default for all subsequent files
in that command line.
If you specify a directory name
after a
file name, the directory applies only to that
file.

Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Runs the PIP program.
Requires LOGIN.
Permanently deletes the file(s).
Destroys your core image.
Examples
1.

Delete all files with .MAC extension .
. DELETE *.MAC<RET>
FILES DELETED:
DSKB:TI.MAC
DSKB:T2.MAC
DSKB:T3.MAC
14 BLOCKS FREED

Delete the file TEST.FOR .
. DELETE DSKC:TEST.FOR<RET>
FILES DELETED:
DSKC:TEST.FOR
3 BLOCKS FREED

2-73

SYSTEM COMMANDS
DELETE Corrunand

Delete all files with the file name TEST followed by
alphanumeric characters or less, and the extension .FOR .
. DELETE TEST??FOR<RET>
FILES DELETED:
DSKB:TESTl.FOR
DSKB:TEST2.FOR
DSKB:TEST22.FOR
DSKB:TESTER.FOR
23 BLOCKS FREED

2-74

SYSTEM COMMANDS
DEPOSIT Conunand
DEPOSIT Command

Function

The DEPOSIT conunand deposits information in your core area
(high
or low segment).
This function is useful for debugging programs.
Format

D Ih rh addr
Where:

lh is the octal value to be deposited in the left
of the location.
This argument is required.

half

rh is the octal value to be deposited in the right half

of the location.

This argument is required.

addr is the address of

the location into which the
is to be deposited.
This argument is
option~l.
If you omit the address, the system deposits
the data into the location following the address you
specified in the last D conunand or into the location
you looked at with your last E conunand.
The conunand
used is the one specified most recently.
information

Characteristics

Requires LOGIN.
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Requires core.
Example

Deposit in location 141 .
. D 266000 2616 141<RET>
Examine location 140 .
. E 140<RET>
000140/ 265720 40011
Because the address is omitted,
the deposit made is
location of the last E conunand (that is, location 140) .
. D 47000 l<RET>
Examine the location specified in the previous D conunand .
. E<RET>
000140/ 047000 000001

2-75

the

SYSTEM COMMANDS

DETACH Command
DETACH Command

Function
The DETACH command disconnects the terminal from your job without
changing the status of your job.
Your terminal is then free, so
that you can start a new job, attach to another detached job,
or
cause your terminal to become a slave terminal for another job.
Format
DETACH
Characteristics
Detaches your terminal.
Does not destroy your core image.
Requires LOGIN.
Restrictions
This command is not available to batch users.
Example

Show the status of your job .
. SYSTAT .<RET>
27,5434
TTY263

SYSTAT

System message shows that
Detach your terminal .

6+7

your

"'C

terminal

. DETACH<RET>
FROM JOB 24

Show the status of your job .
. SYSTAT .<RET>
1
27,5434
DET

SYSTAT

6+7

"'C

System message shows your job is detached.

2-76

line

number

263.

SYSTEM COMMANDS
DIRECTORY Command
DIRECTORY Command

Function

The DIRECTORY command prints a list of the file names in a
specified directory area.
The standard output consists of the
following i~formation:
file name, file name extension, length of
the file ~n blocks,
protection code,
creation date, version
number, account, structure name, and directory name.
Format

DIRECTORY output file-spec=input file-spec
Where:

input file-spec is a single file
specification,
or a
string of file specifications separated by commas or
plus signs.
The devices used on input can be DSK:,
DTA:,
or MTA:
If the device is a magnetic tape, the
tape is rewound before and after the listing operation
and analyzed to determine if it is a BACKUP tape.
The
default input specification is DSK:*.*, and the files
in all file structures defined by your job's search
list are listed.
Generally, a device name,
file name
extension,
or a directory name that precedes the file
name becomes the default for all succeeding files in
the list.
output file-spec = This argument and the equal sign are
optional.
If you omit the entire output specification,
the default is TTY:.
If you do not specify an output
device,
the default device is DSK:.
If you do not
specify an output file name, and one is needed,
the
file name is generated from the time of day as hhmmss.
The default output extension is .DIR.

The full wildcard construction (* and/or ?) can be used in the
input file-spec.
When a wildcard designation is used, DIRECTORY
limits its search for the file to certain directories.
When you
give a wildcard designation for a file name or extension, the
program only searches the specified directory or your default
directory.
No additional devices, such as LIB:
or SYS:, which
might be in your default path, are searched.
(Refer to Section
1.14,
and to the PATH monitor call description in the TOPS-10
Monitor Calls Manual, for information about directory paths.)
If you use the wildcard construction in the directory name,
only
the
directories
implied by the wildcard construction are
searched. No additional directories are searched.
The following switches can be used in the command string.
Generally,
any switches can be used together in the same command
string, unless the switches contradict one another.
Switches
that precede the file name become the default for all succeeding
files in the same command line.
You can abbreviate switches as long as the result is unique.
This is not recommended for batch control files.
Spaces are not
permitted within a switch.

2-77

SYSTEM COMMANDS
DIRECTORY Command
Function

Switch
/ACCESS:n

Updates the access date of any file of n
blocks or less to the current date.
Because
some installations delete files that have not
been recently accessed,
this switch allows
you to prevent such deletion by updating the
files.
n is a decimal number, and refers to
the number of blocks written in the file
unless the /ALLOC switch is also used.
If
you omit the /ACCESS switch, the system does
not change the date.
If you specify /ACCESS
but you omit :n, 5 is assumed.

/ACCOUNT

Prints the account name associated with that
file.
The account you are logged in under is
stored in the RIB of all files
created or
superseded.

/ALLOCATED

Lists the allocated length of the
file
instead of the written length.
Space on a
structure is sometimes allocated in units of
more
than
one
block
for
efficiency.
Therefore, the number of blocks allocated to
a
file can be greater than the number of
blocks actually written.
The LOGOUT program
uses
the allocated length when checking
quotas.
The total allocated length of all
files is the same as the length output by the
QUOLST program under
the
USED
column.
Normally,
when a file is created, the system
allocates 30 blocks for it.
Then the system
deallocates unused blocks after file creation
is complete.
This switch is the complement
to the /WRITTEN switch.

/ANYDEVICE

Searches all devices.

/AUTHOR

Prints the project-programmer number
author of the file.

/BEFORE:date-time

Lists those
files
created
before
the
specified
date
and
time.
Default is
+infinity.
Refer to Section 1.8.3.

/BLOCKS

Prints the length of the file in blocks.
This is the default.
Complement to /WORDS.

/CHECKSUM

Computes and prints an l8-bit checksum for
each file.
This checksum is computed by
rotating the result to the left one bit
before
adding each word.
Complement to
/NOCHECKSUM.

/COMPARE

Suppresses headers and titles,
as well as
error messages in the output.
This makes the
output file suitable for comparison with
another
file
(with FILCOM).
Default is
/NOCOMPARE.

2-78

the

SYSTEM COMMANDS
DIRECTORY Command
/DENSITY:n

Uses the-specified density when reading a
magnetic tape.
n is 200, 556, 800, 1600, or
6250 bpi.
The default depends on
your
installation.
You can change the default
with the SET DENSITY command.

/DETAIL

Prints all available information
file.
The information includes:

about

The full file specification for the file.
The access date.
The time and date of creation.
The access protection code associated with
the file.
The data mode that the file is written in.
The estimated length of the file.
The blocks allocated for the file.
The data block in the directory in which the
file is located.
The internal date and time of creation.
The RIB block number.
All numbers that are followed by a decimal
point are decimal values; all other numbers
are octal.
The project-programmer number
associated with the file is printed only if
it is not the same as that of the user who
issued the DIRECTORY command.
This

the

/DIRECT

Provides ASCII-formatted output.
default.
Complement to /NODIRECT.

/DSKONLY

Searches all disk devices.

/DTA

Lists the directory in old DECtape form.

/EOTS

Stops at the logical end of tape
(two
consecutive
tape
marks)
when reading a
default.
magnetic tape.
This
is
the
Complement to /NOEOTS.

/ERLOG

Enables automatic device
Complement
to
/NOERLOG.
default.

/FAST

Lists short form of directory:
file name,
extension,
structure name,
and directory
name.
Abbreviated to /F.
Complement to
/NORMAL and /SLOW~

/FILES:n

Stops after n files when reading a magnetic
tape.
If you specify /FILES but you omit :n,
5 is assumed.
When the system reaches the
logical EOT, it will stop reading the tape.

/FIND

Looks for the Find Files for the directory
listing rather than the devices. A Find File
is the binary output of a directory listing,
and is created with the /FNDBLD switch.
/FIND
looks
for
the
Find
File
in
SYS:FNDDAT.FDF or
.FPF.
You can use the
/FNDDAT switch to specify the file name of
the Find File.
2-79

error
/ERLOG

logging.
is the

SYSTEM COMMANDS
DIRECTORY Command
/FLSDIR

Prints each file's device and directory to
the right of the first line of output for
each directory.
Complement to /NOFLSDIR, the
default is /FLSDIR, unless /HDSDIR or /WIDTH
is specified.

/FNDBLD

Creates Find Files from the DIRECTORY output.
A Find File is the binary output from a
Find Files are useful for
DIRECTORY listing.
archiving and retrieving files on magnetic
tape.
The file name of the Find File is that
specified in the output specification of the
command format.
If you do not specify the
output
file
name,
the
default
is
DSK:FNDDAT.FDF or .FPF.
The files can later
be accessed with the /FIND switch.
The
complement
to
/FDNBLD
is
/NOFDNBLD.
/NOFNDBLD is the default.

/FNDDAT:file

Specifies the file name of the Find Files to
be read for the directory listing.
A Find
File is the binary output for a directory
listing,
and is created with the /FNDBLD
switch.
You must use the /FIND switch with
the /FNDDAT switch.

/HDSDIR

Prints the device and directory information
of the file as a
separate header line,
immediately preceding the directory listing
for
each
directory.
Complementary
to
/FLSDIR.
The default is /NOHDSDIR,
unless
/WIDTH and /NOFLSDIR are specified.

/HELP:arg

Prints DIRECTORY help text on your terminal.
/HELP
can be abbreviated to /H.
Valid
arguments are:
TEXT, KEYWORDS, and SWITCHES.
TEXT is the default argument; it prints the
entire
DIRECT.HLP
file.
The
KEYWORDS
argument
(K)
lists and describes all LOGIN
switches which
take
keyword
arguments.
SNITCHES
(S)
briefly lists all DIRECTORY
switches without explanations.
Switches that
have
a
single-letter
abbreviation
are
prefixed with an asterisk.

/INDIRECT

Creates the output listing file in a
format
suitable for use as a
command file to be
input to other programs.

/LENGTH:n:m

Processes only files whose length is
nand m blocks.

/LIST

Queues
the
output
to
device
LPT:.
Abbreviated to /L.
Refer to the LIST command
for restrictions on this switch.

/MARKS

Indicates each tape mark and UFD when reading
a magnetic tape.
Complement of /NOMARKS.

/MVOLUME

Nhen reading BACKUP and DUMPER
magnetic
tapes,
asks the user to mount another reel
when the end of tape is encountered in the
middle
of
a
save set.
Complement to
/NOMVOLUME, the default is /NOMVOLUME.
2-80

between

SYSTEM COMMANDS
DIRECTORY Command
/NOAUTHOR

Does not print the project-programmer number
of the author of the file.
This is the
default.
Complement to /AUTHOR.

/NOCHECKSUM

Does not compute and print the checksum.
This
is
the
default.
Complement
of
/CHECKSUM.

/NOCOMPARE

Prints the normal headers, titles, and error
messages.
Complement
to
/COMPARE,
the
default is /NOCOMPARE.

/NODETAIL

Does not print the words in the LOOKUP block.
This is the default.
Complement to /DETAIL.

/NODlRECT

Does not print
Complement
to
/DlRECT.

/NOEOTS

Does not stop at the logical end of tape when
reading
a magnetic tape.
Complement to
/EOTS.

/NOERLOG

Does not enable automatic
logging.
/ERLOG
is
the
/NOERLOG, and the default.

/NOFIND

Does not look for Find Files for the output.
Complement to /FIND, the default is /NOFIND.

/NOFLSDIR

Does not print each file's
device
and
directory to the right of the first line for
each
directory
listed.
Complement
to
/FLSDIR;
the default is /FLSDIR,
unless
/HDSDIR or /WIDTH is specified.

/NOFNDBLD

Does not make a Find File from the output.
Complement
to
/FNDBLD;
the default is
/NOFNDBLD.

/NOHDSDIR

Does not print the device and directory as a
header for each directory listed.
Complement
to /HDSDIR, the default is /NOHDSDIR,
unless
/WIDTH is specified.

/NOINDlRECT

Does not format the output listing so that it
can
be
used
as
input to a program.
Complement to /INDlRECT,
the default
is
/NOINDlRECT.

/NOMARKS

Does not indicate each tape mark and UFD when
reading
a
magnetic tape.
This is the
default.
Complement to /MARKS.

/NOMVOLUME

When using BACKUP or DUMPER, does not ask the
user to mount another magnetic tape when the
end·of tape comes in the middle of a
save
set.
Complement to /MVOLUME, the default is
/NOMVOLUME.

/NOPRDEVICE

Does not print the device
to /PRDEVICE.

2-81

the normal ASCII listing.
/DlRECT,
the default is

device
error
compliment to

name.

Complement

SYSTEM COMMANDS
DIRECTORY Command
/NOPRDIRECTORY

Does not print the directory.
/PRDIRECTORY.

Complement

/NOPRVERSION

Suppresses printing the version number of the
files.
The normal listing prints the version
number only if it is not zero.
Complement to
/PRVERSION.

/NORETRY

Disables automatic error retry when reading a
file.
Generates error messages for soft
errors.
Complement to /RETRY, the default is
/RETRY.

/NOREWIND

Does not rewind the tape before and after
reading
a magnetic tape.
Complement to
/REWIND.

/NORMAL

Prints the normal directory list.
This list
includes the file name, extension, length in
blocks written,
protection,
creation date,
structure name, nonzero version numbers, and
directory name.
Complement to /FAST and
/SLOW.
This is the default.
Use this switch
to override a
/FAST or /SLOW
in
your
SWITCH.INI file.

/NOSORT

Does not produce a file suitable for sorting.
This is the default.
Complement to /SORT.

/NOSUMMARY

Does not
default.

/NOTITLE

Does not print page headers.
This is the
default
for
output
to
the
terminal.
Complement to /TITLE.

/NOUNITS

Does not list the name of the actual disk
unit; instead, just lists the structure name.
'l'his is the default.
Complement to /UNITS.

/OKNONE

Suppresses the error message if
match the wildcard construction.

/OPTION:name

Reads your option file (DSK:SWITCH.INI[,]) to
determine your specified switch defaults for
DIRECT.
The name appearing as the value of
the switch is the pointer to the line to read
in the file.
For example,
if the file
contains the line:

use summary mode.
This
Complement to /SUMMARY.

the

files

DIRECT:ALL/DETAIL
then you reference this line
conunand:

typing

the

DIRECT/OPTION:ALL
Refer
to
Appendix
information.
/PARITY:ODD
/PARITY: EVEN

for

additional

Specifies the parity to be used when reading
a magnetic tape.
The default is :000.

2-82

SYSTEM COMMANDS
DIRECTORY Command
/PHYSICAL

Ignores logical names.
Refer to Section
1.9.1 for a description of logical names.

/PRDEVICE

Prints the name of the device for each file.

/PRDIRECTORY

Prints the name of
file.

/PROTECTION:nnn

Gives the output file the protection nnn
(octal) .
Protection codes are discussed in
Section 1.9.4.

/PRVERSION

Prints the version of each file.
If you do
not specify this switch, the default is to
print the version only if it is not zero.
The complement is /NOPRVERSION.

/RETRY

Enables automatic error retry when reading a
file.
Complement to /NORETRY, the default is
/RETRY.

/REWIND

Rewinds the magnetic tape before
reading it.
This is the default.
to /NOREWIND.

/RUN:file-spec

Runs the specified program when this
is finished.

/RUNOFFSET:n

Runs the program specified with /RUN with an
offset of n.
If you omit the switch, the
default is 0; if you omit the value,
the
default is 1.

/SINCE:date-time

Lists only those files created after the
specified date and time.
The default is
January 1, 1964.
Refer to Section 1.8.3.

/SLOW

Prints a full listing that includes the file
11ame,
extension,
length in blocks written,
protection, access date,
creation time and
date,
structure name,
and directory name.
Equivalent to Is.
Complement to /FAST and
/NORMAL.
(Disk and magnetic tape only.)

/SORT

Lists the file structure name and directory
name for each file.
The file structure name
is output for every file if you do not
specify a file structure name in the command
string or if you specify generic DSK:.
The
wildcard
construction
is
used
in the
directory name.
TABs are space-filled to
maintain a constant number of characters in
any given line.
Project-programmer numbers
include leading zeros;
the date is in ANSI
format:
19721009 for Oct 9, 1972.
Use this
switch to prepare a file to be sorted by the
SORT program.
(See the COBOL documentation.)
Complement to /NOSORT.

/SUMMARY

Prints only the summary line that indicates
the total number of blocks and files.
A
/FAST/SUMMARY prints a /FAST listing followed
by the summary.
2-83

the

directory

for

each

and after
Complement
command

SYSTEM COMMANDS

DIRECTORY Command
/TITLE

Causes a heading to be output on each page
consisting of a label for each column, date,
time, and page number.
Standard output to
the
line
printer
has
this
heading.
Complement to /NOTITLE.

/TMPCOR

Lists the directory in old TMPCOR format.

/UNITS

Lists the name of the actual disk unit on
which the files are stored instead of the
file structure name.
Complement to /NOUNITS.

/WIDTH:n

Prints several entries on a single line to
make the output appear in columns.
The
default for n is the terminal carriage width.
(See the SET TTY WIDTH command.)

/WORDS

Prints the length of the file in words
instead of blocks. Complement to /BLOCKS.

/WRITTEN

Prints the written length of the file rather
than the allocated length.
This is the
default.
Complement to /ALLOCATED.

Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Destroys your core image.
Examples
1.

List all files on DSKB: .
. DIRECT DSKB:<RET>
FILE
SWITCH
PROG

DAT
INI
MAC

220 <055> dd-mrrun-yy 31 (225) DSKB:
10 <057> dd-mrrun-yy
5 <055> dd-mrrun-yy

[27,5055]

List all files with extension .MAC in all file structures
your job's search list .

. DIRECT *.MAC<RET>
PROG MAC
FILE MAC

5 <057> dd-mrrun-yy 31(225) DSKB: [27,5055]
1 <055> dd-mrrun-yy 30(201) DSKC: [27,5055]

List the directory entry for the file TEST.F4
[27,4072] .

. DIR TEST.F4[27,4072]<RET>
TEST F4

6 <055> dd-mrrun-yy 31(225) DSKC: [27,4072]

2-84

user

area

SYSTEM COMMANDS
DIRECTORY Command

List all files in sub-file directory WIZZER.SFD in the
area on BLKT: .

[7,2]

. DIR BLKT: [7,2,WIZZER]<RET>
ATTA
NEW
ALGOL

TST
ALG
DOC

1 <055> dd-mmm-yy BLKT: [7,2,WIZZER]
4 <055> dd-mmm-yy
20 <055> dd-mmm-yy

Show the switches to the DIRECT command.
.DIRECT/HELP:SWITCHES<RET>
DIRECT switches are:
ACCESS,
DIRECT,
FLSDIR,
MVOLUM,
SBRMSG,
*WIDTH,

ACCOUN,
DTA,
FNDBLD,
*NORMA,
*SLOW,
WORDS,

*ALLOC,
EOTS,
FNDDAT,
PRDEVI,
SORT,
WRITTE

Standard switches are:
ABEFOR, ALLOCA, ANYDEV,
BINARY, BLOCKS, BYTESI,
DENSIT, DSKONL, ERNONE,
FRAMES,
EXIT,
FIXED,
MACYll, MECYll,
LIB,
OKPROT, OKSUPE, OKUID,
PROTEC, PSINCE,
PRINT,
RUNCOR, RUNOFF, SCERRO,
TMPFIL,
TELL,
SYS,

AUTHOR, CHECKS, COMPAR,
ERLOG,
*FAST,
FILES,
HDSDIR, *INDIR, *LIST,
PRDIRE, PRVERS, RETRY,
SUMMAR, TITLES, TMPCOR,

DETAIL,
FIND,
MARKS,
REWIND,
UNITS,

APPEND,
BUFFER,
ERPROT,
*HELP,
MESSAG,
OPTION,
QUERY,
SCWILD,
VARIAB,

BEFORE,
DELETE,
ESTIMA,
LENGTH,
OKNONE,
PHYSIC,
RUN,
SUBMIT,

ASCII,
CONTIG,
ERSUPE,
IMAGE,
NEW,
PARITY,
RECSIZ,
SINCE,
VERSIO

ASINCE,
DATAMO,
ERUID,
IOMODE,
NOOPTI,
PBEFOR,
RECFOR,
STRS,

Create an output listing file in a format suitable for
to other programs .
. DIRECT OUT.FIL/INDIRECT=*.TXT
Total of 10 files
.TYPE OUT.FIL
DSKB:MAIL.TXT[10,5763]
DSKB:OPRGD.TXT[10,5763]
DSKB:MCO.TXT[10,5763]
DSKB:RDH.TXT[10,5763]
DSKB:MSRDH.TXT[10,5763]
DSKB:MSDPM.TXT[10,5763]
DSKB:INITIA.TXT[10,5763]
DSKB:STEVS.TXT[10,5763]
DSKB:SPIDER.TXT[10,5763]
DSKB:BARRY2.TXT[10,5763]

2-85

input

SYSTEM COMMANDS
DISABLE Conunand
DISABLE Command

Function
The DISABLE conunand disables the POKE, SPY, and other privileged
monitor calls that were enabled when you first logged in or when
you used the ENABLE conunand. When you log in,
your privileges,
if any, are enabled by default.
Format
DISABLE
Characteristics
Does not destroy your core image.
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Does not change privileges associated with being [1,2] or on
the operator's terminal.
Requires LOGIN.
Examp1e

Run FILDDT .
. R FILDDT<RET>
Look at monitor
address 41.
FILE:
41/

memory.

Privileges

are

required

examine

/M<RET>
JSR 3600

The contents of 41 are shown, indicating your job has
enabled.
Disable the privileges:

privileges

.DISABLE<RET>
Run FILDDT .
. R FILDDT<RET>
When you attempt to examine address
revealed.
0 is printed.
FILE:
41/
"C

/M<RET>

2-86

41,

the

contents

are

not

SYSTEM COMMANDS
DISABLE Command

Enable your privileges .
. ENABLE<RET>
Again, examine memory with FILDDT.
been reinstated .
. R FILDDT<RET>
FILE:
/M<RET>
41/
JSR 3600
"C

2-87

Your

job's

privileges

have

SYSTEM COMMANDS

DISMOUNT Command
DISMOUNT Command

Function
The DISMOUNT conunand relinquishes ownership of a device.
It does
not affect your allocation requests,
if you have used the
ALLOCATE conunand, and you can MOUNT the device again.
Once you
have dismounted a volume set, the device is available to other
users.
However, if the resource was not allocated with the
ALLOCATE conunand DISMOUNT performs an implicit DEALLOCATE.
If you used the ALLOCATE conunand for the resource, the DISMOUNTed
resource remains in an allocated state until you issue the
DEALLOCATE conunand.
Once you have dismounted a volume set,
your
programs can no longer reference the resource by the logical name
except with the MOUNT and DEALLOCATE conunands.
Format
DISMOUNT resource-name/switch, resource-name/switch, ...
Where:

For disk volume sets, the resource-name is
set-name or the logical name.

the

volume

For tape volume sets, the resource-name is the
name.

logical

You can use the following switches in the conunand string:
Function

Switch
/HELP

Prints a short description of the conunand.
If you
specify any resource names with this switch, they
will be ignored.

/NONOTIFY

Does not set the system to notify your job when
the dismount is complete.
This is the default
function if you have not specified /NOWAIT.

/NOTIFY

Sets the system to notify your job when the
dismount is complete.
If you specify /NOWAIT,
this is the default function.

/NOWAIT

Allows your job to return to monitor level before
the dismount is complete.
This implies /NOTIFY.

/REMOVE

Removes the specified file structure from your
job's search list.
If no other jobs are accessing
the structure,
and if it is not
a
system
structure, the operator physically dismounts it.

/WAIT

Holds your job until the dismount
This is the default function.

2-88

complete.

SYSTEM COMMANDS
DISMOUNT Command
Associated Commands

ALLOCATE

Informs the system of your
resou.rce.

DEALLOCATE

Removes the resource from your job's list of
allocated resources.
If the resource has not
been dismounted, DEALLOCATE dismounts it.

MOUNT

Requests ownership of the resource(s) .

SHOW ALLOCATION

Prints a list of the resources
allocated and mounted for your job.

that

SHOW QUEUE

Prints a list of
queues.

the

future

requests

need

for

are
system

Characteristics

Runs the QUEUE program.
Destroys your core image.
Requires LOGIN.
Examples

The following example shows the use of the
ALLOCATE,
MOUNT,
DISMOUNT,
and SHOW ALLOCATION commands.
DEALLOCATE,
The resources are reserved for a multivolume tape volume set
with the ALLOCATE command.
The name of the volume set is
TAPE-SET, and it contains three volumes.
The logical name TS
is assigned to the tape set.
The tape is write enabled, and
it does not have standard labels .
. ALLOCATE TAPE-SET (VOL1,VOL2,VOL3) : TS/WRITE-ENABLE
/LABEL:NONE<RET>
[ALLOCATE REQUEST TS QUEUED, REQUESTS #672]
A file structure named DSKR: is mounted for the job:
.MOUNT DSKR:<RET>
[MOUNT REQUEST DSKR QUEUED, REQUEST #673]
[STRUCTURE DSKR tJ10UNTED]
The job's resources are displayed using the
command:

SHOW

ALLOCATION

. SHOW ALLOCATION<RET>
ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
VOLUME SET
RESOURCES
TYPE

-------------------- -----------------

DSKB
DSKC
DSKR
TAPE-SET
TAPE-SET
TAPE-SET

9 TK 800/1600
RP06
RP20
DSKB
DSKC
DSKR
VOL1
VOL2
VOL3

2-89

------------

MAGTAPE UNIT
DISK UNIT
DISK UNIT
STRUCTURE
STRUCTURE
STRUCTURE
MAGTAPE VOL.
MAGTAPE VOL.
MAGTAPE VOL.

ALL

OWN

1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

0
2
1
1
1
1
0
0
0

SYSTEM COMMANDS
DISMOUNT Command

The tape set
displayed:

mounted,

and

the

resources

are

again

.MOUNT TS<RET>
[MOUNT REQUEST TS QUEUED, REQUEST #673]
[MAGTAPE TS MOUNTED]
.SHOW ALLOCATION<RET>
ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
TYPE
RESOURCES
VOLUME SET

-------------------- -----------------

DSKB
DSKC
DSKR
TAPE-SET
TAPE-SET
TAPE-SET

9TK 800/1600
RP06
RP20
DSKB
DSKC
DSKR
VOL1
VOL2
VOL3

------------

MAGTAPE UNIT
DISK UNIT
DISK UNIT
STRUCTURE
STRUCTURE
STRUCTURE
MAGTAPE VOL.
MAGTAPE VOL.
MAGTAPE VOL.

ALL

OWN

1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

1
2
1
1
1
1
1
0
0

After work with the tape set and the structure is finished,
the structure is dismounted.
Because the structure was not
explicitly allocated, it is automatically deallocated .
. DEALLOCATE DSKR<RET>
[STRUCTURE DSKR DISMOUNTED]
The tape volume set is dismounted:
.DISMOUNT TS<RET>
[VOLUME SET TS DISMOUNTED]
The job's resources are displayed:
. SHOW ALLOCATION<RET>
ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
VOLUME SET
TYPE
RESOURCES
ALL
----------------- -----------9 TK 800/1600
MAGTAPE UNIT 1
RP06
DISK UNIT
1
RP20
DISK UNIT
1
DSKB
DSKB
STRUCTURE
1
DSKC
DSKC
STRUCTURE
1
TAPE-SET
VaLl
MAGTAPE VOL.
1
TAPE-SET
VOL2
MAGTAPE VOL.
1
TAPE-SET
VOL3
MAGTAPE VOL.
1

--------------------

2-90

OWN
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0

SYSTEM COMMANDS
DISMOUNT Command

At this point, the tape set can again be mounted, or
be deallocated.
The tape set is deallocated:

can

ALL

OWN

1
1

.DEALLOCATE TS<RET>
[VOLUME SET TS HAS BEEN DEALLOCATED]
.SHOW ALLOCATION<RET>
ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
VOLUME SET
RESOURCES
TYPE
RP06
RP20

DSKB
DSKC

DISK UNIT
DISK UNIT
STRUCTURE
STRUCTURE

In this example, you knew that the job was the only one using
the structure BLKJ:
and included a /REMOVE switch, so that
the operator would remove the disk pack from the drive.
The
message "BLKJ DISMOUNTED" means that BLKJ:
is no longer in
your search list, and that a request has been queued to the
operator to remove the pack from the drive.
The message does
not mean that BLKJ has already been physically removed.
Because this command implies /NOWAIT, you will not receive
notification of the physical removal of the disk pack .
. DISMOUNT BLKJ/REMOVE<RET>
[BLKJ DISMOUNTED]

The following DISMOUNT/WAIT command causes the job to suspend
further processing until all pending dismount requests from
it have been completed.
There were no pending dismount
requests from this job, so the job returns to monitor level
immediately .
. DISMOUNT/WAIT<RET>
NONE PENDING FOR YOUR JOB

2-91

SYSTEM COMMANDS

DSK Command
DSK Command

Function
The DSK command prints disk usage figures for all disk I/O
performed since the last DSK command,
followed by the total
amount of disk I/O performed since the job was started.
Disk
usage is printed in the following format:
RD,WT=i,j
RD,WT=m,n
Where:

i and j are the incremental number of 128-word
read and written since the last DSK command.

m and n are the total number of 128-word
and written since the job started.

blocks

read

NOTE
i and j are kept modulo 4096.
If y~u enabled
automatic READ or WRITE output, uSlng the SET
WATCH command,
i
and j
are usually zero,
because SET WATCH resets these values.
CTRL/T
also resets these values.
Format
DSK job
Where:

job is the number of the job for which you want the
disk usage.
This argument is optional.
If you include
the job number in the command string,
only the total
statistics (m and n above) are printed.
If the job-number is omitted,
the
disk usage figures for your job.

Characteristics
Requires LOGIN.
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Does not destroy your core image.
Example
Print the disk usage values for your job .
. DSK<RET>
RD,WT=5,10
RD,WT=474,12
Print the total disk usage values for job 50 .
. DSK 50<RET>
RD,WT=474,12

2-92

system

prints

the

SYSTEM COMMANDS
ENABLE Command
ENABLE Command

Function

If you are not a privileged user, this command has no effect.
However,
if you are a privileged user (that is, you have the
privilege word set in ACTDAE.SYS) you can turn your privileges
off with the DISABLE command, and you can turn your privileges on
with the ENABLE
command.
Your
privileges
are
enabled
automatically when you log in.
Privileges allow you to use
privileged monitor calls such as POKE and SPY.
Format

ENABLE
Characteristics

Does not destroy your core image.
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Does not affect privileges associated with [1,2] or with being on
the operator's terminal (OPR:).
Examp1e

Run FILDDT.
Look at memory area.
Examine
Privileges are required to examine this location .

address

41.

. R FILDDT<RET>
FILE:
/M<RET>
41/
JSR 3600
"'C

Disable your privileges:
.DISABLE<RET>
Run FILDDT.
Examine 41.
Your
privileges
are
disabled;
therefore, 0 is printed rather than the contents of 41 .
. R FILDDT<RET>
FILE:
/M<RET>
41/
0
"'C

Enable your privileges:
. ENABLE<RET>
Again, examine memory .

The contents of 41 are displayed.

. R FILDDT<RET>
FILE:
/M<RET>
41/
JSR 3600
"'C

2-93

SYSTEM COMMANDS

EOF Command
EOF Command

Function
The EOF command writes an end-of-file mark on the specified
magnetic tape.
This command runs the COMPIL program, which
interprets the command before running the PIP program.
Format
EOF MTxn:
Where:

MTxn:

specifies the magnetic-tape unit.

More than one magnetic-tape unit can be specified in
the command string by separating the specifications
with commas.
Refer to Section 1.9.1 for a description
of device name formats.
Characteristics
Requires LOGIN.
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Destroys your core image.
Example
write end-of-file mark on magnetic tape MTA2: .
. EOF MTA2:<RET>

2-94

SYSTEM COMMANDS
EXAMINE Conunand
EXAMINE Command

Function

The EXAMINE conunand displays a core location in your area
(high
or low segment).
The contents of the location are typed out in
half-word octal mode.
This conunand is useful when debugging
programs.
Format

E addr
Where:

addr is the address of the location being examined.
The address is required the first time the EXAMINE
conunand is used.

If you omit the address, the system will examine the
next location.
If the previous conunand was a deposit,
the system will examine the location of the deposit.
Characteristics

Requires LOGIN.
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Requires core.
Example

Examine location 140 .
. E 140<RET>
000140/ 000000 000000
Examine the next location, 141.
You do not need to
address for a consecutive location .

specify

the

. E<RET>
000141/ 000000 000000
Deposit 1 in location 141. You can omit the address because the
DEPOSIT conunand will use the location of the last EXAMINE
conunand .
. D 0 l<RET>
Examine the same location, 141. You do not need to specify the
address.
The EXAMINE conunand will use the location of the last
DEPOSIT conunand .
. E<RET>
000141/ 000000 000001

2-95

SYSTEM COMMANDS
EXECUTE Command
EXECUTE Command

Function

The EXECUTE command compiles the specified source files,
if
necessary,
loads the generated REL files into core, and begins
execution of the program.
The system determines the proper
language compiler to use from the source file extensions or from
switches you specify in the command string.
(Refer to the
COMPILE command.)
If a
.REL file already exists with a newer
date than that of the source file, the system does not compile
the file unless you request this explicitly with a switch.
This command is equal to issuing the LOAD and START commands.
Each time you issue a COMPILE, LOAD, EXECUTE, or DEBUG command,
the system remembers the command with its arguments in a
temporary file on disk or in core.
Therefore, when you issue one
of these commands without specifying any arguments, the system
uses the arguments that it saved in the temporary file.
(Refer
to Appendix C.)
The EXECUTE command accepts several command constructions: the @
construction
(indirect commands),
the + construction,
the =
construction, and the < > construction. Refer to Appendix C for
a complete description of each of these constructions.
This command runs the COMPIL program,
which interprets the
command before running the appropriate language compiler for
LINK.
Format

EXECUTE file-spec
Where:

file-spec is a single file specification or a string of
file
specifications separated by commas.
A file
specification consists of a device name,
a file name
with or without an extension, and a directory name.
(Refer to Section 1.9.)

You can use the following switches to modify the command string.
These switches can be temporary or permanent switches unless
otherwise stated.
(Refer to Section 1.8.4.)
Switch

Function

/ALGOL

Compiles the file with ALGOL.
with the extension of .ALG.

/BINARY

Generates a binary file for each file compiled.
The file name for the binary file follows the
standard conventions for determining the name of
the output file.
(Refer to the COMPILE command.)
The file name extension is
.REL.
This is the
default action.

/BLISS

Compiles the file with BLISS-ID.
Assumed for
files with the extension of .BlD or .BLI.
This
switch is not supported.

2-96

Assumed

for

files

SYSTEM COMMANDS
EXECUTE Command

/C68
/C74

Runs the appropriate COBOL compiler.

/COBOL

Compiles the file with COBOL.
with the extension of .CBL.

/COMPILE

Forces a compilation of this file even if a binary
file exists with a newer date and time than the
source file.
You can use this switch to obtain an
extra
compilation
(for example,
to obtain a
listing)
because the system does not perform
compilation if the binary file is newer than the
source file.

/CREF

Produces a cross-referenced listing file on the
disk for each file compiled, for later processing
by the CREF program.
The file extension of the
output file is .CRF.
You can then list the files
using the CREF command.
However,
with COBOL
files,
the system appends the cross-referenced
listing to the listing file.

/DDT

Loads the program debugger DDT with the program.

Assumed

for

/DEBUG: (arg, arg, ... )
Passes the arguments to FORTRAN.
Refer
TOPS-IO/TOPS-20 FORTRAN Language Manual.

files

the

/DLIST

Produces a .LST file in your directory area.
You
can output the file to the line printer with the
PRINT command.

/F40
/FIO

Obsolete

/F66

Applies FORTRAN-66 rules for DO loops and EXTERNAL
statements.

/FOROTS
/FORSE

Obsolete

/FORTRAN

Compiles the file with a
FORTRAN
compiler.
Assumed for files with the extension of .F4 and
.FOR and all files with nonrecognizable compiler
extensions if FORTRAN is the standard compiler.
You need to specify this switch if the file has a
nonrecognizable compiler extension and FORTRAN is
not the standard compiler or is not the current
default.
(For example,
EXE/ALGOL FILl,
FIL2,
FIL3/FORTRAN) .

/FUDGE:
file-spec

Creates a temporary file that contains
the names
of the .REL files produced by the command string
plus the library file name. When you issue the
FUDGE command, PIP reads this temporary file to
generate a library .REL file.
(Refer to the FUDGE
command description.) The argument to this switch
is:
dev:file.ext[proj,prog]

2-97

SYSTEM COMMANDS

EXECUTE Command
Where:

dey: is the device on which to write the
file.
If you omit the device, the system
assumes DSK.
fi1e.ext is the name of the library file.
The file name is required.
If you omit
the extension, the system assumes .REL.
[proj,prog] is the directory in which to
place the fil~.
Your directory is assumed
if you do not specify a directory.

This switch is permanent in the sense that it
pertains to all
.REL files generated by the
command string.
/GFLOAT

Indicates that double-precision numbers are to be
stored in G-floating format.
This format has an
extended exponent range.
This option is available
on KL-IO proessors only.

/K?lO

Designates the processor where the program will
execute once it has been loaded.
The variable (?)
can be L or S.
These switches are necessary for
FORTRAN-IO programs because the compiler generates
different code for the processors.
The default is
the
processor on the computer executing the
command.

/LIBRARY

Loads the files in library search mode.
This mode
causes a program file in a special library file to
be loaded only if one or more of its declared
entry
symbols
satisfies an undefined global
request in the source file.
The system libraries
are
always searched.
(See the TOPS-IO LINK
Reference Manual.)

/LINK

Obsolete

/LIST

Generates a listing file for each file compiled.
The extension of the output file is .LST.
The
system automatically spools it when you log out.
The complement of this switch is /NOLIST.

/LMAP

Produces a loader map during the
containing the local symbols.

/LOADER

Obsolete

/MACRO

Assembles the file with MACRO.
with extensions of .MAC.

/MACYll

Assembles the file with MACYll. Assumed for files
with extensions of
.Pll.
This switch is not
supported.

/MANTIS

Compiles
the
file
with
MANTIS
debugging
information.
This switch affects Fortran-40 files
only.
This switch is not supported.

2-98

process

Assumed for

files

SYSTEM COMMANDS
EXECUTE Command
/MAP

Produces loader maps during the loading process.
When this switch is encountered, a loader map is
requested from the loader.
After the library
search of the system libraries, the map is written
in your disk area with either the file name
specified by you (for example, /MAP:file) or the
default file name nnnLNK.MAP.
This switch is an
exception to the permanent switch rule in that it
causes only one map to be produced even though it
appears as a permanent switch.

/NEW

Runs the appropriate language compiler from the
experimental system library
(device NEW:) area
[1,5].
If the compiler does not exist on device
NEW:,
COMPIL tries to obtain it from device SYS:.
(Refer to the Restriction.)

/NOBINARY

Does not generate binary files.
Unless you issue
this switch,
the system generates binary files.
This switch, when combined with the /CREF or /LIST
switch, is useful when you compile programs solely
for the purpose of generating listings.

/NOCOMPILE

Does not force a compilation on a
source file
whose date is not as recent as the date on the
binary file.
This switch is not the same as the
/REL switch,
which turns off all compilations,
even if the source file is newer than the
.REL
file.
Complement
to
the
/COMPILE switch.
/NOCOMPILE is the default action.

/NODEBUG

Does not pass previously
FORTRAN.

/NOLIST

Does not generate
default action.

/NOMANTIS

Compiles the file
without
MANTIS
debugging
information.
This
switch affects Fortran-40
This switch is not supported.
programs only.

/NOOPTIMIZE

Does not optimize
programs.

/NOSEARCH

Loads all routines of the file whether
the
routines are referenced or not.
Because this is
the default action, this switch is used to turn
off library search mode (/LIBRARY).

/OLD

Runs the appropriate language compiler from the
system library of old programs (device OLD:) which
resides on the disk area [1,3].
If the compiler
does not exist on device OLD:, COMPIL tries to
obtain it from device SYS:.
(Refer to
the
Restriction. )

/OPTIMIZE

Optimizes
programs.

/PAL10

Assembles the file with PALlO.
with the .PAL extension.

the

listing

the

object

2-99

specified
files.

object

code

arguments

This

the

FORTRAN

source

Assumed for

files

SYSTEM COMMANDS
EXECUTE Command
/PASCAL

Compiles the file with Pascal.
with the .PAS extension.

Assumed for

files

/REL

Uses the existing .REL files although newer source
files might be present.

/SAVE

Saves the core image of the loaded program.

/SEARCH

Loads the files in library search mode.
The
action is identical to that of the /LIBRARY
switch.

/SELF

Runs the appropriate language compiler from device
DSK:
instead of from the system library (device
SYS:).
This switch is useful if you keep a
private copy of a compiler in your own disk area.
(Refer to the Restriction.)

/SNOBOL

Compiles the file with SNOBOL.
with an extension of .SNO.
supported.

/SSAVE

Saves the core image of the loaded
sharable executable file.

/SYS

Runs the appropriate language compiler from the
system library (device SYS:) area [1,4].
This is
the default action.

Assumed for files
This switch is not
program

Restriction
You cannot specify compilers from different structures in
same command string. For example, the following is invalid:
.EXECUTE PARTA.FOR/NEW,PARTB.FOR/OLD
However, the following is valid:
.COMPILE PARTA.FOR/NEW<RET>
.COMPILE PARTB.FOR/OLD<RET>
.EXECUTE/REL PARTA,PARTB
Characteristics
Requires LOGIN.
Places your terminal at user level.
Runs the appropriate compiler or assembler
loader, destroying your original core image.

and

linking

Starts the execution of the compiled and loaded program.

2-100

the

SYSTEM COMMANDS
EXECUTE Command
Example

Type out a test program .
. TYPE PROG.FOR<RET>
TYPE 10
10 FORMAT (' TESTING EXECUTION')
END
Execute the program .
. EXECUTE PROG.FOR<RET>
FORTRAN: PROG
MAIN
LINK:
LOADING
[LNKXCT PROG EXECUTION]
TESTING EXECUTION
END OF EXECUTION
CPU TIME:
0.02 ELAPSED TIME:
EXIT

0.05

Message shows the time parameters of your job.

2-101

SYSTEM COMMANDS
FILE Command
FILE Command

Function

The FILE
command
remotely
controls
DECtape-to-disk
disk-to-DECtape transfers on operator-handled DECtapes.

and

NOTE
The FILE command is not part of the standard
system.
Your site must run aMOUNT explicitly to
make the FILE command usable.
There are seven functions that
command.
Format

Function

FILE C
FILE D
FILE F
FILE L
FILE R
FILE W
FILE Z

Check
Delete
File
Read
Retrieve
wait
Zero

can

performed

the

FILE

The C and W functions are the only requests that are performed
immediately.
Your terminal and job are free to proceed before
the request is completed, except for batch jobs,
which cannot
continue until execution is complete.
Formats

FILE C
Checks the queue of FILE requests to determine if any of your
requests are still pending.
There is no argument to the
command in this format.
Pending requests for your job will
be printed on your terminal.

FILE D,tape-id,file.ext,file.ext, ...
Deletes the specified files from DECtape.
This command
requires tape identification and a list of file names as
arguments.
The tape-id is a 1- to 6-character alphanumeric
name that identifies the tape. After the files are deleted,
an automatic FILE L is performed.

FILE F,tape-id file-spec, file-spec,
Copies the specified files onto the specified DECtape.
This
command requires a tape identification and list of file
specifications as arguments.
The file specifications can
include
an
explicit
file
structure
name
and
project-programmer number so that you can copy files from a
disk area other than your own.
You do not have to specify
the device and project-programmer number of subsequent file
specifications if they do not change.
That is, you must
specify the programmer number (for example,
[,104])
if the
file to be copied has the same project number as yours and
you must specify the project number
([41,])
if you are
copying files from another project.
2-102

SYSTEM COMMANDS
FILE Command

The protection of the disk file is checked to see if the file
can be read.
In addition,
the protection of the DECtape
directory file (tape-id.DIR) is checked to see if you can
update it.
If there is not enough room on the DECtape to
copy an entire file, that portion
(if any)
that has been
written so far is deleted and an error message is placed in
the directory file.
When the files have been successfully
copied, an automatic FILE L is performed.
When the wildcard construction is used with the FILE F and
FILE Z commands, your job's entire search list is used.
That
is, all files matching the construction are transferred from
all structures in the search,list.
In most cases you do not need to specify which file
structures the files are on because UMOUNT determines this
(with LOOKUPs) and passes the information to OMOUNT.
With
the FILE F and FILE Z functions, if a file structure is not
specified and the specified file exists on more than one
structure, the first one in your search list is copied.
4.

FILE L,tape-id
Reads the directory of a DECtape and writes it into your disk
area as an ASCII file with the file name tape-id.DIR.
The
file is placed on the first file structure that can be
written on in your search list, as long as that structure has
an area that matches your project-programmer number.
Tape-id
is a 1- to 6-character alphanumeric name that is used to
identify the tape.
You can then print the directory on your
terminal with the TYPE command.
The format of the DECtape
directory is similar to the directory file written by the
DIRECTORY command.
If errors occur while the FILE command is
being processed, the system writes error messages into the
directory file tape-id.DIR.

File R,tape-id,dev:file.ext,dev:file.ext ...
Transfers the specified files from your DECtape to the disk.
This command requires tape-id and a list of file names as
arguments.
If the specified files already exist in the disk
area,
they are superseded, if their protection code allows
it.
If the specified files do not exist, they are created on
the first file structure in your job's search list for which
creation is permitted.
After files are transferred,
an
automatic FILE L is performed.
If you have a search list
containing
multiple
file
structures,
the asterisk construction
(when used with the
FILE R command) can cause files to be created rather than
superseded.
For the FILE R function, when no file structure
is specified, the files are copied onto the first file
structure in your search list on which you are allowed to
create files.
(Refer to the description of the SETSRC
program.)
When a file structure name is typed or implied, it
becomes the new default.

2-103

SYSTEM COMMANDS
FILE Corrunand
6.

FILE W
waits until all of your pending requests are processed before
allowing
your job to continue.
If there are pending
requests, the message "WAITING ...
TYPE 2 "C'S TO EXIT" is
printed on your terminal.
Control returns to your job when
all requests have been processed.
You can type two CTRL/Cs
if you decide not to wait.

FILE Z,tape-id,dev:file.ext[ppn],dev:file.ext[ppn] ...
Deletes the files in the directory of the DECtape before the
files are copied and then performs the same operations as the
FILE F corrunand.
This corrunand requires tape-id and can have a
list of file specification arguments. After the files are
copied, an automatic FILE L is performed.
When you use the wildcard construction with the FILE F and
FILE Z corrunands, your job's entire search list is used.
That
is, all files matching the construction are transferred from
all structures in the search list.

The wildcard constructions can be used,
but generic DSK:
can
define many file structures; the specific file structure is
chosen as follows:
When you use the wildcard construction for the file name or
extension,
the first structure in your search list that you
can access is used.
If you do not use the wildcard construction and the file
exists,
the first file structure in the search list that
contains the specified file is used, unless overridden by a
default.
(Refer to the examples.)
If the file does not
exist, the standard structure is used.
Examples
In the following examples, your search list is as follows:
SORT:,DSKA:/NOCREATE,DSKB:,DSKC:
You are user 10,3421, with UFDs on DSKA:, DSKB:, and DSKC:,
and
the file EX.l exists on each of these three structures.
User
10,4072 has the file EX.2 in his area on DSKB: and on DSKC:.
1.

This command requests that the operator mount DECtape 1, that
the file EX.l in your area be copied onto it, that the file
EX.2[10,4072]
also be copied onto the DECtape,
that a
directory of the DECtape be written in your area, and that
the operator dismount the DECtape.
The directory is written on the first structure encountered
in the search list that is both writable and on which you
have a UFD.
In the preceding example, you do not have a UFD
on the first structure in your search list (SORT:), you
cannot create new files on the second structure in your
search list
(DSKA:), and so the directory is written on the
third structure in your search list (DSKB:).

2-104

SYSTEM COMMANDS
FILE Command

The file EX.1 on DSKA: will be copied only onto the DECtape
because the copy on DSKA: was encountered first.
The file
DSKB:EX.2[10,4072] will be copied onto the DECtape because
the copy on DSKB: was encountered first .
. FILE F,TAPE1,EX.1,EX.2[10,4072]<RET>
REQUEST QUEUED
1. F JOB30 TTY11 10,3421 TAPE1
DSKB:,DSKAO:EX.1,DSKBO:EX.2[10,4072]
1 COMMAND IN QUEUE
2.

In this example, you specified that DSKC: be copied from both
areas.
DSKC: was typed only once because a device given in a
file specification remains in effect for subsequent file
specifications in the same command, unless another device is
specified. When you omit the project number the default is
your project-programmer number. Also the project-programmer
number can be specified either before the file name
(as in
this example)
or after the file name (as in the preceding
example) .
. FILE F,TAPE2,DSKC:EX.1, [,4072]EX.2<RET>
REQUEST QUEUED
2. F JOB30 TTY11 10,3421 TAPE2
DSKB:DSKCO:EX.1,DSKCO:EX.2[10,4072]
2 COMMANDS IN QUEUE
The response from the FILE C command indicates to you which
of your requests have not yet been processed.
In this case,
both of your requests are still pending .
. FILE C<RET>
1. F JOB30 TTY11 10,3421 TAPE1
DSKB:,DSKAO:EX.1,DSKBO:EX.2[10,4071]
2. F JOB30 TTY11 10,3421 TAPE2
DSKB:,DSKCO:EX.1,DSKCO:EX.2[10,4072]
2 COMMANDS IN QUEUE
The FILE R command uses the same algorithm as the FILE F and
Z command for determining the device on which to write the
The file EX.1 is written on the first file
directory.
The file EX.1 already exists
structure in your search list.
DSKA: is NOCREATE, so the file
on DSKA:, DSKB:, and DSKC:.
EX.1 is written onto DSKB, superseding the EX.1 already on
DSKB: .
. FILE R,TAPE1,EX.1<RET>
REQUEST QUEUED
1. R JOB24 TTY11 10,3421 TAPE1
DSKB:,DSKB:EX.1
1 COMMAND IN QUEUE

2-105

SYSTEM COMMANDS

FILE Conunand
3.

When the wildcard construction is used,
UMOUNT uses the
entire search list to determine what files to copy for FILE F
and FILE Z conunands, whether or not you have a UFD on a
particular structure.
UMOUNT passes the construction, along
with each structure in the search list, to OMOUNT .
. FILE F,TAPE3,E?*<RET>
REQUEST QUEUED
2. F JOB24 TTY11 10,3421 TAPE3
DSKB:,SORT:E?*,DSKA:E?*,DSKB:E?*,DSKC:E?*
DSKC:E?*
2 COMMANDS IN QUEUE

2-106

SYSTEM COMMANDS

FINISH Command
FINISH Command

Function

The FINISH command terminates any input or output currently in
progress on the specified device,
closes any open files, and
deassigns the device.
This command completely disassociates a
device from your job and prevents you from continuing the
program.
If you want to continue your program after ending I/O,
use the DEASSIGN comma~d instead of the FINISH command.
Format

FINISH dev:
Where:

dey: is the logical or physical name of the device on
which I/O is to be terminated.
This argument is
optional.

If dev: is omitted I/O is terminated on all devices,
except your job's controlling terminal, and any logical
name associated with the controlling terminal
is
cleared.
Refer to Section 1.9.1
names.

for

description

device

Characteristics

Requires LOGIN.
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Requires core.
Restrictions

When running a program, you cannot continue your program after a
FINISH if the device was initialized, but you can start the
program from the beginning or enter DDT.
Example

Assign a card reader to your job .
. ASSIGN CDR:<RET>
Card reader number 1 is assigned.
CDR261 ASSIGNED

2-107

SYSTEM COMMANDS
FINISH Command

Show the devices that are busy .
. SYSTAT B<RET>
BUSY DEVICES:
DEVICE
JOB

WHY

TTY144
TTY235
LPT260
LPT261
LPT263
CDR260
CDR261

INIT
INIT
INIT
INIT
INIT
INIT
AS

18
18
18
18
18
18
29

LOGICAL

Card reader number 1 is busy because it is assigned to your job.
Finish using the card reader .
. FINISH CDR<RET>
Again, show the busy devices .
. SYSTAT B<RET>
BUSY DEVICES:
DEVICE
JOB

WHY

TTY144
TTY235
LPT260
LPT261
LPT263
CDR260

INIT
INIT
INIT
INIT
INIT
INIT

18
18
18
18
18
18

LOGICAL

Card reader 1 is not in the list of busy devices.
is available to other users.

2-108

Therefore,

SYSTEM COMMANDS
FUDGE Command
FUDGE Command

Function
The FUDGE command creates a library .REL file from a temporary
file generated by a previous COMPILE, LOAD, EXECUTE, or DEBUG
command string containing the /FUDGE switch.
(See the TOPS-10
MAKLIB User's Guide and the TOPS-10 LINK Programmer's Reference
Manual for descriptions of library .REL files.)
The temporary file contains the library name and the list of .REL
files which were entered by the previous command's /FUDGE switch.
The FUDGE command runs PIP, which reads the list of
.REL files
and the library file name from the temporary file.
PIP then
copies the listed .REL files into the library file in the same
order that they are listed in the temporary file.
NOTE
Unlike the COMPIL program's default action, the /FUDGE
switch combines files in the order that you list them
in the command line.
The COMPIL program sorts files
by compilers.
COMPIL sorts mixed FORTRAN and MACRO
programs so that all FORTRAN programs are compiled
first and MACRO programs second.
After you use the /FUDGE switch, you must issue the FUDGE command
before you issue any other command that runs PIP (for example,
TYPE and COPY).
Otherwise,
the library information in the
temporary file will be superseded by the information generated by
the other PIP command.

Format
FUDGE

Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Runs the PIP program (at CCL offset) .
Destroys your core image.
Example
Compile the files PROG,NUMBER, and NUMB2 .
. COMPILE/FUDGE:LIBRAR PROG.FOR,NUMBER.FOR,NUMB2.FOR<RET>
Create a file named LIBRAR that contains the .REL files generated
by the COMPILE command .
. FUDGE<RET>

2-109

SYSTEM COMMANDS
FUDGE Conunand

A DIRECTORY conunand shows the files created
ago, among them: LIBRAR.REL .

less

. DIR/SIN:-1<RET>
PROG
NUMBER
NUMB 2
LIBRAR

REL
REL
REL
REL

1
1
1
3

<055>
<055>
<055>
<055>

dd-rrunm-yy
dd-rrunm-yy
dd-rrunm-yy
dd-rrunm-yy

2-110

DSKC: [27,5055]

than

hour

SYSTEM COMMANDS
GET Command
GET Command

Function
The GET command loads a core image
device but does not execute it.

from

retrievable

storage

This command clears all of your core.
However,
programs should
not count on this action and should explicitly clear those areas
of core that are expected to contain zeros.
(That is,
programs
should be self-initializing).
This action allows programs to be
restarted by a CTRL/C START sequence without another GET command.
Format
GET file-spec core/switch
Where:

file-spec is
format.

file

specification

the

standard

core is the amount of core you want to reserve for the
program.
The core argument is a decimal number
followed by an optional K or P for blocks or pages,
respectively.
If you do not specify either K or P, K
is assumed.
If you do not specify a core argument, the
default is the minimum amount of core needed to load
the program.
/switch is the following option:
/USE:n

Specifies the octal section number
(n)
in which a core image is loaded.
Valid
section numbers are 0-37, octal.
(Note
that the limit is 40 octal sections.)

Characteristics
Destroys your core image.
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Example
Load a program .
. LOAD PROG.FOR
FORTRAN:
PROG
MAIN.
LINK:
LOADING
EXIT
Save the executable format .
. SAVE
PROG SAVED

2-111

SYSTEM COMMANDS
GET Command
Use GET to bring the program into memory .
. GET PROG
JOB SETUP
START execution of the program .
. START
TESTING EXECUTION
END OF EXECUTION
CPU TIME:
0.02 ELAPSED TIME:
EXIT

0.17

2-112

SYSTEM COMMANDS
HALT Command
HALT Command

Function

The HALT command (or CTRL/C) stops your job.
Formats

HALT
(CTRL/C)
CTRL/C echoes on your terminal as AC.
Characteristics

Places your terminal at monitor level.
Does not require LOGIN.
Examples

Request a list of your directory .
. DIR<RET>
PATHl.RNO 3
SWITCH.INI 1
CALC. AC

<055>
<055>

dd-mmm-yy
dd-mmm-yy

DSKC: [27,5434]

Type two CTRL/Cs to halt output.
2.

Execute a program .
. EXECUTE PROG.FOR<RET>
LINK:
LOADING
[LNKXCT PROG EXECUTION]
AC
AC
Two CTRL/Cs return you to monitor level, interrupting program
execution.
Use CCONTINUE
monitor level .

continue

execution

while

remaining

. CCONTINUE<RET>
Use HALT to interrupt execution.
.HALT<RET>

2-113

(See NOTE below.)

SYSTEM COMMANDS

HALT Command
Use CONTINUE to re-enter
execution .

user

level

and

continue

. CONTINUE<RET>
DONE
END OF EXECUTION
CPU TIME:6.12 ELAPSED TIME:45.73
EXIT
Program successfully completes execution.
NOTE
It is necessary to halt execution of a
program if your terminal is to enter or leave
user level. Therefore, you must issue a HAL,T
or CTRL/C at monitor level, after you have
used the CCONTINUE or CSTART commands,
for
your terminal to enter user level.

2-114

program

SYSTEM COMMANDS
HELP Command
HELP Command

Function
The HELP command prints information about system features on your
terminal.
You can select this information from the following
file structures: HLP:, NEW:, OLD:, DOC:, and SYS:.
Formats
HELP
Prints instructions for using the variations of the HELP command.
HELP

Lists the names of features for which HELP is available, all the
monitor commands,
all site-specific commands, all user-defined
(declared) commands, all the monitor SET commands,
the monitor
SET TTY comma~ds,
the terminal types supported by TOPS-10, and
the SET WATCH commands.
HELP name
Where:

name is the name of a feature or program for which the
monitor
has
a
HELP file.
Only the first six
alphanumeric characters are read by the HELP program.

HELP dev:name
Where:

dev:

is the file structure that the file is on.

name is the name of the program or
you want help.

feature

for

which

If the specified feature does not have a HELP file on
the specified device,
or if you do not specify the
device, the devices are searched in the following
order:
HLP:, SYS:, NEW:, OLD:, DOC:
You can change the search order by changing
search list.
Refer to the SETSRC command.

your

job

You can use the asterisk wildcard construction (*) instead of the
feature name, for information about all the HELP available on the
specified device.
(See examples.) You cannot use the asterisk
(*) to specify the device name.

2-115

SYSTEM COMMANDS

HELP Conunand

Characteristics
Does an autopush, so it preserves your core image.
Runs the HELP program.
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Does not require LOGIN.
Example
For information about the HELP conunand, type HELP .
. HELP<RET>
The HELP conunand prints information about the system on your
terminal.
Use one of the following constructions for specific
information .
. HELP<RET>
Prints out this message .
. HELP *<RET>
Prints out the names of all subjects for which there is help.
Use one of these subjects as the name in the next construction.
HELP * also prints out the names of the system conunands,
the
names of site-specific conunands,
the names of job-specific
conunands, the names of the SET conunands, the names of the SET
DEFAULT conunands, the names of the SET TTY conunands, the names of
the SET WATCH conunands, and the supported terminal types .
. HELP name<RET>
Prints all the information available about
For example:

the

subject

"name".

.HELP DIRECT<RET>
Prints information about the DIRECT conunand!program .
. HELP lib:*<RET>
Prints out the names of all subjects for which there is help
available from the specified library device.
The standard system
library devices are:
SYS:

NEW:

OLD:

HLP:

DOC:

For example:
.HELP NEW:*<RET>
Prints a list of all the information available in NEW: .
. HELP lib:name<RET>
Prints information about the specified subject in
library.

2-116

the

specified

SYSTEM COMMANDS
INITIA Command
INITIA Command

Function
The INITIA command sets the parameters for your terminal.
This
command is issued automatically at system startup on certain
designated terminals.
You can reissue the command at any time.
This command also starts certain system programs, when issued
from particular terminals.
If you are logged in and
SWITCH.INI file.
Refer
SWI TCH . INI .

you run INITIA,
INITIA reads your
to Appendix B for a description of

Format
INITIA arg arg ...
Where:

arg can be one of the following arguments.
You can
precede any of the following arguments with NO (except
NORUN) to suppress a default setting.
Function

Argument
ATTRIBUTES

Prints the
terminal.

CHECK:keyword

Sets your terminal type after requesting
identification from your DEC terminal.
The
optional keyword is DEFAULT,
meaning CHECK
only if the current terminal type is the
default type (usually TTY) .

HELP

Prints information about INITIA command.

KSYS

Tells you when timesharing will end (if
is set) .

NAME

Prints the system name on your
NAME is the default argument.

NORUN

Suppresses
program.

NOTICE

Prints the general operator notice.

SETTTY

Sets up your terminal characteristics or
attributes.
The SET TTY argument is required
in order to set terminal characteristics from
SWITCH.INI if you are logged in.
When you
are not logged in,
INITIA reads terminal
characteristics
from
SYS:TTY.INI
automatically.
SETTTY can be specified on
the INITIA command line or in the SWITCH.INI
file.

STRUCTURES

Prints any operator
structures.

2-117

terminal

the

attributes

execution

notices

for

any

about

this

KSYS

terminal.
default

mounted

SYSTEM COMMANDS

INITIA Command
TEXT

Prints quick operator notice.

TTY

Prints the te~minal characteristics for
terminal.

this

Ter.minal Characteristics Arguments
In addition to the above arguments, you can use the following
arguments to INITIA SETTTY in your SWITCH.INI file.
They are
effective for any job that is logged in. Most of the following
arguments are equivalent to an argument to a SET TTY command.
Many of the arguments can be preceded by NO and a space to
disable the defaults.
These are included in the description of
the function of the arguments.
(Refer to Appendix B for details
about using SWITCH.INI.)
Each argument, equivalent
listed below.

SET

TTY

command,

and

function,

Argument

Equivalent Command

SETTTY

None

Must be present for the other
INITIA terminal arguments to
be effective.

ALTMODE

TTY ALTMODE

Converts ALTmode codes 175 and
176 to the ESCape character.
NO
ALTMODE
restores
the
individual identities of codes
175 and 176.

BLANKS

TTY BLANK

Controls the output of blank
lines.
NO BLANKS suppresses
the
output
of
automatic,
consecutive carriage returns
at the end of output.

CRLF

TTY CRLF

Controls
the
automatic
carriage return and line feed
at the end of the terminal
line.
NO CRLF suppresses the
automatic carriage return and
line feed.

DEBREAK

TTY DEBREAK

No longer supported.

DEFER

TTY DEFER

Suppresses echoing to a video
terminal
until
input
is
requested.
NO DEFER allows
characters typed to the system
to be echoed when the terminal
is idle.

DISPLAY

TTY DISPLAY

Notifies the system that you
have a display terminal.
This
characteristic can be used by
programs that control output
to the terminal.

ECHO

TTY ECHO

Controls
terminal.

2-118

Function

echoing

the

SYSTEM COMMANDS
INITIA Command

ELEMENT:xxx

TTY ELEMENT xxx

No longer supported.

FILL:x

TTY FILL x

Assigns filler class x to
terminal.

FORM

TTY FORM

Controls
the
output
of
line-feeds for formfeed and
vertical tab characters.
NO
FORM instructs the system to
output the line-feeds.

GAG

TTY GAG

Controls the
reception
of
messages sent with the SEND
command.
NO
GAG
allows
messages when your terminal is
at user level.

IDLEDISCONN n

None

Sets the maximum number of
seconds your terminal can be
idle
before
the
system
disconnects it.

TTY LC

Informs the system that your
terminal
has
lowercase
ability. NO LC changes all
lowercase
characters
to
uppercase.

LENGTH: xx

TTY LENGTH n

Sets the forms length of
terminal.

LOCALCOPY

TTY LOCALCOPY

Does not require the system to
echo
characters
to
the
terminal.

LOCATE node

None

Changes the default
device
list
of
the
job, making
devices
at
other
nodes
available to your job. LOCATE
is
only
valid
1n
the
SWITCH.INI and TTY.INI files.

RCVSPEED:xxx

TTY SPEED xxx nnn

Changes the input speed of the
terminal
to be xxx.
This
argument affects the speed at
which
the monitor receives
characters from your terminal.

REMOTE

TTY REMOTE

Sets
your
terminal
for
accounts with remote or local
access types. REMOTE is not
recommended
for
use
by
non-privileged users because
it can only be reversed by an
operator [1,2].

RTCOMP

TTY RTCOMP

Controls the use of CTRL/R and
CTRL/T.
Refer to Section 1.6
for the function of
these
control
characters.
RTCOMP
turns
off
the
control
characters.
NO RTCOMP turns
them on.
2-119

the

your

SYSTEM COMMANDS
INITIA Conunand
SPEED:xxxx

TTY SPEED xxx x

Sets
the
speed
of
your
terminal to xxxx baud.
This
construction sets the input
and
output
speeds
to be
equivalent.

SSIZE:n

TTY [S]STOP n

Sets the page length of your
terminal.
This controls the
number of lines
that
are
output to your terminal before
an automatic stop.

SSTOP

TTY SSTOP

Ignores CTRL/Q until output is
stopped either automatically
by the system,
or by CTRL/S
from the user.

STOP

TTY STOP

Stops output to the terminal
automatically
after
page
length is reached.

SYSDPY

None

Runs
the
display-oriented
SYSTAT
program
that
is
appropriate
for
your
set
terminal type.
SYSDPY is only
valid in the SWITCH.INI and
TTY.INI files.

TABS

TTY TAB

Informs the system that your
terminal has tabular ability.
NO TABS instructs the system
to simulate tab stops.

TAPE

TTY TAPE

Turns on the XON (CTRL/Q)
and
XOFF
(CTRL/S)
keys for paper
tape reading.
NO TAPE gives
CTRL/Q and CTRL/S their normal
function.
TAPE is discussed
in the TOPS-I0 Monitor Calls
Manual.
CTRL/S and CTRL/Q are
discussed in Section 1.6.

TERMINET

None

Sets
tab
spacing
TERMINET-300.

TYPE:xxxx

TTY TYPE xxxx

Informs the system that your
terminal is of the type xxxx.

TTY UC

Changes all the
input from your
uppercase.

WIDTH:xxx

TTY WIDTH xxx

Sets the width of the line on
your
terminal
to
xxx
characters.

XMTSPEED:xxx

TTY SPEED nnn xxx

Changes the output speed of
your terminal.
This argument
affects the speed at which the
monitor sends characters to
your terminal.

2-120

for

characters
terminal to

SYSTEM COMMANDS
INITIA Command

The arguments listed above are described more thoroughly
description of the SET TTY command.

the

Terminal Attributes Arguments

The following arguments to INITIA SETTTY set up the attributes of
your terminal.
Like the preceding terminal characteristics
arguments, you can use the following arguments in your SWITCH.INI
file.
Unlike the terminal characteristics arguments,
most of the
following terminal attributes arguments do not have equivalent
SET TTY commands.
The exceptions are DISPLAY, ISO, EIGHTBIT, and
OVERSTRIKE.
To display your current terminal attributes,
command INITIA ATTRIBUTES.

you

must

use

the

To set terminal attributes, use the following command format:
INITIA SETTTY arg arg ...
All the following arguments can be preceded with NO and
to disable the setting.

space

ANSI

Function

Argument

ANSLEVEL:n

Indicates the level of conformance
CRT programming standards.

AVO

Indicates that the terminal has an advanced
video option or equivalent capability.

BLOCKMODE

Indicates that the terminal is
performing block-mode transfers.

capable

COLOR

Indicates the
display.

color

DECLEVEL:n

Indicates the level of conformance to DEC CRT
programming standards.

DECTCS

Indicates the DEC technical character set.

DISPLAY

Indicates that the terminal has a video
NO DISPLAY indicates a hard-copy
display;
terminal.

DRCS

Indicates dynamically
sets.

EIGHTBIT

Indicates that the terminal uses an eight-bit
ASCII character code.

8BITARCH

Indicates the terminal is capable of using an
eight-bit ASCII character code.

GUARDEDAREA

Indicates
transfer.

HSCROLL

Indicates the
scrolling.

terminal

2-121

has

redefinable

allows

terminal

video

character

guarded

supports

area

horizontal

SYSTEM COMMANDS
INITIA Conunand
IDCHAR

Indicates character insertion and deletion.

IDLINE

Indicates line insertion and deletion.

INTERROGATION

Indicates that the terminal supports terminal
state interrogation.

ISO

Indicates ISO Latin-l supplemental graphic
character
set.
NO
ISO
means
DEC
Multinational Character Set.

KATAKANA

Indicates the Katakana character set.

KEYBOARD

Indicates the terminal has a keyboard.

LOCATOR: device

Indicates whether locator is present.
device can be MOUSE, TABLET or NONE.

NRC

Indicates
sets.

OVERSTRIKE

Indicates that
the
terminal
allows
a
"three-character
sequence
to
create one
composite output character by printing one
character,
backspacing and then printing
another character over the first.

PRINTERPORT

Indicates that the
port option.

REGIS

Indicates that the terminal understands ReGIS
graphic conunands.

SELECTERASE

Indicates selective erase.

SESSIONS

Indicates
sessions.

SIXEL

Indicates that the terminal
displaying SIXEL graphics.

SREGION

Indicates scroll regions.

STATUSLINE

Indicates that the terminal has
status line in its video display.

TEKEMULATION

Indicates TEK 4010/4014 terminal emulation.

UDKEYS

Indicates
that
the
terminal
user-definable function keys.

USERWINDOWS

Indicates the terminal supports user windows.

VLENGTH

Indicates variable forms length.

VT52EMULATION

Indicates VT52 terminal emulation.

VWIDTH

Indicates variable forms width.

national

the

replacement

terminal

For more information abuut these terminal
your terminal manuals.

2-122

has

character

printer

supports
is

attributes,

The

multiple
capable

extra

refer

has

SYSTEM COMMANDS
INITIA Command
Characteristics
Runs the INITIA program.
Does not require LOGIN.
Example
Use the INITIA TTY ATTRIBUTES command to show the characteristics
and attributes of a generic terminal type:
.I TTY ATTRIB<RET>
RL357A DEClO Development 08:11:23 TTY162 system 1026/1042/1322
Connected to Node KL1026(26) Line # 162
Job 20
User DOTY
[27,10024]
TYPE:TTY
ECHO:DEFER
FILL:1
CRLF
BLANKS
XONXOF
IDLEDI:O
ANSLEVEL: 0
NODI SPLAY
NOISO
NOAVO
NOREGIS
NOSREGION
NOUSERWINDOWS
NOKATAKANA
NOLOCATOR

MODEL: TTY
WIDTH:72
NOLC
NOGAG
ALTMOD
NOUNPAUS
EDITOR
DECLEVEL:O
NOOVERSTRIKE
NONRC
NOPRINTERPORT
NOSIXEL
NOHSCROLL
NOBLOCKMODE
NOSESSIONS
KEYBOARD

CLASS:LT33
LENGTH: 0
NOTABS
SBELL
NORTCOMP
NOESCAPE
NO S LAVE
NOEIGHTBIT
NOCOLOR
NODRCS
NOIDCHAR
NOTEKEMULATION
NOVLENGTH
NOGUARDEDAREA
NODECTCS

APC : HARDWIRED
NOSTOP
NOFORM
NOTAPE
NOREMOTE
NOQUOTE
N08BITARCH
NOSTATUSLINE
NOUDKEYS
NOIDLINE
NOVT52EMULATION
NOVWIDTH
NOSELECTERASE
NOINTERROGATION

Use the SET TTY TYPE command to set your terminal type .
. TTY TYPE VT240<RET>
Use the INITIA TTY ATTRIBUTES command to show your
characteristics and attributes .

new

terminal

. I TTY ATTRIB<RET>
RL357A DEClO Development 08:11:40 TTY162 system 1026/1042/1322
Connected to Node KL1026(26) Line # 162
Job 20
User DOTY
[27,10024]
TYPE:VT240
ECHO:DEFER
FILL:O
CRLF
BLANKS
XONXOF
IDLEDI:O
ANSLEVEL:2
DISPLAY
NOISO
AVO
REGIS
SREGION
NOUSERWINDOWS
NOKATAKANA
NOLOCATOR

MODEL:VT240
WIDTH:80
LC
NOGAG
NOALTMOD
NOUNPAUS
EDITOR
DECLEVEL:2
NOOVERSTRIKE
NRC
PRINTERPORT
SIXEL
NOHSCROLL
NOBLOCKMODE
NOSESSIONS
KEYBOARD

CLASS:VT200
LENGTH: 24
TABS
SBELL
NORTCOMP
NOESCAPE
NO S LAVE
NOEIGHTBIT
NOCOLOR
DRCS
IDCHAR
TEKEMULATION
NOVLENGTH
NOGUARDEDAREA
NODECTCS
2-123

APC : HARDWIRED
NOSTOP
NOFORM
NOTAPE
NOREMOTE
NOQUOTE
8BITARCH
NOSTATUSLINE
UDKEYS
IDLINE
VT52EMULATION
VWIDTH
SELECTERASE
NOINTERROGATION

SYSTEM COMMANDS
JCONTINUE Command
JCONTlNUE Command

Function

The JCONTINUE command forces the specified job to continue if the
job was in a CTRL/C state because of a device error.
Format

JCONTINUE n
Where:

n is the number of the
argument is required.

job

Characteristics

Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Does not require LOGIN.
Examples

Continue job 44:
.JCONTINUE 44<RET>

Continue job 12:
.JCONT 12<RET>

2-124

continued.

This

SYSTEM COMMANDS
KJOB Conunand
KJOB Command

Function

The KJOB conunand:
1.

stops all assigned I/O devices and
system's pool of available devices.

Returns all allocated
available memory.

Returns the job-number to the pool of available job-numbers.

Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

Prints run-time information for your job.

Completes all deferred spooling requests.

memory

returns
the

them

system's

the

pool

Format

KJOB/switch
KJOB can be abbreviated to K.
KJOB accepts one or more of the
following switches.
All switches can be preceded with NO (for
example, NOTEMP) to negate their functions.
Function

Switch

/BATCH

Deletes files only when you
are
over
the
logged-out quota, then deletes enough files to be
below quota.
The algorithm for determining which
files are deleted first is explained in detail
below.

/CLEAR

Clears your terminal's display, if it has one
if the monitor knows the terminal type.

/DISCONNECT

Disconnects a terminal line when you log out.
This includes hanging up a dataset (modem), or
terminating a LAT connection, for example.
This
switch may be abbreviated to /D.
NODISCONNECT
maintains the connection with a terminal line
after logging you out.

/HELP:key

Prints information about KJOB on your terminal.
/HELP does not perform functions 1 through 4.
The
keywords for /HELP are SWITCHES and TEXT.
TEXT
prints the help file and is the default argument.
SWITCHES lists the KJOB switches
and
their
meanings.

2-125

and

SYSTEM COMMANDS
KJOB Conunand

/MESSAGE:key

/TEMP

Tells the system which messages to print on your
terminal.
NOMESSAGE supresses output of the
standard LOGOUT message but still prints error and
warning messages.
The keywords for /MESSAGE are:
ADDRESS

Prints out the address
message occurs.

where

the

CONTINUATION

Prints out
any.

text,

FIRST

Prints out the first
message.

line

the

PREFIX

Prints
out
the
message prefix.

six-character

continuation

Searches your disk area and deletes all files with
.TMP extensions.
TEMP is a default switch for
KJOB.
Using the NOTEMP switch will log you out
faster.

KJOB/BATCH Algorithm

The KJOB/BATCH algorithm categorizes
according to their extensions:
o

files

three

Expendable files have these extensions:
TMP, TEM, SFD, BAK, Q??, MAP, CRF, LSD, LSQ, LST,
PTP, PLT, CDP, Z??, FOO, LOG, BIN, DMP, FIN

groups,

LIS,

LPT,

Important files have these extensions:
RNO, RND, RNH, CMD, KBD, CED, MCR, SNO, FAI, FOR,
F4,
MAC,
ALG,
AID,
BLI, B10, B11, COB, CBL, BAS, PAL, P11, SRC, IDA,
IDX, DAT, DBS, B16, B32, B36, REQ, R16, R36, PAS, INI

Unimportant files have other extensions.

Files are deleted in the following order until the user is
quota:
1.

under

Recompute disk usage and delete files that are too large.
The number of blocks used is recalculated by doing a wildcard
directory and adding up the total space used.
Any files that
are larger than the logged-out quota are deleted.

Delete unprotected expendable files.
An individual wildcard directory search is performed for each
of the extensions listed in the expendable list.
If a match
is found and the protection code is less than or equal to
177, the file is deleted.

Delete unprotected unimportant files.
Files with extensions that are NOT in the important list and
that have a protection code less than or equal to 177 are
deleted.

2-126

SYSTEM COMMANDS
KJOB Command

Delete remaining expendable files.
An individual wildcard directory search is performed for each
of the extensions listed in the expendable list.
If a match
is found, the file is deleted, no matter how it is protected.

Delete unprotected important files.
An individual wildcard directory search is performed for each
of the extensions listed in the important list.
If a match
is found and the protection code is less than or equal to
177, the file is deleted.
Notice that the extensions toward the end of the important
list are considered to be more important than those toward
the beginning of the list.

Delete all unimportant files.
Files with extensions that are NOT in the important list
deleted no matter what their protection codes.

Delete all-files.

Characteristics

Deassigns your terminal.
Stops all I/O devices that are assigned to your job.
Runs the LOGIN program.
Example

.K<RET>
JOB 99 User CUSTER,L.
[27,4072]
Logged-off TTY64 at hh:mm:ss on dd-mmm-yy
Runtime:
0:00:05, KCS:44, Connect time:
0:31:23
Disk reads:
1534, Writes:
88, Blocks saved:
2510

2-127

are

SYSTEM COMMANDS
LABEL Command
LABEL Command

Function
The LABEL command writes an identifier onto a DECtape.
The
identifier is stored on the tape itself and is printed when you
print a directory of the tape with the DIRECT command.
You
should assign a unique label to each DECtape to avoid confusing
one tape with another.
You must use the ASSIGN command to access
the tape before you can use LABEL.
This command runs the COMPIL
command before running PIP.

program,

which

interprets

the

Format
"'name'"

LABEL dev:
Where:

dev:
is a physical or logical name that
DECtape.

represents

is the delimiter of the DECtape identifier.
The
delimiter can also be quotes.
If the identifier
consists entirely of alphanumeric characters,
the
delimiters can be omitted.
A

name is a 1- to 6-character name to be used as the
identifier.
Any characters can be used except the
delimiter.
Restriction
You must use the ASSIGN command to access the tape before you can
use LABEL.
Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Destroys your core image.
Examples
1.

Identify DECtape 4, which has the logical name TIME:
.LABEL TIME "'2:00"'<RET>

Identify DECtape 5 as NAME:
.LABEL DTA5: "NAME"<RET>

2-128

SYSTEM COMMANDS
LIST Command
LIST Command

Function
The LIST command prints one or more files on the line printer
(LPT:).
The output goes either to the line printer immediately
or to the disk to be spooled to the line printer if the line
printer is being spooled for this job.
(Refer to the QUEUE and
PRINT commands.) If the line printer is being spooled, the PRINT
command is preferred over the LIST command because it saves time
and disk accesses.
This command runs the COMPIL
command before running PIP.

program,

which

interprets

the

Format
LIST file-spec
Where:

file-spec is a single file specification or a string of
file
specifications separated by commas.
A file
specification consists of a device name,
a file name
and extension, and a directory name.
This argument is
required. When a directory name precedes the file
name, it becomes the default for all succeeding files.
Switches can be passed to PIP by enclosing them in
parentheses in the LIST command string. When COMPIL
interprets the command string, it passes the switches
to PIP.

Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Destroys your core image.
Example
Spool your line printer requests, print a file (FOR21.DAT) on the
line printer, and look at the line printer queue .
. SET SPOOL LPT:<RET>
.LIST FOR21.DAT<RET>
.PRI<RET>
PRINTER QUEUE:
REQt
JOB NAME
*FOR21
61

LIMIT
12

USER
MAROTTA[27,5434] ON UNIT:O

THERE IS 1 JOB IN THE QUEUE (1 IN PROGRESS)

2-129

SYSTEM COMMANDS
LOAD Command
LOAD Command

Function

The LOAD command translates the specified source files if
necessary,
runs the loader, and loads the generated .REL files
into memory.
The appropriate language compiler is determined by
the source file extension or by switches in the command string.
(Refer to the COMPILE command.) If a
.REL file already exists
with a more recent date than that of the source file, compilation
is not performed
(unless you request it using the /COMPILE
switch) .
which interprets the
This command runs the COMPIL program,
command before running the appropriate language compiler and
linking loader.
The LOAD command generates a core image but does not begin
executing the program.
After the LOAD command, you can START
your program or SAVE the core image for future execution.
Each time the COMPILE,
LOAD,
EXECUTE,
or DEBUG command is
executed,
the system remembers the arguments and switches.
Therefore, if you issue one of these commands with no arguments,
the system uses the stored arguments.
The LOAD command accepts several command constructions:
the @
construction
(indirect commands),
the + construction,
the
construction, and the < > construction.
(Refer to Appendix C for
a complete description of each of these constructions.)
Format

LOAD file-spec, file-spec, ...
Where:

file-spec is one or more file specifications separated
by commas.
A file specification consists of a device
name, a file name with or without an extension,
and a
directory name.
(Refer to Section 1.9.)

The following switches modify the command string.
Switch

Function

/ALGOL

Compiles the file with ALGOL.
with the extension of .ALG.

/BINARY

Generates a binary file for each file compiled.
The file extension of the output file is .REL.
This is the default action.

/BLISS

Compiles the file with BLISS-10.
Assumed
files with the extension of .B10 and .BLI.

/C68
/C74

Runs the specified COBOL compiler.

/COBOL

Compiles the file with COBOL.
with the extension of .CBL.

2-130

Assumed for files

for

Assumed for files

SYSTEM COMMANDS
LOAD Command

/COMPILE

Compiles the file even if a binary file exists
with a newer date and time than the source file.
This switch is used to
obtain
an
extra
compilation (for example, to obtain a listing of
the compilation)
because compilation is not
performed if the binary file is newer than the
source file.

/CREF

Produces a cross-referenced listing file on the
disk
for
each
file
compiled,
for later
processing by the CREF program.
The
file
extension of the output file is .CRF.
The files
can then be listed with the CREF command.
However,
with COBOL files the cross-referenced
listing is always appended to the listing file.

/DDT

Loads the program debugger DDT with the program.

/DEBUG:
(arg, arg, ... )

Passes
the
Refer to the
Manual.

/DLIST

Produces a .LST file and stores it in your
directory.
You can obtain a listing of the file
with the PRINT command.

/FIO
/F40

Obsolete

/F66

Applies FORTRAN-66 rules
EXTERNAL statements.

/FORDDT

Loads the FORTRAN debugger with the program.

/FORTRAN

Compiles the file with a FORTRAN compiler.
Assumed for files with the extension of .F4 and
.FOR and all files with nonstandard compiler
extensions.
This switch is necessary if the
file has a nonstandard compiler extension and
FORTRAN is not the standard compiler or is not
the current default.

/FUDGE:
file-spec

Creates a disk file containing the names of the
.REL files produced by the command string.
When
you give the FUDGE command, PIP reads this file
to generate a library REL file.
(Refer to the
FUDGE command description.)
The argument to the
switch is:

specified arguments to
TOPS-IO/TOPS-20 FORTRAN

for

FORTRAN.
Language

loops

and

dev:file.ext[directory]
Where:

dev:
is the device on which to
write the file.
If you omit the
device name, DSK:
is assumed.
file.ext is the name of the library
file.
The file name is required.
If you omit the extension,
it is
assumed to be .REL.

2-131

SYSTEM COMMANDS
LOAD Conunand
[directory]
is the directory in
which to place the file.
Your
default directory number is assumed
if none is given.
This switch is permanent in that it pertains to
all .REL files generated by the conunand string.
/GFLOAT

Indicates that double-precision numbers are to
be stored in G-floating format.
This format has
an extended exponent range.
This option is
available on KL10 processors only.

/K?10

Designates the machine on which the program will
execute once it has been loaded.
The? can be
replaced by L or S.

/LIBRARY

Loads the files in library search mode.
This
mode causes a program in a special library to be
loaded only if one or more of its declared entry
symbols satisfies an undefined global request in
the source file.
The default libraries are
always
searched.
(Refer
to
the
LINK
documentation. )

/LINK

Obsolete

/LIST

Generates a disk listing file
for each file
compiled.
The file extension of the output file
is .LST.
These files can be listed later with
the PRINT conunand.
If the line printer is being
spooled
for
this
job,
the
files
are
automatically printed.
If you do not specify
this switch, listing files are not generated.

/LMAP

Produces a loader map during the loading process
that contains the local symbols.

/MACRO

Assembles the file with MACRO.
files with extension of .MAC.

/MACY11

Assembles the file with MACY11.
Assumed for
files with an extension of .P11.
This switch is
not supported.

/MAP

Produces a loader map during loading.
After a
library search of the default libraries, the map
is written in your disk area with either the
file name you specify (for example, /MAP:file)
or with the default file name MAP.MAP.
This
switch is an exception to the permanent switch
rule, because although it may be used as a
permanent switch,
it causes only one map to be
produced.

/NEW

Runs the appropriate language compiler from the
experimental system library (device NEW:) area
[1,5].
If the compiler does not exist on device
NEW:,
COMPIL tries to obtain it from device
SYS:.
(Refer to Restriction.)

/NOBINARY

Does not generate binary files.
This switch,
when combined with the /CREF or /LIST switch, is
useful when compiling programs only to generate
listings.
2-132

Assumed

for

SYSTEM COMMANDS
LOAD Command

/NOCOMPILE

Does not force a compilation of a source file
whose date is not as recent as the date on the
binary file.
Note that this switch is not the
same as the /REL switch, which turns off all
compilation, even if the source file is newer
than the
.REL file.
/NOCOMPILE is the default
action.
Complement to the /COMPILE switch.

/NODEBUG

Does not pass previously specified arguments
FORTRAN.

/NOLIST

Does not generate listing files.
default action.

the

/NOOPTIMIZE

Does not optimize the object source
FORTRAN program.

/NOSEARCH

Loads all routines of the file whether the
routines are referenced or not. Because this is
the default,
this switch turns off library
search mode (/LIBRARY).

/OLD

Runs the appropriate language compiler from the
system library of .old programs (device OLD:)
that resides on the disk area
[1,3].
If the
compiler does not exist on device OLD:, COMPIL
tries to obtain it from device SYS:.
(Refer to
Restriction. )

/OPTIMIZE

Optimizes the object source code
program.

/PAL10

Assembles the file with PALlO.
files with the .PAL extension.

Assumed

for

/PASCAL

Compiles the file with Pascal.
files with the .PAS extension.

Assumed

for

/REL

Uses the existing .REL files although
source file might be present.

/SAVE

Saves the core image of the loaded program.

/SEARCH

Loads the files in library search mode.
This
switch is identical to the /LIBRARY switch.

/SELF

Runs the appropriate language compiler from
device DSK:
instead of from the system library
(device SYS:).
This switch is useful if you
keep a private copy of a compiler in your disk
area to
test
new
features.
(Refer
to
Restriction. )

/SNOBOL

Compiles the file with SNOBOL.
Assumed for
files with an extension of .SNO.
Tbis switch is
not supported.

/SSAVE

Saves the core image of the loaded program in
sharable executable file.

/SYS

Runs the appropriate language compiler from
system library
(device SYS:).
This is
default action.

the
the

2-133

This

code

FORTRAN

newer

SYSTEM COMMANDS
LOAD Command
Restrictions

Once a language compiler has been specified from a particular
area
(for example, /SELF), it cannot be called from a different
area within the same command string.
The following is illegal:
.LOAD ITEM.CBL/SYS,ITEM02.CBL/SELF
However, the following is valid:
.COMPILE ITEM.CBL/SYS
.COMPILE ITEM02.CBL/SELF
.LOAD/REL ITEM,ITEM02
Characteristics

Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Runs the appropriate compiler or language compiler and LINK,
destroying your original core image.
Example

The following example shows how to LOAD and SAVE a program.
The DIRECTORY command shows all the files named TEST .
. DIR TEST.*
TEST FOR 1 <055> dd-mmm-yy
LOAD the program.

DSKC:

[27,5055]

The monitor compiles and loads TEST .

. LOAD TEST.FOR
FORTRAN: TEST
MAIN.
LINK:
LOADING
EXIT
Save the loaded program .
. SAVE TEST<RET>
TEST SAVED
A directory shows that the executable format has
your directory .

been

. DIR TEST.*<RET>
TEST FOR
1 <055> dd-mmm-yy DSKC:
[27,5055]
TEST REL
1 <055> dd-mmm-yy
TEST EXE 160 <055> dd-mmm-yy 6(422)
TOTAL OF 162 BLOCKS IN 3 FILES ON DSKC:
[27,5055]

2-134

saved

SYSTEM COMMANDS
LOCATE Conunand
LOCATE Command
Function
The LOCATE conunand changes the default device list of the
job,
making devices at other ANF-10 nodes available to your job.
For
example, if you want to use the devices at node CHRIS for your
job, you can issue the following conunand:
.LOCATE CHRIS
Thereafter, the default I/O devices used will be those on node
CHRIS.
Note that terminal and disk I/O are not affected by this
conunand.
The LOCATE conunand does not change the location of your job;
job runs on the node on which the job was started.

the

Format
LOCATE node-id
Where:

node-id is the name or number of the
which you want I/O to be processed.

ANF-10

node

An argument of 0 locates your

job at the node where the
job's conunand interpreter is.
If you do not specify
the node-id, the default is your physical node/station.

Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Is valid only in networks or in systems with a remote station.
Does not destroy your core image.
Associated Messages
If the LOCATE succeeds, the system prints a message in the form:
NODE node-name (node-num)

sys-id date LOCATED

Where node-name is the name of the node, node-num is the number
of the node, sys-id is the system identification, and date is the
date the system was last reloaded.
If the node specified is not currently in conununication with
network, the following message is printed:
%NODE(x)

the

LOCATED BUT OFF-LINE

The job is successfully LOCATEd, but the node
accessible.

2-135

not

presently

SYSTEM COMMANDS
LOCATE Command
Examples

You LOCATE the job at the node named LONDON, node number 3 .
. LOCATE LONDON<RET>
NODE LONDON{3)
RD020A

KL10 SYS#1279 11-06-79 LOCATED

You attempt to LOCATE to a node that the monitor does not
recognize as part of the network.
An error message is
printed and your location is not changed .
. LOCATE TOKYO<RET>
?UNDEFINED NETWORK NODE

2-136

SYSTEM COMMANDS
LOGIN Command
LOGIN Command

Function

You use the LOGIN command to gain access to the system.
LOGIN command runs the LOGIN program.
LOGIN accepts:
o

your project-programmer number (PPN) or your user name

your password

optional account and remark strings

The

You can obtain these from your system administrator.
LOGIN can
accept a path specification (directory name) in place of the PPN.
To log in, type the LOGIN command,
and press RETURN.
LOGIN
prompts you with a pound sign (#).
Type your project-programmer
number or your user name, and press RETURN.
You can also type
your project-programmer number or your user name immediately
after typing LOGIN, followed by a space. After it receives this
information,
LOGIN prints another prompt
(PASSWORD:) on your
terminal.
Type your password, and press RETURN.
The password
does not echo on your terminal.
You are finished logging in when
the monitor prompt (a period) is returned.
Your system may be running account validation software.
In this
case, LOGIN may not be complete after you type your password.
If
your job requires an account string, LOGIN prompts you for your
account
(ACCOUNT:).
Type your account string, and then press
RETURN, or just press RETURN if the system administrator has
established a default account for your job.
If your job requires
a remark string, LOGIN prompts for it (REMARK:).
Here you can
type anything that will identify your job. Your remark can be up
to 39 characters.
If you do not have a remark,
press RETURN.
The system records spaces for your remark. Example 3 shows the
procedure for logging in with account validation software.
NOTE
When the account string is validated,
characters
are checked according to case.
Therefore, you
must type your account in
the
same
case
(uppercase or lowercase) as it is required.
This
aspect of the system can be changed by the system
administrator.
You can put your account string and remark in
file.
See Appendix B for further information.

your

SWITCH.INI

To specify a default path for disk I/O,
type
the
path
specification instead of your project-programmer number. A path
specification more specifically identifies your directory area.
It
specifies
either a user-file directory or a sub-file
directory. Refer to Section 1.14 of this manual for more
information about path specifications.
If you have detached your terminal from a job, and begin to log
in to anothe~ job, the LOGIN program asks if you want to attach
to the old job or create a new job.
For information about
detaching and attaching jobs, see the ATTACH and DETACH commands.
2-137

SYSTEM COMMANDS
LOGIN Conunand
Example 2 shows the procedure for logging in to a new
detaching the first.

job

after

Format
LOGIN identification/switches
Where:

identification
represents
project-progranuner number
(PPN),
([directory]), or your user name.

either
your
path specification

You can type a path specification in place of the PPN or user
name.
This allows you to establish a default directory path for
the job.
The path specification is either a user-file directory
or a
sub-file directory.
Directory paths are enclosed in
brackets (for example:
[27,5434,SFD]).
The following switches modify the conunand string.
These switches
can be included in your SWITCH.INI file.
SWITCH.INI files are
discussed in Appendix B.
Most parameters set by these switches can be changed by monitor
conunands after you log in.
(Refer to the SET conunands and the
SETSRC program description in the TOPS-10 User Utilities Manual.)

Switch

Function

/ACCOUNT:"string"

Specifies the account string for your
job.
If
the
account
string
contains
any
nonalphanumeric characters, you must enclose
the string in quotation marks.
This switch
is often included in a SWITCH.INI file.

/ASSIGN:
(dev1:log1,
dev2 : log2 ... )

Assigns a device to
name to the device.

dev:
log

your job and

a logical

is the device name
is the logical name

See Section 1.9.1 for more information
device names.
The logical name is
can be used more
than one device.
/ATTACH:argument

about

optional.
This switch
than once to assign more

Sets the ATTACH state for the LOGIN dialog
and the
job being created.
/ATTACH:ASK is
the default action.
By default,
if
a
detached job exists with the specified PPN,
and the job was logged in with /ATTACH:ASK,
LOGIN asks whether you want to attach to the
detached job, instead of creating a new job
with the same PPN.
The /ATTACH:IGNORE switch
suppresses the
default
action
of
the
/ATTACH:ASK switch.
Jobs you create with the
IGNORE argument will be ignored by LOGIN when
you do additional logins with the same PPN.
LOGIN will not ask you if you want to attach
to jobs set to the IGNORE argument.

2-138

SYSTEM COMMANDS
LOGIN Command

/CORE:nx

Informs the system of the maximum amount of
core memory that your job can use.
The value
for x must be either P or K.
P represents
pages of memory (each page is equivalent to
512 words);
K represents blocks of 1024
words.
The value n is any decimal number.
Refer to the CORE command
for
further
information.

/DEFAULT:
(arg:n, arg:n)

Specifies job
characteristics.
Multiple
keywords can be given to the /DEFAULT switch;
in that case,
they must be enclosed in
parentheses and
separated
with
commas.
Arguments and their meanings are as follows:
Argument

Meaning

BIGBUF:n

Sets the default BIGBUF buffer
size for disk to n blocks.
Refer to SET DEFAULT BIGBUF
command.

BUFFERS:n

Sets the default number of
disk buffers to n.
Refer to
SET DEFAULT BUFFERS command.

PROTECTION:n

Sets
the
default
file
protection for your job to n.
Refer
to
SET
DEFAULT
PROTECTION command.

/DEFER

Defers queueing of spooled output
log out.

/DSKFUL:arg

Sets the action to be performed if your job
exceeds the disk area allowed to it.
The
arguments are ERROR and PAUSE.
If
the
argument is ERROR,
an error condition is
passed to your job.
This usually terminates
the program.
If the argument is PAUSE, the
program is suspended,
and your
job
is
returned to monitor level.
This allows you
to request operator assistance and
then
continue the job, as long as you do not issue
any commands that destroy your core image.
Refer to the SET DSKFUL command.

/DSKPRI:n

Allows privileged users to set the priority
for
their
job's
disk operations
(data
transfers and head positionings).
The value
can
range from -3 to +3.
The default
timesharing priority is O.
Refer to the SET
DSKPRI command.

/GUIDELINE

Specifies that the numeric value cited in the
/PHYSICAL switch is a guideline.
This is the
default setting for /PHYSICAL.

2-139

until

you

SYSTEM COMMANDS
LOGIN Command

/HELP:keyword

Prints HELP text on your terminal.
Valid
keywords are: ARGUMENTS, SWITCHES, and TEXT.
The ARGUMENTS keyword prints out a list of
valid
switches
and arguments.
SWITCHES
displays only a list of switches.
TEXT will
print the entire HELP text.
TEXT is assumed
if no keyword is supplied.
/HELP may be
abbreviated to /H.

/LIB: [ppn]

Sets the library area (LIB:) to the specified
PPN.

/LIMIT

Specifies that the numeric value specified in
the /PHYSICAL switch is a limit rather than a
guideline.
If /LIMIT is not issued,
the
system assumes that the numeric value given
for the /PHYSICAL switch is a guideline.

/LOCATE:node

Sets the job location to the specified octal
ANF
node
number.
Refer to the LOCATE
command.

/MAILCHECK

Checks the file DSK:MAIL.TXT to see if you
have mail from the MS mail system.
You must
have DECMAIL/MS on your system.
/MAILCHECK
is the default action.

/NAME: "name"

Associates the given
name with your job.
This name will appear on output, listings,
and on other information output by
the
system.
Enclose the name in quotation marks
if it contains non-alphanumeric characters.

/NEW

/NEW causes NEW: ([1,5]) to be searched before
SYS: ([1,4])
whenever SYS:
is specified or
implied.
If the files are not on NEW:,
SYS:
will be searched.
(See Section 1.13 for more
information about NEW:.)

/NODEFER

Does not defer queued output until logout.
Refer to the SET DEFER command.
This is the
default.

/NOMAILCHECK

Suppresses checking the file DSK:MAIL.TXT to
see if you have mail from the MS mail system.

/NONEW

Removes the [1,5] directory (NEW:) from your
SYS:
specification.
This is the default
setting.

/NOSCAN

Cancels the /SCAN switch for the directory
path.
When scanning is set,
the system
searches for files
through
the
entire
directory
path.
Directory
paths
are
described in Section 1.14.
This
switch
disables scanning.
Thus, the system will not
search for files past the specified directory
area.
(Refer
to
the
SETSRC
program
description in the TOPS-10 User utilities
Manual.) /NOSCAN is the default switch.

2-140

SYSTEM COMMANDS

Instructs the system not to change any of
your terminal's characteristics as specified
in your SWITCH.INI file.
The default action
is
that LOGIN reads SWITCH.INI,
setting
terminal
characteristics
according
to
switches specified in the LOGIN line.
Refer
to Appendix B for more information about
SWITCH.INI files.

/NOSFDCREATE

Does not create an SFD that was specified
the directory path.

/NOSTR

Suppresses the printing of SYS:STR.TXT.

/NOSYS

Removes the
SYS:
structure
from
your
DSKspecification,
which is your job's search
list.
Refer to Section 1.12.

/NOTE:file-spec

Prints the specified file after you log in.
The file specification must be included; it
may contain wild-cards.
This switch
is
useful for printing a project notice file
that is kept in a library area.
Refer to
/NOTICE.

/NOTICE:arg

Controls printing of SYS:NOTICE.TXT and the
argument to the /NOTE switch.
The arguments
for /NOTICE are:

ALWAYS

Always prints notices.

SOMETIMES

Prints notices you have not
yet seen.
SOMETIMES is the
default argument.

NEVER

Never prints notices.

/NOWATCH

Suppresses the printing of incremental
job
statistics.
Refer to the SET WATCH command.

/PASSWORD

Allows you to change your password during the
LOGIN
procedure.
Type in your current
password at the Password: prompt.
Then type
in your new password when the monitor prompts
you, and verify it.
Your password will then
be changed.
This switch is ignored under
batch.
The system manager may, at times, set
/PASSWORD on your account, so that when you
log in,
you will have to
change
your
password.

/PATH: [dir]

Specifies a default path for disk I/O.
Refer
to Section 1.14 for further information.

/PHYSICAL:nx

Sets the maximum physical page limit of your
job.
The value n is any decimal number.
The
value x is either K (for 1024-word blocks) or
P
(for 512-word pages).
You can use either
/LIMIT or /GUIDELINE with the
/PHYSICAL
switch.
The default is /GUIDELINE.
Refer to
the SET PHYSICAL command.

2-141

SYSTEM COMMANDS
LOGIN Conunand

/QUOTA:
(str1,str2, ... )
ALL
DSK

Recomputes the disk quota for the specified
structures.
If you specify more than one
struGture,
you must separate the structure
names with conunas, and enclose the list in
parentheses.
However,
if you specify only
one structure,
the parentheses
are
not
required.
If you specify no structures, all
the structures in your job's search list are
assumed.
Instead of (str1,str2, ... ), you can
use ALL or DSK.
ALL
expands
to
all
structures in the system.
DSK expands to all
structures in your search list.

/REMARK: "text"

Specifies a remark string for your job.
If
you include non-alphanumeric characters in
the remark, you must enclose the remark in
quotation marks.

/RUN:file-spec

Runs the specified program inunediately after
LOGIN,
unless
another program has been
designated by the system manager.

/SCAN

Sets the /SCAN switch for the directory path.
When /SCAN is specified, scanning is enabled
for the directory path.
Scanning allows
searches to be made through the complete
path.
If scanning is disabled,
only the
first directory is searched.
(Refer to the
SETSRC program.)

/SETTTY

Sets
your
terminal
characteristics
as
specified in the file SWITCH.INI.
This is
the default function.
Refer to Appendix B
for more information.

/SFDCREATE

creates
an
SFD
on
the
Automatically
structure,
if the SFD was specified as the
directory path,
and if the SFD does not
already exist.
This is the default.

/SFDPROT:nnn

Sets the protection of all
nnn.

/SPOOL:dev or
/ SPOOL: (dev1, ... )
or
/SPOOL:ALL

Adds the specified device(s) to the current
list of those spooled for the job.
Spooling
is the mechanism by which I/O to or from
slow-speed devices is simulated on disk.
Data
temporarily stored on disk can be
automatically output on the specified device
when it becomes available.
These devices can
be spooled:
the line printer
(LPT:),
the
card punch
(CDP:),
the card reader (CDR:),
the paper-tape punch (PTP:), and the plotter
(PLT: ) .

2-142

created

SFDs

SYSTEM COMMANDS
LOGIN Conunand

/STR

Causes all files in the standard system
library
[1,4]
with name ???STR.TXT ~o be
printed on your terminal.
Assume,
for
example,
that there is a file on private
structure "PR:" called PRLSTR.TXT[1,4]
which
says:
"PR:PAYROLL DEBUG PACK -- NOT REAL
DATA". Any user who logged in with /STR
(or
had /STR in his SWITCH.INI file) would have
the warning message printed on his terminal.

/SYS

Adds the SYS:
structure
to
your
DSK:
specification.
Consequently,
if a file is
not found in the directories in your search
list or in your library directory (if /LIB:
[proj,prog] has been specified),
the system
directory [1,4] will then be searched for the
file.

/TERMINAL:
(arg, arg, ... )

Sets
the
terminal
characteristics
specified by the arguments. This switch is
useful for recording terminal characteristics
in your SWITCH.INI file.
Refer to Appendix B
for information about the SWITCH.INI file.
To specify a single argument, type it after
the colon.
To specify two or more arguments,
enclose them in parentheses and separate them
with conunas.
The arguments to the /TERMINAL switch and
their
meanings
are
listed
after
the
description of the switches.
All of the
arguments except those which take values can
be preceded by NO to turn off the function of
the argument.

/TIME:n

Sets a central processor time limit of n
seconds for a
job. When the time limit is
reached, the system stops the job and prints
a
message.
A
timesharing job can be
continued by typing CONTINUE, but unless the
time is reset with the SET TIME conunand, no
time limit will be in effect.
A batch job
cannot be continued.

/UFDPROT:nnn

Sets the protection of all
nnn.

/VIRTUAL:n

Specifies the current virtual page limit,
as
represented by n.
(For a description of
CVPL,
see
the
TOPS-I0
Monitor
Calls
Manual.)
In
/VIRTUAL:nK
and
:nP,
K
represents a block, and P a page;
lK equals
1024 words, and IP equals 512 words.
If you
type neither letter, K is assumed.
K can be
specified within the range 1 to 512P.
If you
type /VIRTUAL:O, the value of CVPL, as set by
the system administrator, is used.

created

UFDs

/WATCH:ALL or
Duplicates the SET WATCH conunand, printing
/WATCH (arg,arg ... ) messages automatically according
to
the
argument.
See
the
SET
WATCH conunand
description for a list of arguments and their
uses.
2-143

SYSTEM COMMANDS
LOGIN Command
Arguments to /TERMINAL
Meaning

Argument

ALTMODE
NOALTMODE

Converts the ASCII characters 175 and 176 to
ALTmode (ESCape).
If you use NOALTMODE,
175
and 176 regaln their original identity as
right brace (]) and tilde (~).
The default
setting is NOALTMODE.

BLANKS
NOBLANKS

Prints blank lines during output to the
terminal.
NOBLANKS is often used on
a
display terminal to conserve space on the
screen.
The default setting is BLANKS.

CRLF
NOCRLF

Prints an automatic carriage-return/line-feed
at the end of each line.
The width of this
line is set with WIDTH.
NOCRLF suppresses
the automatic carriage-return/line-feed.
The
default is CRLF.

DEBREAK
NODEBREAK

No longer supported.

DEFER
NODEFER

Suppresses echoing of the characters you type
until output to the terminal is finished.
For example,
when the system is sending
output to your terminal and you type another
command,
the system will echo the characters
as it is printing output on your terminal.
DEFER holds the characters you type until the
output is finished.
NODEFER is the default
setting.
For
video
terminals,
it is
recommended that you set DEFER.

DISPLAY
NODISPLAY

Informs the system that you have a display
terminal.
Your programs
can
use
this
information
when sending output to your
terminal.
NO DISPLAY turns off the DISPLAY
function.

ECHO
NOECHO

Prints ~he characters
you type on your
terminal.
This puts your terminal in full
duplex mode.
NOECHO puts your terminal in
half duplex mode.
That is,
the characters
you type are not printed on your terminal.

FILL:n
NOFILL

Controls the filler class of the terminal.
This effects the output of filler characters.
NOFILL is the equivalent to FILL:O.

FORM
NOFORM

Sends
eight
line-feeds
for every FORM
character,
and four line-feeds for
each
vertical tab.
NOFOP~
does not send the
line-feeds.

GAG
NOGAG

Suppresses any messages sent by the SEND
command when your job is in user mode.
This
does not affect messages from the operator.
NOGAG allows you to receive messages at any
stage of your job.

2-144

SYSTEM COMMANDS
LOGIN Command

LC
NOLC

Allows
the
system
to
print lowercase
characters on your terminal when echoing
characters from your terminal.
This argument
is used on terminals that have lowercase
ability
but
are not printing lowercase
characters. NOLC makes the system translate
all input characters to uppercase as they are
transmitted.

LENGTH:n

Sets the terminal page length to n lines.

RCVSPEED:nnnn

Sets the speed at which your
receive characters to n baud.

RTCOMP
NORTCOMP

Controls the function of CTRL/R and CTRL/T.
NORTCOMP
makes
the
control
characters
function as they are described in ~ection
1.6. RTCOMP prevents them from functioning
this way,
which is useful when you plan to
run a program that uses CTRL/R and CTRL/T for
other purposes.

SBELL
NOSBELL

Rings
the
bell
when output is stopped
automatically
by
the
system.
NOSBELL
suppresses the terminal bell when output is
stopped automatically by the system.

SPEED:nnnn

Sets the receiving and transmitting speed
your terminal to n baud.

SSTOP:n

Sets the terminal to stop output
lines,
where n is page length,
intermittent <CTRL/Q>s.

after n
ignoring

STOP:n

Sets the terminal to stop output
lines, where n is page length.

after

TABS
NOTABS

Informs the system that your terminal has
tab stops. NOTABS informs the system that
your terminal does not have tab stops.
The
system will then simulate tab stops for your
terminal.

TME
NOTME

Informs the system that your terminal has
paper tape output.
This changes the function
of CTRL/S and CTRL/Q to control the paper
tape.
NOTME restores the function of CTRL/S
and CTRL/Q. Refer to Section 1.6.

TIDY
NOTIDY

No longer supported.

TYPE:nnnn

Specifies the type of terminal.
This informs
the system that your terminal is of the type
nnnn.
This
sets
some
characteristics
automatically.
For
a complete list of
supported terminal types, type:
HELP

terminal

will

A portion of the information returned is a
list of terminal types supported by the
monitor.
2-145

SYSTEM COMMANDS
LOGIN Command
UC
NOUC

Tells
the system to translate all
the
characters that it
receives
from
your
terminal
to upper case.
NOUC does not
translate the characters.

WIDTH:n

Sets the width of the terminal screen to n.
Used in conjunction with CRLF, this controls
the automatic RETURNs that are output at
monitor level.

XMTSPEED:n

Sets the speed at which your
send characters to n baud.

XONXOF
NOXONXOF

Allows you to use CTRL/S and CTRL/Q to
control the
output
to
your
terminal.
NOXONXOF prevents the system from stopping
terminal·output automatically.

terminal

will

Characteristics
Returns your terminal to monitor
specified in ACTDAE.SYS.

level or starts

a program

Associated Messages
If you are already logged in when you issue
the monitor prints:

the

command,

?PLEASE KJOB OR DETACH
If the system is running the maximum number of jobs it can
handle,
you will not be able to log in.
When you issue a LOGIN
command, you will receive the message:
?JOB CAPACITY EXCEEDED
In this event, wait a few minutes, then try again.
Examples
1.

To gain access to the system, log in with your user
follows:

name

.LOGIN MCWILLIAMS
JOB 42 RZ373B KL#1026/1042 TTY363
If you do not type your project-programmer number or your
user name on the same line as the LOGIN command, LOGIN
prompts you for that information with a number sign (#)
. LOGIN<RET>
JOB 29 RZ373B KL #1026/1042 TTY220
#10,6073<RET>
LOGIN prints
followed by
number.

your assigned
monitor name,

PASSWORD: <RET>

2-146

job number
(job number 29),
version number,
and terminal

SYSTEM COMMANDS
LOGIN Command

The system prompts you for your password.
You type your
password followed by a carriage-return.
To maintain password
security, the monit6r does not echo your password.
On
terminals with local-copy
(see the TOPS-I0 Monitor Calls
Manual), a mask is printed to make your password unreadable.
[LGNLAS Last
access
dd-mmm-yy:hh:mm:ss]
hh:mm dd-mmm-yy MON

[10,6073]

succeeded

If your entries are correct,
the system responds with a
message indicating when the last attempt to login to your
account was, and whether it was successful time, date, day of
the week,
the message of the day (if any), and a period,
indicating readiness to accept another command.
2.

The following example illustrates the process of detaching a
job,
logging in a second job, detaching the second job and
logging in a third job.
Fir~t,
detach the job that is
currently running:
.DETACH<RET>
FROM JOB 52
Then log in again:
.LOGIN 27,5434<RET>
JOB 54 RZ125A KL #1022/1046 TTY213
PASSWORD: <RET>
OTHER JOBS DETACHED WITH SAME PPN:
JOB 52 PIP STOPPED
DO YOU WANT TO ATTACH TO THIS JOB?
[Y] NO<RET>
[LGNJSP OTHER JOBS SAME PPN:52]
[LGNLAS Last access to [27,5434] succeeded on
dd-mmm-yy:hh:mm:ss]
hh:mm dd-mmm-yy
MON
When you log in, if you have a detached job (logged in with
/ATTACH:ASK),
LOGIN prompts you whether you want to log in a
new job or attach to the existing job.
(To suppress this
function,
use the /ATTACH:IGNORE switch when you log in.) To
log in a new job at this point, type NO and press RETURN.
If
you type YES or just press RETURN, your terminal will be
attached to the existing job.
Detaching a job is useful when you are running a program you
expect to run for a long time.
If you want to allow such a
program to run,
while you start another job,
use the
CCONTINUE command.
For example, start a DIRECTORY search of
SYS:
.DIRECT EXEVER.SYS=SYS:*.EXE/PRVERSION<RET>

AC
AC

.CCONTINUE<RET>
The DIRECT program continues to search for files in SYS:
with the extension
.EXE,
and stores them in EXEVER.SYS.
Meanwhile, you can log in a third job.

2-147

SYSTEM COMMANDS
LOGIN Command
To log in a third job, first detach the second:
.DETACH<RET>
FROM JOB 54
Log in:
.LOGIN 27,5434/ATTACH:TGNORE<RET>
JOB 55 RZ125A KL #1022/1046 TTY213
PASSWORD: <RET>
[LGNJSP OTHER JOBS SAME PPN:52,54]
[LGNLAS Last access to [27,5434] succeeded on
dd-mmm-yy:hh:mm:ss]
hh:mm dd-mmm-yy
MON

The /ATTACH:IGNORE switch was used here to suppress the
question about existing detached jobs.
To log in a new job,
as here, press RETURN.
When the DIRECT program is finished running (as may be seen
using SYSDPY),
you may want to attach back to job 54.
In
this case, detach the current job, or log out:
.K<RET>
[LGTOUL OTHER USERS LOGGED-IN UNDER [27,5434], JOBS:52,54]
JOB 55 USER MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
LOGGED-OFF TTY64 AT hh:mm:ss ON dd-mmm-yy
RUNTIME: 0:05:33, KCS:64, CONNECT TIME: 1:45:20
DISK READS: 1534, WRITES: 105, BLOCKS SAVED: 2513
Then log in again:
.LOGIN 27,5434
JOB 36 RZ125A KL #1022/1046 TTY213
PASSWORD: <RET>
OTHER JOBS DETACHED WITH SAME PPN:
JOB 52 PIP STOPPED
JOB 54 DIRECT RUNNING
TYPE JOB NUMBER TO ATTACH OR CARRIAGE-RETURN TO LOGIN
NEW JOB:54<RET>
.ATTACH 54[27,5434]
[LGNATJ ATTACHING TO JOB 52 IN USER MODE]
TOTAL OF 344 FILES
LOGIN prints a message after attaching to the running job.
This message informs you that the job is in the process of
running.
Then DIRECTORY prints a 'message showing the total
number of files found.

2-148

SYSTEM COMMANDS
MAIL Conunand
MAIL Command

Function

The MAIL conunand starts up a program to send, receive, and store
messages to and from other users. For complete details, refer to
the TOPS-10/TOPS-20 DECmail/MS Manual.
Format

MAIL
Characteristics

Runs the MS program.
Requires LOGIN.
Destroys your core image.
Places your terminal at user level.
Example

Start up MS, then exit .
. MAIL<RET>
MS>EXIT<RET>

2-149

SYSTEM COMMANDS
MAKE Conunand
MAKE Command

Function
The MAKE conunand creates a new file on the disk with TECO
(Text
Editor and Corrector).
If a file already exists with the same
name, the system prints a warning message.
If you continue
despite this warning, the system program supersedes the file.
If
you type two CTRL/Cs to leave TECO, the program does not destroy
the
file.
(See the TECO manual in the TOPS-10 Software
Notebooks. )
Format
MAKE dev:file.ext[directory]
Where:

dev: is the device or file structure name on which the
system creates the file.
If you omit it, the system
assumes DSK:.
file.ext is any legal file name and
file
name
extension.
The file name is required; the file name
extension is optional.
[directory] is the directory area in which the system
creates the file.
If you omit this argument, the
system assumes your default directory area
(that is,
your project-progranuner number).
Note that the default
directory can be an SFD or a UFD.

You can pass switches to TECO if you precede each switch
slash in the MAKE conunand string.
Characteristics
Place your terminal at user level.
Destroys your core image.
Example
Create a file named TEXT3.MAI .
. MAKE TEXT3.MAI<RET>
*EX<ESC><ESC>
Exit from TECO.
Use DIRECTORY to see the file .
. DIR TEXT3<RET>
TEXT3

MAl

<055>

dd-mnun-yy

2-150

DSKC: [27,5434]

with

SYSTEM COMMANDS
MERGE Command
MERGE Command

Function
The MERGE command combines the low segment of an executable
in the specified file with the program that is currently
ln memory.
The MERGE command, like the GET command,
does not
start execution of the program. MERGE is used to load page fault
handlers and DDT.
~rogram

Format
MERGE dev:file.ext[directory]
Where:

/switch

dev: is the logical or name of the device containing
the program you want to merge into core.
The default
device is DSK:.
file.ext is the name of the file containing the program
you w~nt to merge into core.
You must specify the file
name.
The file extension defaults to .EXE.
[directory] is the directory name, required only if the
core image file is located in a disk area other than
yours.
The default is the directory area that you
logged in to.
/switch is the following option:
/USE:n

Specifies the octal section number, (n), into
which a program is merged. Valid section
numbers are 0-37, octal.

Characteristics
Places your terminal at user level.
Requires LOGIN.
Changes your core image.
Example
Type two programs .
. TY FIRST.MAC<RET>
FIRST:
RESET
JRST
700000
END
FIRST
.TY SECOND.MAC<RET>
.PSECT FOO,700000
SECOND:
OUTSTR [ASCIZ/
EXECUTION AT 700000
/]
EXIT
END

2-151

SYSTEM COMMANDS
MERGE Command
Compile the programs .
. COMPILE FIRST.MAC<RET>
MACRO:
. MAIN
EXIT
.COMPILE SECOND.MAC<RET>
MACRO:
. MAIN
EXIT
Run LINK and save the files .
. R LINK<RET>
*FIRST/SAVE=FIRST/GO<RET>
EXIT
.R LINK<RET>
*SECOND/SAVE=SECOND/GO<RET>
EXIT
Use GET to bring the first program into memory .
. GET FIRST<RET>
JOB SETUP
Use MERGE to bring the second program into memory .
. MERGE SECOND<RET>
SECOND MERGED
Start execution of the programs .
. START<RET>
EXECUTION AT 700000
EXIT
After a successful execution, . examine the memory area.
address 777 is occupied .
. E 777<RET>
000777/ 000000 000000
Address 1000 does not exist .
. E 1000<RET>
?OUT OF BOUNDS
Address 700000 is occupied .
. E 700000<RET>
700000/ 051140 700002
Address 701000 does not exist .
. E 701000<RET>
?OUT OF BOUNDS
2-152

Note that

SYSTEM COMMANDS
MIC Commands
HIC Commands

FWlction

MIC allows you to create a new command by writing any desired
sequence of monitor-mode and user-mode commands in a disk file.
MIC commands are discussed in the file DOC:MICV2.DOC,
on the
system.
MIC is not a supported product.
You may include any of the following commands in your MIC command
file, along with any number of monitor commands.
Commands

BACKTO

Specifies a 1- to 6- character label at which MIC
processing is to resume.
Note that labels in MIC
command files are terminated by ::
and must be at the
beginning of a line.

ERROR/
NOERROR

Specifies a character that is used to denote an error
condition when displayed at the beginning of a line.

GOTO

Specifies a 1- to 6- character label at which MIC
processing is to resume.
Note that labels in MIC
command files are terminated by::
and must be at the
beginning of a line.

Conditionally processes a monitor command.

LET

Allows you to change the value of any user parameters
in a MIC file.
For example,
LET C= "THIS IS C"
substitutes the text within double quotes as the value
of C.

MIC Arg

Allows you to ABORT, SUSPEND, CANCEL, RETURN, or
from MIC processing.

EXIT

OPERATOR/ Specifies
one ASCII character to be treated as
NOOPERATOR introducing a line that requires user attention.
For
example, if· the operator character is output in column
1, MIC suspends output and displays
[BREAK].
After
this,
type the requested information.
Then type
CTRL/P (PROCEED), which will continue the processing
of the command file.
SILENCE/
REVIVE

Suppresses
and
resumes output to the terminal.
You can type another monitor command on the same line
as the SILENCE/REVIVE command.
For example,
.REVIVE.DIR<RET>
causes terminal output to be revived after the
.DIR
command has been typed.
Therefore, only the output
from the .DIR command will be printed on the terminal.

WHENEVER/
ON

Changes the default action whenever a particular
action or event occurs.
ON
and
WHENEVER
are
equivalent commands.

2-153

SYSTEM COMMANDS
MIC Conunands
Example
;A MIC DEMO OF THE ERROR COMMAND
;A MACRO TO COMPARE TWO FILES AND DELETE DSK COpy IF THEY
; ARE THE SAME
.TYPE CHECK.MIC<RET>
.ERROR ?
.R FILCOM<RET>
*TTY:/Q='A.'B<RET>
.DELETE 'A<RET>
;A TYPICAL CALL - CHECK IF DSK:C.MIC IS A COpy OF SYS:C.MIC
.DIRECT/CHECK C.MIC.SYS:<RET>

.ERROR ?
.R FILCOM<RET>
*TTY:/Q=C.MIC,SYS:<RET>
NO DIFFERENCES ENCOUNTERED
*C
.DELETE C.MIC<RET>
FILES DELETED
C.MIC
01 BLOCKS FREED
;CREATE AN INCORRECT COpy OF C.MIC WITH PIP .
. R PIP<RET>
*C.MIC=TTY:
WRONG FILE
*"C
;AND USE C.MIC TO CHECK IT
.DO CHECK C.MIC,SYS:<RET>

.ERROR ?
.R FILCOM<RET>
*TTY:/Q=C.MIC,SYS:<RET>
FILE 1) DSK:C.MIC
CREATED: 1349
FILE 2) SYS:C.MIC
CREATED: 1202
?FILES ARE DIFFERENT
* [ABORT ON ERROR]
"C

2-154

dd-nunm-yyyy
dd-nunm-yyyy

SYSTEM COMMANDS

MOUNT Command
MOUNT Command

Function

The MOUNT command requests ownership of a device.
Because MOUNT
calls for action by the operator, the command is not complete
(the monitor prompt is not printed on your terminal)
until the
operator has mounted the device.
If more than one volume in the
volume set must be mounted at one time, the system ensures that
the resources will be available. Volumes that must be mounted
sequentially,
such as tape volume sets,
will
be
mounted
automatically.
Therefore,
you use MOUNT only once for each
volume set.
Resources are pre-allocated to a job using the ALLOCATE command.
This informs the system of your future need for a resource.
If
you use the MOUNT command without previously using the ALLOCATE
command for the same resource, MOUNT allocates the resource as
well as mounting it.
Note,
however,
that the implicit MOUNT
allocation is. cancelled when you use DISMOUNT. An explicitly
allocated resource remains your property until you use DEALLOCATE
to relinquish it.
You can use MOUNT to assign a logical name to a resource. A tape
volume set must always have a logical name.
Therefore, if you do
not assign a logical name when you allocate or mount a tape
volume
set,
the
system uses the first six alphanumeric
characters, or up to the first non-alphanumeric character, as the
default logical name.
Format

MOUNT resource:log-name/switch/switch ...
Where:

resource is one of the following:

Disk structure or volume set name, such as DSKB:.

Tape volume
s~t
and
identifiers,
such
as
PAY-WK4: (PM34,PM35),
where PAY-WK4 is the name of
the volume set, and (PM34,PM35) is a list of the
names of each tape in the volume set.

A logical name that was previously associated
a resource.

A physical device name.

with

Note that a tape mount request must include a volume
identification.
This is accomplished by including the
volume identifier in the resource name, or by using the
/SCRATCH, /VOLID or /REELID switch in the command line.
log-name is the logical name you assign to the device
that you will use.
The logical name can be up to 6
alphanumeric characters.
The logical name is optional.
Disk volume sets do not require a logical name, but you
can assign one.
Tape volume sets must have a logical
name.
If you do not assign a logical name to a tape
volume set, the default logical name will be derived
from
the
volume set name,
using the first six
characters,
or up to the
first
non-alphanumeric
character.

2-155

SYSTEM COMMANDS
MOUNT Command
If you assigned a logical name to the resource by
ALLOCATE command, you can mount the device by typing:

using

the

MOUNT log-name/switch/switch ...
Any switches that you specified in a previous ALLOCATE command,
using the same resource name, become effective when you MOUNT the
resource.
However, you cannot specify any switches with MOUNT to
change the switches you specified in the ALLOCATE command. Also,
you cannot specify any further switches with the MOUNT command,
except for non-status-setting switches such as /REMARK.
This is
because defaults are assumed when the request is ALLOCATEd.
NOTE
To MOUNT more than one device at a time, separate
the volume set identifications with a comma (,).
You can obtain a list of all the requests in the mount
typing MOUNT with no arguments or switches.

queue

The following is a list of the switches you can use with MOUNT.
Some switches apply to both tape and disk volume sets, other
switches apply to one or the other.
The center column indicates
the kind of volume set the switch applies to.

Switch

Device

Function

/ACTIVE

Disk

Requests that the volume set be placed
in
your
job's active search list.
(Refer to the SETSRC program description
in the TOPS-10 User utilities Manual.)
The structure will become part of the
list that the system automatically uses
to search for a file.
This is the
default function.
This switch is the
complement to /PASSIVE.

/CHECK

Tape
Disk

Prints on your terminal
a list of the
mount requests made by your job.

/CREATE

Disk

Allows files to be created on
the
structure.
This
switch
is
the
complement
/NOCREATE.
This
switch
implies the /ACTIVE switch.

/DENSITY:n-BPI

Tape

Specifies
the
recording
density
(bits-per-inch)
of the volume set.
The
argument (n) can be:
200,
556,
800,
1600,
or 6250.
The -BPI portion of the
value is optional.

/DISK

Disk

Identifies the
volume set.

/EXCLUSIVE

Disk

Ensures that you will
access to the volume
users will be allowed
resource.
You
must
project number as the
volume set.

2-156

volume

set

disk

have exclusive
set.
No other
to a.ccess the
have the same
owner of the

SYSTEM COMMANDS
MOUNT Conunand
/HELP

Tape
Disk

Prints a
brief
MOUNT conunand.

description

the

/LABEL-TYPE:
arg

Tape

Specifies the kind of label processing
to be used and indicates the label
status of the tape.
The label type is
used to ensure that the correct tape has
been mounted.
The arguments and their
meanings are:
ANSI

The
label
is
formatted
according to ANSI standards.

BLP
BYPASS

The tape mayor may not have
labels, but it is treated as
if it were unlabeled.
This
argument can only be used by
privileged users.

EBCDIC
IBM

The
label
in EBCDIC

formatted

NOLABELS The tape does not have
a
NONE
standard label.
You will not
UNLABELED be
informed
when
the
end-of-tape is reached.
USER-EOT

The
tape
does
not
have
standard labels.
However, it
may have user labels.
When
the end-of-tape is reached,
the user is notified.
This is
useful for programs such as
BACKUP.

/NEW-VOLUME-SET Tape

Specifies that a new volume set is going
to be created.
The operator will choose
a new tape or tapes for you.
This
switch implies /WRITE-ENABLE.

/NOCREATE

Disk

Prevents the creation of files on this
volume set unless you specify the volume
set when you write the files.
This
switch is the complement to /CREATE and
it implies /ACTIVE.

/NONOTIFY

Tape
Disk

Does not notify you when your request is
finished.
This is the default function.

2-157

SYSTEM COMMANDS
MOUNT Command

/NOTIFY

Tape
Disk

Sets the system to inform you when the
resource is mounted or dismounted.
The
system sends a message to your terminal
when any of the following occurs:
o

The resource is physically mounted.

The resource is dismounted by the
operator without a request by your
job.

Another volume in a tape volume
is mounted.

set

The disk structure is locked
unlocked by the operator.

/NOWAIT

Tape
Disk

Allows you to continue working on the
system before the resource is mounted.
This switch implies /NOTIFY and it is
the complement to /WAIT.

/PASSIVE

Disk

Requests that the structure be placed in
your job's passive search list.
(Refer
to the SETSRC program.) The system will
not search for files on this structure
unless you specify the structure name in
the file specification.
This switch is
the complement to /ACTIVE.

/QUOTA

Disk

Recomputes the usage
specified structure.

/READ-ONLY

Tape
Disk

Specifies that you will not write on the
volume set.
Tape volume sets will be
checked as they are mounted, to ensure
that they are not write-enabled.
This
is the default for tape volume sets.

quota

the

On disk volume sets,
the monitor will
not update access dates.
If you specify
/EXCLUSIVE and /READ-ONLY, the operator
may write-protect the volume set.
This switch supersedes
and /WRITE:NO.

/RONLY,

/WLOCK,

/REMARK: "text"

Tape
Disk

Allows you to send a message to the
operator identifying the volume to be
mounted.
The argument (text) can be up
to 50 characters long.
Use quotation
marks if the text contains spaces or
punctuation.

/SCRATCH

Tape

Instructs the operator to
mount
a
scratch tape.
The operator will select
a tape that is blank, with the intention
of
keeping
the tape when you are
finished with it.
This switch implies
/WRITE-ENABLE.

2-158

SYSTEM COMMANDS
MOUNT Command

/SHARABLE

Disk

Allows other users
to
access
the
resource.
This is the default function.
This switch is
the
complement
to
/EXCLUSIVE.

/TAPE

Tape

Specifies that the volume set is a tape
volume set.
This switch is required
when the volume set has the same name as
a cataloged disk volume set.

/TRACKS:n

Tape

Specifies the number of tracks on the
tape.
The value of n can be 7 or 9.

/USER: [ppn]

Tape
Disk

Prints on your terminal a list of
requests for a particular user.

/VOLID:volid

Tape

/WAIT

Tape
Disk

Ensures that the volume set will be
mounted before you continue working on
the
system.
This
is the default
function.
This switch is the complement
to /NOWAIT.

/WRITE-ENABLE

Tape
Disk

Ensures
volume
checks
be sure
is the
sets.

all

that you can write on the
set.
For tape,
the
monitor
each volume as it is mounted, to
that it is write-enabled.
This
default function for disk volume

Associated Commands

ALLOCATE

Informs the system of your
resource.

DISMOUNT

Removes the specified volume set from your
job
search list.
If no other users are accessing
the resource, and it is not a system structure,
the volume set will be dismounted from the unit.

DEALLOCATE

Removes the resource from
allocated resources.

SHOW ALLOCATION

Prints a list of the
mounted for your job.

SHOW QUEUE

Prints a list of the jobs in the system queues.

Characteristics

Runs the QUEUE program.
Deitroys your core image.
Requires LOGIN.
2-159

future

your

resources

need

job's

for

list

allocated

and

SYSTEM COMMANDS
MOUNT Conunand
Example

The following example shows the use of the ALLOCATE,
DEALLOCATE,
MOUNT, DISMOUNT, and SHOW ALLOCATION conunands.
The resources are
reserved for a multivolume tape volume set with the ALLOCATE
conunand.
The name of the volume set is TAPE-SET, and it contains
three volumes.
The logical name TS is assigned to the tape set.
The tape is write enabled, and it does not have standard labels .
. ALLOCATE
TAPE-SET (VOL1,VOL2,VOL3) : TS/WRITE-ENABLE/LABEL:NONE<RET>
[ALLOCATE REQUEST TS QUEUED, REQUESTS #672]
A file structure named DSKR: is mounted for the job:
.MOUNT DSKR:<RET>
[MOUNT REQUEST DSKR QUEUED, REQUEST #673]
[STRUCTURE DSKR MOUNTED]
The job's resources are shown using the SHOW ALLOCATION conunand:
ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
VOLUME SET
RESOURCES
TYPE

--------------------- -----------------

DSKB
DSKC
DSKR
TAPE-SET
TAPE-SET
TAPE-SET

9 TK 800/1600
RP06
RP20
DSKB
DSKC
DSKR
VOL1
VOL2
VOL3

ALL

OWN

1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

0
2
1
1
1
1
0
0
0

-----------MAGTAPE UNIT
DISK UNIT
DISK UNIT
STRUCTURE
STRUCTURE
STRUCTURE
MAGTAPE VOL.
MAGTAPE VOL.
MAGTAPE VOL.

The tape set is mounted, and the resources are again displayed:
.MOUNT TS<RET>
[MOUNT REQUEST TS QUEUED, REQUEST #673]
[MAGTAPE TS MOUNTED]
. SHOW ALLOCATION<RET>
ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
VOLUME SET
RESOURCES
TYPE
ALL
--------------------- ----------------- - - - - - - --- - --9TK 800/1600
MAGTAPE UNIT 1
RP06
DISK UNIT
2
RP20
DISK UNIT
1
DSKB
DSKB
STRUCTURE
1
DSKC
DSKC
STRUCTURE
1
DSKR
DSKR
STRUCTURE
1
TAPE-SET
VOL1
MAGTAPE VOL.
1
TAPE-SET
VOL2
MAGTAPE VOL.
1
TAPE-SET
VOL3
MAGTAPE VOL.
1

OWN
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
0
0

After work is finished by accessing the tape set and the
structure,
the structure is dismounted.
Because the structure
was not explicitly allocated, it is automatically deallocated .
. DISMOUNT DSKR<RET>
[STRUCTURE DSKR DISMOUNTED]

2-160

SYSTEM COMMANDS
MOUNT Command

The tape volume set is dismounted:
.DISMOUNT TS<RET>
[VOLUME SET TS DISMOUNTED]
The job's resources are displayed:
. SHOW ALLOCATION<RET>
ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
VOLUME SET
RESOURCES
TYPE
ALL
--------------------- ----------------- -----------9 TK 800/1600
MAGTAPE UNIT 1
RP06
DISK UNIT
1
RP20
DISK UNIT
1
DSKB
DSKB
STRUCTURE
1
DSKC
DSKC
STRUCTURE
1
VOL1
TAPE-SET
MAGTAPE VOL.
1
VOL2
TAPE-SET
MAGTAPE VOL.
1
TAPE-SET
VOL3
MAGTAPE VOL.
1
At this point, the tape set can again be mounted, or it
dismounted
and released from your job.
The tape
deallocated:

OWN
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
can
set

.DEALLOCATED TS<RET>
[VOLUME SET TS HAS BEEN DEALLOCATED]
. SHOW ALLOCATION<RET>
ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
RESOURCES
VOLUME SET
TYPE
ALL
--------------------- ----------------- -----------RP06
DISK UNIT
1
RP20
DISK UNIT
1
DSKB
DSKB
STRUCTURE
1
DSKC
DSKC
STRUCTURE
1

2-161

OWN
1
1
1
1

be
is

SYSTEM COMMANDS
NETWORK Command
NETWORK Command

Function

The NETWORK command prints information about the nodes in an
ANF-IO and/or DECnet-10 network environment.
Your terminal must
be attached to one of the nodes in the network to use this
command.
You can use the NETWORK command to obtain information
about the other nodes in either type of network,
and about the
device configuration of each node in the ANF-IO network.
You can specify the node-name or node-number in the ANF-IO
network, or just node-name in the DECnet-10 network, to limit the
output to specific nodes.
You can use switches to change the
output format.
NETWORK reads your SWITCH.INI file and accepts indirect commands.
The indirect command files should be formatted as follows:
node-list/switch/switch ...
Indirect command files are discussed in Appendix C.
Formats

NETWORK node-list/switch
Where:

node-list is the node-names or node-numbers
(ANF-IO),
or
just node-names (DECnet-10), of nodes for which you
want information.
If you do not specify the node-list,
information is output for every node in the network.
The node-names or node-numbers
(ANF-10),
or
just
node-names (DECnet-10) are separated by commas.

You can use the wildcard construction in the command string.
The
node name, or any part of the node name, can be replaced by * or
? to represent groups of nodes.
Wildcards are discussed in
Section 1.11.
The switches to NETWORK allow you to specify:
o

The format of the output.

The configurations that you want to examine.
NOTE
You use switches to select a node with or without a
specific attribute.
Use the proper switch, or prefix
the switch with NO.
If you do not use the switch, the
selection
of a node does not depend upon that
attribute.
If you do not specify a node, the default
output is /BRIEF.
The command line takes the format specified below:
NETWORK node-name,
node-number, ... /switch/switch ...
You can repeat node names, but not switches.

2-162

SYSTEM COMMANDS
NETWORK Command

The switches to the NETWORK command follow.
Output Control Switches
Switch

Function

/ANF10

Forces output of ANF-10 information.

/BRIEF

Suppresses the output of a list of devices for
each node.
This 1S the default if you do not
specify a node-list in the command string.

/COST

Controls the listing of the physical link
associated with the /TOPOLOGY switch.

/DECNET

Forces output of DECnet-10 information.

/ERROR

Prints all error messages.

/FAST

Prints only the name and number of the nodes.
If
you
also specify /NOBRIEF,
the configuration
information is printed.

/HEADER

Prints header information.
action.

/HELP

Prints a description of the NETWORK command.

/LAT

Prints LAT terminal server information.

/NOANF10

Suppresses output of ANF-10 information.

/NOBRIEF

Prints a list of the devices on each node.
is the default if you specify a node-list.

/NOCOST

Suppresses the listing of the physical link "cost"
associated with the /TOPOLOGY switch.

/NODECNET

Suppresses output of DECnet-10 information.

/NOERROR

Suppresses the output of error messages.

/NOFAST

Suppresses printing the name and number of
nodes.
If
you
also specify /NOBRIEF,
configuration information is suppressed.

/NOHEADER

Suppresses output of header information.

/NOLAT

Suppresses LAT terminal server information.

/NOSILENCE

Prints all information.

/NOSORT

Suppresses sorting of the nodes according to
number.

node

/NOTOPOLOGY

Suppresses
network.

the

/SILENCE

Prints only error messages.

/SORT

Sorts the nodes according to node number.

printing

2-163

"cost"

This is the default.

This

the

default

This

the
the

This is the default.

the

topology

SYSTEM COMMANDS
NETWORK Command
/TOPOLOGY

Prints the topology of the network as a node name
and number followed by its neighbors' numbers.
Each neighbor has a physical link "cost" following
it in parentheses unless you also include the
/NOCOST switch.

ANF-IO Node Selection Switches
Switch

Function

/CDP

Prints only nodes that have card-punch devices.

/CDR

Prints only nodes that have card readers.

/DTA

Prints only nodes that have DECtape units.

/LPT

Prints only nodes that have line printers.

/MCR

Prints only nodes that have command interpreters
(monitors).
MCR signifies that the node is a host
system.

/MTA

Prints only nodes that have magnetic tape units.

/NOCDP

Prints only nodes
devices.

/NOCDR

Prints only nodes that do not have card readers.

/NODTA

Prints only nodes that do not have DECtape units.

/NOLPT

Prints only nodes that do not have line printers.

/NOMCR

Prints only nodes
interpreters.

/NOMTA

Prints only nodes that do not have
units.

/NOPLT

Prints only nodes that do not have plotters.

/NOPTP

Prints only nodes that
punch units.

not

have

paper

tape

/NOPTR

Prints only nodes that
readers.

not

have

paper

tape

/NORDA

Prints only nodes that do not have RDX devices.
RDX devices control lines from high-speed input
(block-mode) terminals.

/NOTSK

Prints only nodes that do not have TSK:

/NOTTY

Prints only nodes that do not support terminals.

/TYPE:DNxxx

Prints only nodes of the specified type.
This
does not output host nodes.
However, if you use
/TYPE:
with no value, the host nodes are printed.

/PLT

Prints only nodes that have plotters.

2-164

that

have

not

card-punch

have

command

magnetic

tape

devices.

SYSTEM COMMANDS
NETWORK' Conunand
/PTP

Prints only
units.

nodes

that

have

paper

tape

punch

/PTR

Prints only nodes that have paper-tape readers.

/RDA

Prints only nodes that have RDX devices.
RDX
devices
control
lines from high-speed input
(block-mode) terminals.

/TSK

Prints only nodes that have TSK:

/TTY

Prints only nodes that support terminals.

devices.

DECnet-10 Node Selection Switches
Function

Switch
/LINKS

Prints only nodes
logical links.

that

have

one

/NOLINKS

Prints only nodes that do not
open logical links.

have

one

open

/NOUNREACHABLE Suppresses listing of all known DECnet nodes.
/UNREACHABLE

Lists all known DECnet nodes.

Network Topology
The topology of a network is determined by the interconnection of
nodes in a network.
Nodes can be adjacent to each other
connected by a physical link.
They can also be connected with
intermediate nodes.
These connections, with associated costs,
determine the routes (paths) a message takes from one node to
another.
The costs are arbitrary values given to each physical
connection of the network.
The cost of a given route is
determined by the sum of the costs of the physical connections
along that route.
In cases where multiple routes exist between
nodes,
the route with the lowest cost is taken.
In the ANF-10
network, this information is available when you use the /TOPOLOGY
switch.
In the DECnet network,
the /TOPOLOGY switch displays
the
information available for DECnet nodes.
The first two items of
information are the node name and number,
followed by DECnet
routing information for that node.
If the node is unreachable,
then this information
is
placed
in
the
output
line:
"Unreachable." The remaining information columns are left blank
to indicate that information is not available.
If the node is
reachable, then the column shows the circuit name for the initial
routing of a message to that node.
The following columns show cost and number of hops, analogous to
the ANF-10 network topology.
The cost for DECnet is set through
network management functions on a per physical-connection basis.
If you ever form a logical link between your node and the
destination node, information is available for the count of open
logical links and the round-trip delay time in milli-seconds.
Otherwise, this information is not available, and the information
fields are left blank. Example 4 shows the output from the use
of the /TOPOLOGY switch for both ANF-10 and DECnet-10 network.
environments.
2-165

SYSTEM COMMANDS
NETWORK Conunand
Associated Messages

The output from the NETWORK conunand is in one
formats.

the

following

When you do not specify a node-list:
For ANF-I0:
node-name (node-number) system-name system-generation-date
For DECnet-l0:
Node list (node-name)
When you specify a node-list:
For ANF-I0:
node-name (node-number)
system-name system-generation-date
device [number-of-devices] device [number-of-devices]
device [number-of-devices] ...
For DECnet-l0:
same as when you don't specify node names.
Characteristics

Runs the NETWORK program.
Does not require that you be logged in.
Examples
1.

The following example shows the NETWORK conunand and output
when you omit the node-list.
There are 17 nodes in the
ANF-I0 network; five are shown in this example.
There are
183 reachable nodes in the DECnet network; 14 are shown in
this example .
. NETWORK<RET>
[ANFI0 network:
connected to SPIRIT
KLI026(26), 17 nodes]
Node CTCH22
(22)
DN82 V23(174)
Node KLI026
(26)
RC117B KL #1026/1042
Node NEXT
(27)
DN87 V23(173)
Node SPIRIT
(30)
DN87 V23(174)
Node NOVA
(31)
DN87S V23(174)

(30) ,

located

dd-mmm-yy
dd-mmm-yy
dd-mmm-yy
dd-mmm-yy
dd-mmm-yy

[DECnet network: local node KLI026, 183 reachable nodes in
area 7]
ABLE
ADAM
AJAX
ALGOL
ALIEN
ALPHA
ALPINE
BLUE
CACHE
CADVAX CAR
CASTOR CDR
CHAOS
2..

The following example shows the NETWORK conunand when the
node-list is specified. Node-number 33 is valid; node 76 is
invalid .
. NETWORK 33,76<RET>
[ANFI0 network: connected to NOVA(31), located at KLI026(26),
15 nodes]
Node
DWARF
(33)
DN87S V23(174)
28-Sep-82
TSK[2] TTY[64]
%NWKNNN Node 76 not in Network

2-166

SYSTEM COMMANDS
NETWORK Command

The following example shows
/NOTSK switch .

the

use

NETWORK

with

the

. NETWORK/NOTSK<RET>
[ANF10 network: connected to NOVA(31), located at KL1026(26),
15 nodes]
Node
SOFDCP
(75)
DN82 V22E/52A
DN81 V22E/52A
Node
WOBBLE
(143)
[DECnet network: local node KL1026, 182 reachable nodes in
area 7]
ADAM
AJAX
ALGOL
ALIEN
ALPHA
ALPINE
ABACUS ABLE
BAXTER BERGIL BISON
BLUE
CACHE
ANIMAL ARK
CADVAX
CASTOR CDR
CHAOS
CAR
4.

The following example shows the use of the NETWORK command
with
the /TOPOLOGY switch for both ANF-10 and DECnet
networks.
The connected node (the node running your job)
is
KL1026.
KL1026 has a direct line to node ENCORE (32) , node
NOVA(31), ~0de JINX(34) , node DWARF (33) , and node NEXT(27).
Each of these lines costs 10. Therefore, they are equally
acceptable links.
Note that node NEXT (27) has a direct line
to node KL1026(26), but this line costs 62, and is therefore
less acceptable than the line which connects node KL1026 to
node NEXT .
. NETWORK/TOPOLOGY<RET>
[ANF10 network: local node KL1026(26), 17 nodes]
Node
Node
Node
Node
Node
Node
Node
Node
Node
Node
Node

KL1026
CTCH22
KS4101
SOFDCP
TWINKY
WIZARD
NEXT
DWARF
ENCORE
JINX
NOVA

(26)
(22 )
(76)
(75)
(71 )
(123 )
(27 )
(33 )
(32)
(34)
(31 )

32(10)
76 (8)
22 (10)
71 (8)
75 (10)
71 (8)
26(62)
26 (62)
26 (62)
26 (62)
26 (62)

34(10)

33(10) 27(10)

27(10)
6 (8)

123(10)
27 (8)
123 (16) 76 (16)

20 (8)

The DECnet network /TOPOLOGY switch displays cost and
of hops between nodes.
[Decnet
area 7]
Name
LARRY
LYRA

number

network: local node KL1026, 183 reachable nodes in
Number
(7.221)
(7.236)

Line
DTE-0-3
ETH-O

Cost

Hops L.Links Delay

3
1

The following example shows the use of the NETWORK command
for a DECnet Ethernet endnode. An Ethernet endnode does not
know DECnet topology information,
so the system prints a
summary line containing DECnet information .
. NETWORK/DECNET<RET>
[DECnet network:local node KL1026,
running as an Ethernet endnode]

2-167

SYSTEM COMMANDS
NODE Conunand
NODE Command

Function
The NODE conunand prints ANF-10 and DECnet network configuration
information.
If you do not specify a node-id,
the system
displays information about the node to which your terminal is
connected.
If you specify a node-id, the system displays system
configuration information for the node(s) you specified.
To use some conunands (for example, SET HOST), you must know if a
node has a
conunand interpreter.
The NODE conunand displays the
symbol MCR as a device on each ANF-10 node that has a
conunand
interpreter.

Format
NODE node-id
Where:

node-id is a node identifier of a node in the network.
If you specify 0 as the node-id, the host to which your
terminal is connected is printed.
That is, the system
prints the conunand interpreter of your job.
If you do
not specify a node-id, the subject of the output is the
node to which your terminal is connected.

Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Does not destroy your core image.

Associated Messages
When you specify a node-id, the information for ANF-10
displayed in the following format:

nodes

node type node-name (node-num) software-id creation-date
device [number-of-devices] device [number-of-devices] ...
Where node-name is the name of the node, node-num is the node's
number,
software-id is the name and version of the monitor on
that node,
and creation-date is the date of the
monitor
generation.
The second line of output lists each kind of device on the
and the number of devices.

node,

Information for DECnet nodes is displayed in one of the following
formats:
o

DECnet node-name
name

(node-address)

DECnet node-name
router

(node-address) may be reachable via the area

2-168

HOPS:m

COST:n

VIA

circuit

SYSTEM COMMANDS
NODE Command

DECnet node-name (node-address)
designated router

may

reachable

DECnet node-name (node-address) unreachable

via

the

Where node-name is the name of the DECnet node,
node-address is
the DECnet area and node number,
HOPS and COST refer to the
length of the path to that node,
circuit is DTE-cpu-lineno or
ETH-O (on a KL) or KDP-O-lineno (on a KS), and cpu and lineno are
the numbers of the CPU and line through which the node is
reachable.
If the node is in a different DECnet area, or the
system is running as an Ethernet endnode, you will get either the
second
or the third message.
The node is classified as
unreachable only if it is in the same area,
but not currently
running.
Examples

The following example shows the command interpreter to
your terminal is connected .

which

. NODE O<RET>
Local
KL1026(26)
RZ357A KL 1024/1042 mm-dd-yy
MCR[l] TTY[137] CDR[2] LPT[5] PTR[2] PTP[2] PLT[l]
2.

Print the information
ANF-10 nodes:

associated

with

various

DECnet

and

.NODE KL2116<RET>
DECnet

KL2116(7.116) Hops:6 Cost:11 via DTE-0-3

The message indicates KL2116 is available, via DTE .
. NODE ELROND<RET>
DECnet

ELROND(4.19) May be reachable via the area router

The message indicates ELROND mayor may not be reachable, and
is in a different area.
You can only tell if ELROND is
running by attempting a connection .
. NODE NOVA<RET>
ANF
NOVA(31) DN87S V24(226) dd-mmm-yy
TTY[63] LPT[l] TSK[2]
The message indicates NOVA is an ANF-10 node, and
what devices it has .

tells

. NODE VLNVAX<RET>
DECnet

VLNVAX(7.132) Hops:1 Cost:1 via ETH-O

The message indicates VLNVAX is available, via Ethernet.

2-169

you

SYSTEM COMMANDS
NODE Conunand

Print information about a node named
indicates the node does not exist.
NODE BLAND<RET>
?Undefined Network Node

2-170

BLAND.

The

message

SYSTEM COMMANDS
PASSWORD Command
PASSWORD Command

Function
The PASSWORD command allows you to change your current password.
Your password may be a maxi~um of 39 characters.
Your system
administrator may set a minimum password length.
It asks you to confirm the change by typing your new password
again.
If the two (new password and verification) do not match,
the password is unaltered.
Neither old password,
new password,
nor the verification echoes on the terminal.
The command prompts
you for all input.
Format
PASSWORD
Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at
information is supplied.

monitor

level

when

all

required

Requires LOGIN.
Destroys your core image.
Example
This is an example of a successful password change .
. PASSWORD<RET>
You will then be prompted as follows:
is not echoed on the terminal.)
Password:
<RET>
<RET>
New password:
Verification:
<RET>

2-171

(Remember, what

you

type

SYSTEM COMMANDS

PJOB Conunand
PJOB Command

Function

The PJOB conunand prints job information on your terminal.
If you
do not specify a job number, the information printed is about the
job to which you are attached.
You can specify the job number
about which you need information. The PJOB conunand prints the
following information:
job number

~he

The user name

The project-progranuner number

The terminal number

You receive an error message if no job is attached to the default
or specified job number.
If the job is currently detached, the
letters DET and the terminal number are printed.
Format

PJOB job
Where:

job is the number of the job, which is assigned when
you log in.
If you do not specify the job number, the
information printed is about the job you are currently
logged in to.

Characteristics

Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Does not destroy your core image.
Example

Show information about your job .
. PJOB<RET>
JOB 42

USER MANJUSREE

[10,6000]

2-172

TTY101

SYSTEM COMMANDS
PLEASE Command
PLEASE Command

FlUlction

The PLEASE command allows you to communicate with the operator.
You can send a message to the operator, leaving your job at
monitor level, or you can enter a dialogue that allows two-way
communication with the operator.
Formats

PLEASE text<ESC>
This format sends a message to the operator and leaves
at monitor level.

your

job

PLEASE<RET>
This format enters into a dialog with the operator.
This format
is also useful for a message that is more than one line long.
Refer to Example 1.
When you enter dialog mode, you can enter your text either of two
ways:
o

If you type your message and end
it
your job will wait for a
(control-Z) ,
operator.

If you type your message and end it by pressing ESCape,
the
message will go to the operator and your job will be returned
to monitor level.
You may press <ESC> without typing a
message.
Your job will exit to monitor level immediately.

with
reply

<CTRL/Z>
from the

The PLEASE command has two switches:
FlUlction

Switch

/HELP

Prints information on
PLEASE program.

your

terminal

about

the

/NODE: id: :

Specifies the node of the operator you wish to
communicate with.
Use the node name or the node
number for id.
Terminate the node identification
with two colons (::).

Associated Messages

[PLSOPN OPERATOR AT node-id HAS BEEN NOTIFIED AT time]
This message is printed on your terminal when the operator
receives a message from your terminal.
The node-id is the node
where the operator is.
The time is when the operator's terminal
received the message.

2-173

SYSTEM COMMANDS
PLEASE Command
Examples

To enter a dialog with the operator, type
RETURN .

PLEASE

and

press

. PLEASE<RET>
ENTER TEXT, TERMINATE WITH ESCAPE OR AZ
PLEASE responds with the instruction message.
In this case,
you press <CTRL/Z> after the text because you want to wait
for a response from the operator.
DO YOU HAVE THE NEW SOS ON LINE YET?<RET>
I CAN'T FIND IT ON SYS<CTRL/Z>
[PLSOPN OPERATOR AT K1514(14) HAS BEEN NOTIFIED AT 14:03:10]
The operator responds by saying that your request
is
finished.
PLEASE prompts you with the instruction message.
You thank the operator, press <ESC>, and your job returns to
monitor level.
THE NEWEST VERSION OF SOS IS IN NEW
ENTER TEXT, TERMINATE WITH ESCAPE OR AZ
THANKS<ESC>
2.

In this example, you send a one-line message to the operator,
and you wait for a reply .
. PLEASE WHAT TIME IS SYSTEM SHUTDOWN?<RET>
[PLOPSN OPERATOR AT KI514(14) HAS BEEN NOTIFIED AT 14:00:03]
THE SYSTEM WILL GO DOWN AT 6 PM
ENTER TEXT, TERMINATE WITH ESCAPE OR AZ
THANK YOU<ESC>

The message from the operator said that the system would shut
down at 6:00.
You end the dialog by pressing <ESC>.
3.

This example shows the use of PLEASE
message to the operator at node 26 .

send

one-line

. PLEASE/NODE:26: :ANSWER MY MOUNT REQUEST FOR DSKR:<ESC>
[PLSOPN OPERATOR AT KL1026(26) HAS BEEN NOTIFIED AT 14:30:35]

2-174

SYSTEM COMMANDS
PLOT Command
PLOT Command

Function
The PLOT command places entries in the plotter output queue.
Refer to the QUEUE command for further information and examples.
Format
PLOT dev:jobname=file-spec
Where:

dev is the name of the specific device on which yo~r
files should be plotted.
(For example,
PLT2:
1S
plotter number 2.) You can have your files plotted on a
device connected to another node by using the format
PLTSxx:
where xx is the node number.
(For example,
PLTS31 is a plotter on node 31.) The device name is
optional.
jobname is the name of the job being entered into the
queue.
The job name is optional.
The default is the
name of the first file in the request.
The equal sign is required if you specify
device name, the job name, or both.

either

the

file-spec is a single file specification or a string of
file specifications,
separated by commas.
A file
specification is in the form dev:file.ext[directory].
If you specify neither a job name nor a file specification,
the
system prints a list of the jobs in the plotter queue on your
terminal.
The switches to this command can be divided into two categories,
depending on whether the switch can be used only once, or can be
used more times, in a single command string.
The two categories
are:
o

Queue-Operation Switches
These switches can be used only once in the command string.
They affect the entire request,
and you can place them
anywhere in the command string.
If you have used one of
these switches in a command string, you cannot use it again
in the same string. Many switches have a
INa construction,
which has a negative effect.
Be sure you do not use the INa
construction of a switch" in the same command string with the
positive construction.

File-Control Switches
These switches can be used any number of times in the command
string.
You can also use the INa construction of a switch in
the same command string with the positive construction.
To
achieve a temporary or"permanent effect by the placement of
the switch, refer to Section 1.8.4.

2-175

SYSTEM COMMANDS
PLOT Conunand
Switch

Category

Function

/ABEFORE:
date-time

File
control

Queues the file only if the access
date is before the specified date
and time.

/ACCOUNT:
"string"

Queue
operation

Specifies the account to which the
job should be charged.
If the
account
string
contains
any
nonalphanumeric
characters,
you
must
enclose
the
string
in
quotation marks.

/AFTER:
date-time

Queue
operation

Processes the request after
specified date and time.

/ALLFILES:
YES or NO

Queue
operation

Accepts a request only if all of
the files in the request exist. By
default, if any of the files do not
exist, the others will be processed
appropriately.
This
switch
specifies that if any file does not
exist,
no
files
should
be
processed.
The value of YES or NO
is optional.
If you specify YES,
all the files you specified must
exist or none of the files will be
plotted.

/ASINCE:
date-time

File
control

Queues only the files that have
been accessed since the specified
date and time.

/BEFORE:
date-time

File
control

Queues only the files that
created before the specified
and time.

the

were
date

/CHARACTERISTIC: Queue
arg
operation

Specifies an output characteristic.
You can find a
list
of
the
characteristics arguments defined
for your system
in
the
file
SYS:CHARTY.DAT.

/CHECK

Queue
operation

Prints on your terminal a list of
the queue entries made by your job.

/COPIES:n

File
control

Repeats the output the specified
number of times
(n must be less
than 64).
The default is 1 (one
copy) .

/CREATE

Queue
operation

Makes a new entry in the plotter
queue.
This switch is the default,
except when you are listing queue
entries.

2-176

SYSTEM COMMANDS
PLOT Command
/DEFERRED

Queue
operation

Causes
deferred
output
to be
released to the queue.
You must
use one of the following switches
with /DEFERRED:
- /CREATE completes
output requests.

all

released

/KILL
eliminates
output requests.

the

released

Refer to the SET DEFER command
more information and examples.

for

/DELETE

File
control

Deletes the file after
it.
This
is
the
/DISPOSE:DELETE.

processing
same
as

/DESTINATION:
node

Queue
operation

Specifies
the
node
that will
process the output.
Use
this
switch to specify that the file
should be plotted on a plotter that
is connected to the specified node.
Use the node name or the node
number to specify the node.
If a
request is made to a node that does
not exist, the request will wait in
the queue indefinitely.

/DISPOSE:arg

File
control

Controls the disposition of
file after it is queued.
arguments to this switch are:

the
The

DELETE deletes the file from
directory after plotting it.

your

PRESERVE preserves the file after
plotting it.
This is the default
function.
!

RENAME renames the file into the
queuing area, deleting it from your
directory immediately.
/DISTRIBUTION:
"text"

Queue
operation

/ERBINARY

File
control

Prints an error me~sage if a binary
file is included ~n the request.
This is the default function.

/ERNONE

Queue
operation

Prints an error message if no files
match the file specification.
This
is the default function.
2-177

SYSTEM COMMANDS
PLOT Corrunand
/ERPROTECTION

Queue
operation

Prints
an
error
message
if
processing
the
request
would
require a violation of protection
codes.
This
is
the
default
function.

/FAST

Queue
operation

Prints the entries in the queue on
your terminal using a fast format.

/FORMS:arg

Queue
operation

Specifies any special paper to -be
used.
Available forms are listed
in SYS:FORMST.DAT.

/GENERIC

File
control

Sends
output
to
the
first
available plotter.
This is the
default function.
This switch is
the complement to /UNIT.

/HEADER:
YES or NO

File
control

Makes header units before each file
if you specify YES.
Does not make
headers if you specify NO.
1 may
be used for YES; 0 may be used for
NO.
/HEADER:NO is the same as
/NOHEADER.
/HEADER is the default
function.

/HELP:arg

Queue
operation

Prints information on your terminal
about the QUEUE corrunand.
This
switch does not queue any files.
This switch can be used alone or
with
one
of
the
following
arguments:
TEXT prints a message about the
format and switches to the QUEUE
command.
This is the same as /HELP
with no arguments.
SWITCHES prints a list of all the
switches available with the QUEUE
command.

/JOBNAME:name

Queue
operation

Specifies the name of the job.
job name can
be
up
to
alphanumeric characters.

/KILL

Queue
operation

Removes the specified entry from
the queue.
You must specify the
job name, /REQUESTID, or /SEQUENCE,
to the left of the equal sign.

/LENGTH:n:m

File
control

Processes only files whose
is between nand m blocks.

/LIMIT:n

Queue
operation

Limits the output to the specified
number of minutes.

2-178

The
six

length

SYSTEM COMMANDS
PLOT Command

/LIST:arg

Queue
operation

Prints a list of the jobs in the
queue.
If you use /LIST alone,
it
shows the jobs in the queue.
This
is equivalent to using the QUEUE
command with no arguments and no
switches.
/LIST can be abbreviated
to /L.
The switch can also take
one of the following arguments:
ALL shows all data about each queue
request.
FAST shows a fast list of the queue
requests.
(This is the same as
/FAST. )
JOBS shows a list of the
jobs in
the queue.
(This is the same as
/LIST with no arguments.)
SUMMARY shows only the summary line
of the queue display.

/MESSAGE:
arg

Queue
operation

Specifies the amount of information
to be printed when an error occurs
from the request.
You can specify
one or more of
the
following
arguments:
ADDRESS prints the location
in
memory where the error occurred.
CONTINUATION
prints
about the error.
FIRST prints
message.

the

information

one-line

error

PREFIX prints a six-character error
prefix.
/MODIFY

Queue
operation

Alters the specified parameter in
the specified job.
This switch
requires
that
you have access
rights to the
job.
You
must
specify a
job name, /REQUESTID or
/SEQUENCE, to the left of the equal
sign in the command line.

/NEW:
YES or NO

File
control

Accepts the request even
file does not yet exist.

/NOHEADER

File
control

Suppresses header units
file.
/HEADER is
the
function.

for each
default

/NONEW

File
control

Does not accept file specifications
of files that do not exist.
This
is the default function.

/NONOTIFY

Queue
operation

Suppresses notification of your job
when your request is
finished.
This
is
the default function.
Refer to /NOTIFY.
2-179

the

SYSTEM COMMANDS
PLOT Command

/NONULL

Queue
operation

Prints a fatal error message on a
null request.
This is the default
function.

/NOOPTION

Queue
operation

Suppresses
SWITCH. INI .

/NOPHYSICAL

File
control

Recognizes logical names in
command string.
This
is
default function.

/NOSTRS

File
control

When searching structures for file,
uses only the first occurrence.
This is the default function.

/NOTES:text

Queue
operation

Plots
the text
in the header
·columns.
The text can be up to 12
characters, and it must be enclosed
in quotes if it
contains
any
nonalphanumeric characters, such as
spaces.

/NOTIFY:arg

Queue
operation

Notifies you on your terminal when
your request is completed.
To be
notified,
use
/NOTIFY with no
argument, or with YES or 1 as an
argument.
To
suppress
notification,
use
/NOTIFY:O,
/NOTIFY:NO,
or
/NONOTIFY.
By
default, you are not notified when
a request is finished.
In special
cases, such as output of deferred
requests,
you
will
never
be
notified.

/NULL:
YES or NO

Queue
operation

Does
not
print a fatal error
message if the specified files do
not exist.
/NULL:NO is the same as
/NONULL.

/OKBINARY

File
control

Accepts
files
whose extensions
indicate that they include binary
information.
Normally, files with
extensions .SAV, .SHR, .LOW,
.REL,
.EXE, and .HGH will not be accepted
for processing.

/OKNONE

Queue
operation

Does not produce an error message
if no
files
match
the
file
specification.

/OKPROTECTION

Queue
operation

Does not produce an error message
if a file protection
code
is
violated.

/OPTION:option

Queue
operation

Uses the option line QUEUE:option
in t~e SWITCH.INI file.
SWITCH.INI
files are discussed in Appendix B.

/PHYSICAL

File
control

Does'not recognize logical names in
the command line.

2-180

the

option

file
the
the

SYSTEM COMMANDS
PLOT Command

/PLOT:arg

File
control

Plots the file in the specified
mode.
If you omit /PLOT" the file
is plotted according to the data
mode specified in the file.
The
argument can be anyone of the
following:
ASCII plots the file in ASCII mode.
BINARY plots
mode.

the

file

binary

IMAGE plots the file in image mode.
This is the default function.
after
plotting
the
same
as
and it is the

/PRESERVE

File
control

Saves the
file
it.
This
is
/DISPOSE:PRESERVE
default function.

/PRIORITY:n

Queue
operation

'Gives the specified priority number
(n is 1 to 63) to the request.
A
larger number has greater priority.

/PROTECTION:
nnn

Queue
operation

Specifies a protection code for the
queue request.
Queue requests are
protected in the same way that
files are protected.
Refer
to
Section 1.9.4.

/REMOTE

Queue
operation

Prints on your terminal a list of
remote queues. Must be used with
/DESTINATION.

/REQUESTID:n

Queue
operation

Specifies
the
request
identification number of a request
you wish to modify or terminate.
The request identification number
is assigned when the request is
queued.

/RUN:file

Queue
operation

Executes the specified file after
the request is made.

/RUNCORE:n

Queue
operation

Executes the file specified /RUN in
nK of core after the request is
made.

/RUNOFFSET:n

Queue
operation

Executes the file specified in /RUN
offset n after the request is made.

/SEQUENCE:n

Queue
operation

Specifies a sequence number to aid
in identifying a request to be
modified or deleted.

/SINCE:
date-time

File
control

Queues only the files with creation
dates after the specified date and
time.

/STRS:
YES or NO

File
control

Searches
for
the
file on all
structures in the search list and
takes
every
occurrence.
The
default is to take just the first
occurrence of the file.
2-181

SYSTEM COMMANDS
PLOT Command
/TMPFIL:
file:text

Queue
operation

Creates a temporary file TMP:file
and enters the text
into
the
temporary file.

/UNIT:n

Queue
operation

Specifies the unit number
device that you want the
sent to.

/USERNAME:
"name"

Queue
operation

Specifies the user name field for
the banner page of output.
This
field
can
contain
up
to 39
alphanumeric characters,
and may
include punctuation and spaces if
the name is placed in quotation
marks.

of the
output

Associated Messages
When a new entry is made in a system queue, the system prints
message on the user's terminal.
The message is in the form:

[PLOTTER JOB name QUEUED,REQUEST #nnn, LIMIT xxx]
Where:

name is the name of the job in the queue.
This can be
specified by the user in the PLOT command string.
Otherwise, it defaults to the name of the first file in
the request.
nnn is the number that
represents
identification of the job in the queue.

the

request

xxx is the maximum number of minutes that the job
use.

will

Characteristics
Leaves your terminal in monitor level.
Destroys your core image.
Does not require LOGIN
entries.

when you desire a list of the queue

Runs the QUEUE program.
Example
Plot all files with the extension .PLT.
put PLAIN paper on the plotter .

The operator is asked to

. PLOT *.PLT/FORMS:PLAIN<RET>
[PLOTTER JOB MLB QUEUED, REQUEST #172, LIMIT 30]

2-182

SYSTEM COMMANDS
POP Conunand
POP Command

Function

The POP conunand returns your job to a superior job context.
It
reverses the action of a PUSH conunand, destroying the inferior
context and restoring the superior one as the current context.
(Section 1.5 contains a discussion of contexts.)
Format

POP
Characteristics

Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Requires LOGIN.
Destroys the core image of the inferior context and
to the preserved context.

returns

you

Associated Commands

CONTEXT

Allows you to display and manipulate contexts.

PUSH

Creates an inferior context.

Example

The following CONTEXT conunand shows that three of the four
available contexts are in use at this time, as well as 121 of
1,000 available saved-pages.
Use the POP conunand, and then issue
another CONTEXT conunand,
and you can see that one context is
freed, some pages are freed, and the current context
(indicated
by an asterisk (*»
changes from context 3 (BOTLVL) to context 2
(LVLTWO).
Context 3 no longer exists .
. CONTEXT
Contexts used/quota = 3/4, pages used/quota
Context
TOPLVL
LVLTWO
* BOTLVL

Superior
1
2
3

TOPLVL
LVLTWO

Prog
MS
PATH
1
2

121/1000

Idle time
:01:36
12.46

.POP
. CONTEXT
Contexts used/quota = 2/4, pages used/quota
Contexts
TOPLVL
* LVLTWO

Superior
1
2

TOPLVL

Prog
MS
PATH
1

2-183

Idle time
:01:49

100/1000

SYSTEM COMMANDS
PRESERVE Command
PRESERVE Command

Function
The PRESERVE command changes the protection code in the owner
If the system default is
field of the specified file to 1.
If the system default
<055>, PRESERVE changes the code to <155>.
Protection codes
is <057>,
PRESERVE changes the code to <157>.
are described in Section 1.9.4.
This command runs the COMPIL
command before running PIP.

program,

which

interprets

the

NOTE
The actions performed by the PRESERVE command are
meaningful only to the KJOB and LOGIN CUSPs.
Format
PRESERVE file.ext,file.ext, ...
Where:

file.ext is the file name and extension of the file
files to be PRESERVED.
You can use the full wildcard construction
the file name or the extension, or both.

for

either

Associated Command
PROTECT - Allows you to specify the protection code for each file
or all files.
The function of PRESERVE is identical to
the function of PROTECT.
Restrictions
The PRESERVE command has no effect on sub-file directories
is, files with the extension .SFD).
Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Destroys your core image.

2-184

(that

SYSTEM COMMANDS
PRESERVE Command
Example

A DIRECTORY shows that TEST.REL is protected with <055>:
.DIR TEST.*<RET>
dd-nunm-yy
1 <055>
DSKC:
TEST
FOR
[27,5434]
1 <755>
dd-nunm-yy
TEST
SFD
dd-nunm-yy
REL
1 <055>
TEST
1 <055>
dd-nunm-yy
TEST
MAC
TOTAL OF 4 BLOCKS IN 4 FILES ON DSKC: [27,5434]
Use PRESERVE to change the protection code of TEST.REL .
. PRESERVE TEST.REL<RET>
FILES RENAMED:
DSKC:TEST.REL
Show that the protection of TEST.REL is now <155>:
.DIR TEST.*<RET>
dd-nunm-yy
1 <055>
TEST
FOR
DSKC:
[27,5434]
1 <775>
dd-nunm-yy
TEST
SFD
dd-nunm-yy
1 <155>
TEST
REL
dd-nunm-yy
1 <055>
TEST
MAC
TOTAL OF 4 BLOCKS IN 4 FILES ON DSKC: [27,5434]

2-185

SYSTEM COMMANDS
PRINT Conunand
PRINT Command

FWlction
The PRINT conunand queues files to be printed on the line printer.
Refer to the QUEUE conunand for further information and examples.
Format
PRINT dev:jobname=file-spec
Where:

dev:
is the device name of the specific line printer
on which your files are to be printed.
(For example,
LPT2:
is line printer number 2.) You can specify that
your files be printed on a printer on another node by
using the format LPTSxx, where xx is the node number.
(For example,
LPTS31 is a printer on node 31.) The
device name is optional.
jobname is the name of the job being entered into the
queue.
The job name is optional.
The default is the
name of the first file in the request.
The equal sign is required if you specify
job name, or both.

the

device,

file-spec is a single file specification or a string of
file specifications separated by conunas, for the files
being processed. A file specification is in the form
dev:file.ext[directory] .
If you specify neither the job name nor the input specification,
the system prints a list of all the jobs in the lineprinter queue
on your terminal.
You can use the asterisk wildcard construction for the input
specification.
Switches that aid in constructing the queue entry
can appear as part of the input specifications.
The switches to this command can be divided into two categories,
depending on whether the switch 9an be used only once, or can be
used more times, in a single conunand string.
The two categories
are:
o

Queue-Operation Switches
These switches can be used only once in the conunand string.
They affect the entire request,
and you can place them
anywhere in the command string.
If you have used one of
these switches in a command string, you cannot use it again
in the same string. Many switches have a INO construction,
which has a negative effect.
Be sure you do not use the INO
construction of a switch in the same command string with the
positive construction.

File-Control Switches
These switches can be used any number of times in the
conunand string.
You can also use the INO construction of a
switch in the same command string with the
positive
construction.
To achieve a temporary or permanent effect by
the placement of the switch, refer to Section 1.8.4.
2-186

SYSTEM COMMANDS
PRINT Command
Switch

Category

Function

/ABEFORE:
date-time

File
control

Queues the file only if the access
date is before the specified date
and time.

/ACCOUNT:
"string"

Queue
operation

Specifies the account to which the
job should be charged.
If the
account
string
contains
any
nonalphanumeric
characters,
you
must
enclose
the
string
in
quotation marks.

/AFTER:
date-time

Queue
operation

Processes the request after
specified date and time.

/ALLFILES:
YES or NO

Queue
operation

Accepts a request only if all of
the files in the request exist.
By
default, if any of the files do not
exist, the others will be processed
appropriately.
This
switch
specifies that if any file does not
exist,
no
files
should
be
processed.
The value of YES or NO
is optional.
If you specify YES,
all of the specified files must
exist.

/ASINCE:
date-time

File
control

Queues only the files
been accessed since the
date and time.

/BEFORE:
date-time

File
control

Queues only the files with creation
dates before the specified date and
time.

/BEGIN:n

File
control

Starts the output on the
-page.

the

that have
specified

specified

/CHARACTERISTIC: Queue
arg
operation

Specifies an output characteristic.
You can find a
list
of
the
characteristics arguments defined
for your system
in
the
file
SYS:CHARTY.DAT.

/CHECK

Queue
operation

Prints on your terminal a list of
the queue entries made by your job.

/COPIES:n

File
control

Repeats the output
number of times
(n
than 64).

/CREATE

Queue
operation

Makes a new entry in the queue.
This is the default except when you
are listing queue entries.

2-187

the specified
must be less

SYSTEM COMMANDS
PRINT Command
/DEFERRED

Queue
operation

Causes all deferred output to be
released to the system queues.
You
must
use one of the following
switches with /DEFERRED:
/CREATE completes
output requests.

all

released

/KILL
eliminates
output requests.

the

released

Refer to the SET DEFER command
more information and examples.

for

/DELETE

File
control

Deletes the file after printing
it.
This
is
the
same
as
/DISPOSE:DELETE

/DESTINATION:
node

Queue
operation

Specifies
the
node
that will
process the request.
Use
this
switch to specify that the files
are to be printed on a line printer
connected to the specified node.
Use the node name or node number to
specify the node.

/DISPOSE:arg

File
control

Controls the disposition of
file after it is queued.
arguments to this switch are:

the
The

DELETE deletes the file from
directory after printing it.

your

PRESERVE preserves the file after
printing it.
This is the default
function.
RENAME renames the file into the
queuing area, deleting it from your
directory immediately.
/DISTRIBUTION:
"text"

Queue
operation

Specifies text to place in the
distribution field, on the banner
page of output listings.
You can
use this field to include mailing
information,
or the location where
the operator should
leave
the
listing.
The text field may be up
to 39
alphanumeric
characters,
including punctuation and spaces if
the text is placed in quotation
marks.

/ERBINARY

File
control

Prints an error message if a binary
file
is included ln the queue.
This is the default function.

/ERNONE

Queue
operation

Prints an error message if no files
match the file specification.
This
is the default function.

2-188

SYSTEM COMMANDS
PRINT Command

/ERPROTECTION

Queue
operation

Prints
an
error
message
if
processing
the
request
would
require
a
violation
of
file
protection code.
This
is
the
default function.

/FAST

Queue
operation

Prints the entries in the queue on
your terminal in a fast format.

/FILE:
arg

File
control

Specifies the way the file is to be
interpreted.
The
following
arguments can be used with this
switch:
ASCII interprets the file as
text.

ASCII

COBOL interprets the file as
SIXBIT text.

COBOL

FORTRAN interprets the file as a
Fortran data file.
This is the
default
for
files
with
the
extension .DAT.
/FONT:
fontname

Queue
operation

Prints the file using the font
designated in fontname.
Fontnames
vary
from
installation
to
installation.
See
your
system
administrator for a list of valid
font
names.
(Section
1.16
describes how to print a file using
multiple fonts.)

/FORMS:name

Queue
operation

Prints the file on the named forms.
The argument to the switch can be
up to six alphanumeric characters.
Available forms are
listed
in
SYS:FORMST.DAT.

/GENERIC

Queue
operation

Sends output to the next available
line printer. This switch is the
complement to /UNIT.

/HEADER:
YES or NO

File
control

Prints
block
headers
at
the
beginning of the file.
This is the
default function.

/HELP:
arg

Queue
operation

Prints information on your terminal
about the QUEUE command.
This
switch does not queue any files.
This switch can be used
alone
(/HELP)
or
with
one
of the
following arguments:
TEXT prints a message with the
format and switch~s to the QUEUE
command.
This is the same as /HELP
with no arguments.
SWITCHES
switches
command.
2-189

prints a list of all the
available with the QUEUE

SYSTEM COMMANDS
PRINT Command
The
six

/JOBNAME:
name

Queue
operation

Specifies the name of the job.
job name can
be
up
to
alphanumeric characters.

/KILL

Queue
operation

Removes the specified entry from
the queue.
You must include the
job name, /REQUESTID, or /SEQUENCE
to the left of the equal sign in
the command line.
(Refer to the
examples. )

/LENGTH:n:m

File
control

Prints
only files whose length
is between nand m blocks.

/LIMIT:n

Queue
operation

Limits the output to the specified
number of pages.

/LIST:arg

Queue
operation

Prints information about the jobs
in the queue.
If you use /LIST
alone,
it shows the
jobs in the
queue.
This is equivalent to using
the PRINT command with no arguments
and no switches.
/LIST and /LIST:
can be abbreviated to /L and /L:.
The switch can also take one of the
following arguments:
ALL shows all data about. each queue
request.
FAST shows a fast list of the queue
requests.
JOBS shows a list of the
jobs in
the queue.
(This is the same as
/LIST with no arguments.)
SUMMARY shows only the summary line
of the queue display.

/LOWERCASE

Queue
operation

Forces the output to be printed on
a
line printer
with
lowercase
ability.

/MESSAGE:arg

Queue
operation

the

PREFIX prints
error prefix.

the

2-190

information

one-line

error

six-character

SYSTEM COMMANDS
PRINT Command

/MODIFY

Queue
operation

Alters the specified parameter in
the specified job.
This switch
requires
that
you have access
rights to the job.
You
must
include the job name, /REQUESTID,
or /SEQUENCE, to the left of the
equal sign in the command line.
(Refer to the examples.)
You can
modify a request as long as the
request has not been started.

/NEW:
YES or NO

File
control

Accepts the request even
file does not yet exist.

/NOHEADER

Queue
operation

Suppresses the block headers at the
beginning of the file.

/NONEW

File
control

Does not accept file specifications
of files that do not exist.
This
is the default function.

/NONOTIFY

Queue
operation

Suppresses notification when your
Refer
to
request is finished.
/NOTIFY.

/NONULL

Queue
operation

Prints a fatal error message if
none of the specified files exist.
This is a default function.

/NOOPTION

Queue
operation

Suppresses
SWITCH. INI.

/NOPHYSICAL

File
control

Recognizes
logical
names for
devices in the command
string.
This is a default function.

/NOSTRS

File
control

When searching for the file on all
structures, takes only the first
occurrence.
This is the default
function.

/NOTES:"text"

Queue
operation

Prints the specified text on the
header pages of the output.
The
text can be 12 characters, and if
it contains any
nonalphanumeric
characters,
it must be enclosed in
quotation marks.

/NOTIFY:
YES or NO

Queue
operation

Notifies you on your terminal when
your request is completed.
To be
notified,
use
/NOTIFY with no
argument, or with YES or 1 as an
argument.
To
suppress
notification,
use
/NOTIFY:O,
/NOTIFY:NO,
or
/NONOTIFY.
By
default, you are not notified when
a request is finished.
In special
cases, such as the printing of log
files and the output of deferred
requests,
you
will
never
be
notified.

2-191

the

option

the

file

SYSTEM COMMANDS

PRINT Command
/NULL:
YES or NO

Queue
operation

Does
not
print a
fatal error
message if the specified files do
not exist.
/NULL:NO is the same as
/NONULL.

/OKBINARY

Queue
Operation

Accepts
files whose
extensions
indicate that they include binary
information.
Normally files with
extensions .SAV, .SHR, .LOW,
.REL,
.EXE,
and
.HGH
will
not be
accepted.

/OKNONE

Queue
operation

Does not produce a warning message
if no
files
match
the
file
specification.

/OKPROTECTION

Queue
operation

Does not produce an error message
if a
file protection
code
is
violated.

/OPTION:option

Queue
operation

Uses the option line QUEUE:option
in the SWITCH.INI file.
SWITCH.INI
files are discussed in Appendix B.

/PHYSICAL

File
control

Does not recognize logical
in the command line.

/PRESERVE

File
control

Saves
the file
after
it.
This switch is the
DISPOSE:PRESERVE.
This
default function.

/PRINT:arg

File
control

Prints the file with the specified
characteristics.
The
default
printing
mode
is
ASCII.
The
argument can be anyone of the
following:

names

printing
same as
is the

ARROW prints the file
literally,
denoting each control character by
a
and the character,
except for
the following which are printed
literally:
carriage
return,
linefeed,
horizontal tab, vertical
tab, and formfeed.
A

ASCII prints
changes.

the

file

with

GRAPHICS causes the LN01
laser
printer
to
recognize
escape
sequences.
These
embedded
sequences allow font changes within
the file.
Unless you specify this
switch,
escape sequences will be
ignored and printed as part of the
file.
(See Section 1.16 for a
discussion
of
LN01
escape
sequences. )

2-192

SYSTEM COMMANDS
PRINT Command

OCTAL prints the
octal
values
instead of the characters in the
file.
SUPPRESS
converts
all
control
characters to line feeds except for
ASCII code characters CR and DC3.
/PRIORITY:n

Queue
operation

Gives the specified priority number
(n is 1 to 63) to the request.
A
larger number has greater priority.

/PROTECTION:
nnn

Queue
operation

Specifies a protection code for the
queue request.
Queue requests are
protected in the same way that
files are protected.
Refer
to
Section 1.9.4.

/QUEUE:queue

Queue
operation

Specifies the remote VAX queue to
receive
the
output
from
the
request.

/REMOTE

Queue
operation

Prints on your terminal a
list of
remote queues.
Must be used with
/DESTINATION.

/REPORT:code

File
control

Processes COBOL report
printing every line in
that
begins with the
code.

/REQUESTID:n

Queue
operation

Specifies
the
request
identification number of the
job
you wish to modify or terminate
(/KILL) .
The
request
identification number is assigned
by the system when the request is
made.
Place this switch to the
left of the equal sign in the
command
line.
(Refer
to the
examples. )

/RUN:file

Queue
operation

Executes the specified file after
the request is accepted.

/RUNCORE:n

Queue
operation

Executes the file specified in /RUN
in nK of core after the request is
accepted.

/RUNOFFSET:n

Queue
operation

Executes the file specified in /RUN
with offset n after the request is
accepted.

/SEQUENCE:n

Queue
operation

Specifies a sequence number to aid
in identifying a
request to be
modified or deleted.
This switch
must be used to the left of the
equal sign in the command line.
(Refer to the examples.)

/SINCE:
date-time

File
control

Queues only the files with creation
dates after the specified date and
time.
2-193

files by
the file
specified

SYSTEM COMMANDS
PRINT Command
/SPACING:
arg

File
control

Prints the files with the specified
spacing parameters.
The default
function is to make no spacing
changes to the file, which is the
same as
/SPACING:SINGLE.
You can
use the following arguments with
this switch:
SINGLE prints the
spacing changes.

file

DOUBLE prints a blank line
every line of the file.

with

between

TRIPLE prints two
blank
lines
between every line of the file.
/STRS:
YES or NO

File
control

Searches
for the
file on all
structures in the search list and
takes
every
occurrence.
The
default is to take just the first
occurrence of the file.

/TMPFIL:
file:text

Queue
operation

Creates a temporary file TMP:file
and enters the text into the file.

/UNIT:n

Queue
operation

Specifies a decimal unit
number
or SIXBIT name of the device you
want the output sent to.

/UPPERCASE

Queue
operation

Forces the output to be printed on
an uppercase-only line
printer.
This switch is the complement to
/LOWERCASE.

/USERNAME:
"name"

Queue
operation

Specifies the user name for the
banner page of output listings.
This field can contain up to 39
alphanumeric characters,
and may
include punctuation and spaces if
the name is placed in quotation
marks.

Associated Messages
When a new entry is made in a system queue, the system prints
message on the user's terminal.
The message is in the form:

[PRINTER JOB name QUEUED, REQUEST #nnn, LIMIT xxx]
Where:

name is the name of the job in the queue.
This can be
3pecified by the user.
Otherwise, it defaults to the
name of the first file in the request.
nnn is the number that
represents
identification of the job in the queue.

the

xxx is the maximum number of pages that
use.

the

2-194

request
job

will

SYSTEM COMMANDS
PRINT Command
Characteristics

Leaves your terminal in monitor mode.
Destroys your core image.
Does not require LOGIN if you want only a list
queue to be printed on your terminal.

jobs

the

Examples

Print the file SYS:NOTICE.TXT .
. PRINT SYS:NOTICE.TXT<RET>
[PRINTER JOB NOTICE QUEUED, REQUEST #109, LIMIT 50]

Print the file SYS:NOTICE.TXT after 5:00 P.M .
. PRINT SYS:NOTICE.TXT /AFTER:17:00<RET>
[PRINTER JOB NOTICE QUEUED, REQUEST #109, LIMIT 50]

Change the job with request identifcation number 109 to print
after 4:30 P.M .
. PRINT /REQUESTID:109= /MODIFY /AFTER:16:30<RET>

Cancel the job with sequence number 22 .
. PRINT /SEQUENCE:22= /KILL<RET>

2-195

SYSTEM COMMANDS

PROTECT Command
PROTECT Command

Function
The PROTECT command changes the
access
protection
codes
associated with the specified files or directories.
The change
is made by renaming the file.
You specify the access protection of a file with three octal
digits.
Each digit represents a particular class of user.
The
firs~
digit represents the owner of the file,
the second
represents users with the same project number as the owner, and
the third represents all other users.
Refer to Section 1.9.4 for
a description of protection codes.
The standard protection is either <057> or <055>.
However,
the
The
system default can be changed by individual installations.
owner of a file can alter the protection code of that file
regardless of the existing protection code.
This command runs the COMPIL
command before running PIP.

program,

which

interprets

the

Format
PROTECT file-spec<nnn>,file-spec<nnn>, ...
Where:

fi1e-spec is a file specification.
are described in Section 1.9.

File specifications

<nnn> is an octal code.
You can specify the protection code before the file
name, in which case it applies for all following files.
You can use the full wildcard construction for the file
specification.
If you have the required privileges, you can change the
protection of files not in your directory by specifying
the desired directory name.
If you specify
the
directory name before the file name, it applies to all
succeeding files specified in the command line.
Associated Commands
PRESERVE

Changes the protection codes of the specified files
<lnn>.

Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Destroys your core image.

2-196

SYSTEM COMMANDS
PROTECT Command
Example

DIRECTORY shows that TEST.REL has the protection <155>:
.DIR TEST.*<RET>
TEST
FOR
1 <055>
dd-mmm-yy
DSKC:
[27,5434]
TEST
SFD
1 <775>
dd-mmm-yy
TEST
REL
1 <155>
dd-mmm-yy
TEST
MAC
1 <055>
dd-mmm-yy
TOTAL OF 4 BLOCKS IN 4 FILES ON DSKC: [27,5434]
Use PROTECT to change the protection code of TEST.REL to <555>:
.PROTECT TEST.REL<555><RET>
FILES RENAMED:
DSKC:TEST.REL
Show the new protection of TEST.REL with DIRECTORY .
. DIR TEST.*<RET>
TEST
TEST
TEST
TEST

FOR
SFD
REL
MAC

1
1
1
1

<055>
<775>
<555>
<055>

dd-mmm-yy
dd-mmm-yy
dd-mmm-yy
dd-mmm-yy

TOTAL OF 4 BLOCKS IN 4 FILES ON DSKC:

2-197

DSKC:

[27,5434]

SYSTEM COMMANDS
PUNCH Command
PUNCH Command

Function

The PUNCH command is defined by the system administrator to be
equivalent to either the TPUNCH or CPUNCH command.
TOPS-IO is
shipped with PUNCH defined as TPUNCH, but this may be changed at
your site.
Refer to the TPUNCH and CPUNCH commands for further information.

2-198

SYSTEM COMMANDS
PUSH Command
PUSH Command

Function

The PUSH command creates an inferior context;
the new context
becomes your current one.
The core image of the superior context
is preserved.
(Refer to Section 1.5 for a discussion of
contexts.)
Format

PUSH
Characteristics

Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Requires LOGIN.
Preserves your core image.
Associated Commands

CONTEXT

Allows you to display and manipulate contexts.

POP

Allows you to return to a superior context.

Example

Run a program, for example, MS.
Then exit and issue
command to see the status of your current context .

CONTEXT

. CONTEXT
Contexts used/quota = 1/4, pages used/quota
Context
Superior
Prog
Idle time
*
1
MS

4/1000

Now issue a PUSH command, and try another CONTEXT command to
the new status of your contexts .

see

. PUSH
. CONTEXT
Contexts used/quota = 2/4, pages used/quota
Context
Superior
Prog
Idle Time
1
MS
19.78
*
2
1

6/1000

There are now two contexts in use.
The current, unnamed context
2 is not running a program.
MS, which is running in the unnamed
superior context, has been idle for 19.78 seconds since the last
CONTEXT command was issued.

2-199

SYSTEM COMMANDS
QUEUE Command
QUEUE Command

Function

The QUEUE command makes entries in any of several system queues,
or in the case of the Event Queue, displays information only.
The system queues are:
o

Event Queue - Contains information about scheduled system
events.
This information may include such things as the time
the system will go down (KSYS) and when certain files will be
closed.
This queue is a display queue only.

Input Queue
Contains
submitted to the system.

Mount Queue - Contains the requests for resources to be
mounted.
These are:
tape, disk, and DECtape mount requests.

Output Queues:

the

batch

jobs

that

Card Punch Queue - Contains the requests that
made for files to be punched on cards.

have

been

have

been

Paper Tape Punch Queue - Contains the requests that
been made for files to be punched on paper tape.

have

Plotter Queue - Contains the requests that have been made
for files to be plotted.
Printer Queue - Contains the requests that have been made
for files to be printed on a line printer.

When queueing a request, you can specify an individual device.
If you do not specify a device, the first available appropriate
device is used.
All requests are placed in a queue
(a list of the requests,
arranged according to priority).
The requests are processed in
this order.
Priority is established by the limit that is set on
each request
(refer to /LIMIT and /TIME below) and according to
the specified priority number (refer to /PRIORITY below).
In
general,
requests with smaller limits and higher priorities are
processed first.
The QUEUE command also creates lists of the requests in the
queues.
This list can be printed on the terminal or entered into
a file.
The list includes the mount queue as well as input and
output queues.
The QUEUE command is duplicated by the CPUNCH,
PLOT,
PRINT,
PUNCH,
SUBMIT,
and TPUNCH commands.
Each of these commands
performs a function with a specific system queue.

2-200

SYSTEM COMMANDS
QUEUE Command
Formats

To process a batch job, use the following format:
QUEUE INP:jobname=control-file,log-file
Where:

jobname is the name of the job.
This name must be
one to six alphanumeric characters.
The job name
is optional.
If you do not specify the job name,
the default is the name of the log file.

The equal sign is required.
control-file is the file specification of the batch
control file.
The file name is required.
If you
do not specify the file extension, the default is
.CTL.
log-file is the file specification that you want
assigned to the log file, which contains a record
of the processing of the batch job.
The log file
specification is optional.
If you omit the file
name, the default is the name of the control file.
If you omit the file extension, the default is
.LOG.
2.

To make an entry in
following format:

one

the

output

queues,

use

the

QUEUE dev:jobname=file-spec,file-spec
Where:

dev:
is the name of the device on which the output
is to be processed.
The device name may be a
generic device name,
in which case the first
available device is used, or it may be a specific
device name.
(For example,
LPT:
is the first
available line printer.
LPT2:
is line printer
number 2.) To use a device on another node, use the
format devSxx:, where dev is a generic device name,
and xx is a node number.
(For example, LPTS34:
is
a line printer on node 34.) If you do not specify a
device name, the default is LPT:.
The generic
device names are:

LPT:
CDP:
PLT:
PTP:

for
for
for
for

line printer requests.
card punch requests.
plotter requests.
paper tape punch requests

jobname is the name of the job.
The job name is
one to six alphanumeric characters.
The job name
is optional.
If you omit the job name, the name of
the first file in the request is used as the job
name.
However, if the first file does not exist
(see /NEW) , the name of the second file is used.
file-spec is the file specification of the file to
be processed.
The file name and extension are
required.

2-201

SYSTEM COMMANDS
QUEUE Command
3.

To obtain a file containing a list of all the entries in
the queues, use the following format:

all

QUEUE file-spec=/LIST
Where:

file-spec is the file specification of the output
file.
If you omit the file extension, the default
is .LSQ.

To display the entries in any or all system
terminal, use the following format:

queues

your

QUEUE dev:
Where:

dey is any of the system queue names.
INP:
CDP:
PLT:
LPT:
PTP:

for
for
for
for
for

the
the
the
the
the

These are:

batch input queue.
card punch queue.
plotter queue.
line printer queue.
paper tape punch queue.

The device name is optional.
If you do not specify
the device name, all the entries in all the system
queues are printed on your terminal.
This list
includes the mount queue.
Switches
The switches for the QUEUE, CPUNCH, PLOT, PRINT,
PUNCH,
SUBMIT,
and TPUNCH commands can be placed anywhere in the command line.
The switches can be divided into two categories,
depending on
whether the switch can be used only once, or can be used more
times, in the command line.
The two categories are:
o

Queue-Operation Switches
These switches can be used only once in the command string.
They affect the entire request,
and you can place them
anywhere in the command string.
If you have used one of
these switches in a command string, you cannot use it again
in the same string.
Many switches have a INO construction,
which takes a negative effect.
Be sure you do not use the
INO construction of one of these
switches in the same
command string with the positive construction of the switch.

File-Control Switches
These switches can be used any number of times in the
command string.
You can use the INO construction of one of
these switches in the same command string with the positive
construction of the switch.
For information about how to
achieve a temporary or permanent effect by the placement of
the switch, refer to Section 1.8.4.

2-202

SYSTEM COMMANDS
QUEUE Corrunand

In the following table of switches,
the switches are defined
according to the queues that they affect.
The following labels
signify the queue(s) that each switch affects.
The switches are
defined as follows:
ALL

- Switches that affect both the
and the output queues.

INPUT

- Switches that affect only the batch input queue.

OUTPUT

- Switches that affect only the output queues.
OUTPUT is followed by
(queue) in cases where a
switch is useful for that specific output queue.

LIST

Switches that affect the listing of the jobs in
the
queue.
Listings can be printed on the
terminal, or they can be written into files on
disk or tape.
LIST is followed by (queue) when
the listing function is useful for that queue.
Queues

batch

input

queue

Switch

Category

/ABEFORE:
date-time

File
control

AL'L

Queues the file only if
the access date is before
the specified date and
time.

/ACCOUNT:
"string"

Queue
operation

ALL

Specifies the account to
which the job should be
charged.
If the account
string
contains
any
nonalphanumeric
characters,
you
must
enclose
the string in
quotation marks.

/AFTER:
date-time

Queue
operation

ALL

Processes
the
request
after the specified date
and time.

/ALLFILES:
YES or NO

Queue
operation

OUTPUT

Accepts a request only if
all of the files in the
request
exist.
By
default, if any of the
files do not exist, the
others will be processed
appropriately.
This
switch specifies that if
any file does not exist,
no
files
should
be
processed.
The value of
YES or NO is optional.
If you use YES, all of
the specified files must
exist.
If NO, existing
files are processed and
warning
messages
are
printed for files that do
not exist.

2-203

Meaning

SYSTEM COMMANDS
QUEUE Command
/ASINCE:
date-time

File
control

ALL

Queues only the
files
that have been accessed
since the specified date
and time.

/ASSISTANCE:
YES or NO

Queue
operation

INPUT

Specifies whether the job
needs or does not need
operator
intervention.
Arguments are YES or 1
and NO or O.
If you
specify NO,
and
then
request assistance, your
job
is
cancelled.
Assistance is any request
that the operator must
answer before the batch
job
can
continue,
including
PLEASE
and
MOUNT requests.

/BATLOG:arg

Queue
operation

INPUT

Controls the way the log
file is output to disk.
Arguments are:
APPEND appends the log
file to an existing file
of the same name.
This
is the default function.
SUPERSEDE replaces
any
file of the same name
with the new log file.
SPOOL spools the log file
for
output.
Does not
store the file
in your
directory.

/BATOPT:
option-name

Queue
operation

INPUT

Specifies a LOGIN option
line to read for LOGIN
switches to apply to the
batch job.
The option
name
that you specify
with the /BATOPT switch
must match a line in the
SWITCH.INI
file
that
appears as:
LOGIN: option-name/switches

/BEFORE:
date-time

File
control

ALL

/BEGIN:n

File
control

OUTPUT
INPUT

2-204

Queues only
the files
with
creation
dates
before the specified date
and time.
(LPT)

Starts the output on the
nth page for line printer
requests or on the nth
line of the control file
for batch requests.
The
default
is
to
begin
output on the first unit.

SYSTEM COMMANDS
QUEUE Command

/CARDS:n

Queue
operation

INPUT

Uses n as the maximum
number of cards that can
be punched by your batch
job (up to 10,000).

/CHARAC:arg

Queue
operation

OUTPUT

Specifies an output characteristic.
The argument
can
be
up
to
six
alphanumeric characters.
Characteristics arguments
defined for your system
are listed in the file
SYS:CHARTY.DAT.

/CHECK

Queue
operation

LIST

Prints on your terminal a
list of the queue entries
made by your job.

/COPIES:n

File
control

OUTPUT

Repeats the output the
specified number of times
(n must be less than 64).

/CORE:n

Queue
operation

INPUT

Uses n (in decimal K) as
the maximum amount
of
memory that your job can
use.

/CREATE

Queue
operation

ALL

Makes a new entry in the
queue.
This switch is
the default except when
you are listing
queue
entries.

/DEFERRED

Queue
operation

OUTPUT

Causes
all
deferred
output to be released to
the system queues.
You
must use one
of
the
following switches with
/DEFERRED:
/CREATE
completes
all
released output requests.
/KILL
eliminates
the
released output requests.
Refer to the SET DEFER
command
for
more
information and examples.

/DELETE

File
control

ALL

Deletes the file after
processing it.
(This is
the
same
as
/DISPOSE:DELETE.)

/DENSITY:n

Queue
operation

LIST

Specifies the density of
magnetic
tape
when
writing
listing
files
directly on tape.
The
values for n are:
200,
800,
1600,
6250,
and
INSTALLATION (to take the
installation default) .

2-205

SYSTEM COMMANDS
QUEUE Conunand
/DEPENDENCY:n

Queue
operation

INPUT

Specifies
the
initial
value of the dependency
count in decimal.
When
used with /MODIFY,
this
switch
changes
the
dependency
count
of
another
job.
If n is a
signed number (+ or -),
that number is added to
or subtracted from the
dependent
job's count.
If n is not a
signed
number,
the
dependent
job's count is changed to
n.

/DESTINATION:
node

Queue
operation

ALL

Specifies
the node to
which all output is to be
sent.
When used with an
output request, the file
will
be
output on a
device attached to the
specified
node.
When
used
with
an
input
request,
any
output
generated by the request
(including the log file,
if it is to be printed)
is sent to the specified
node.
The node can be
specified by either the
node name or the node
number.
If a request is
made to a node that does
not exist,
the request
will wait in the queue
indefinitely.

/DISPOSE:
arg

File
control

ALL

Controls the disposition
of the file after it is
queued.
The arguments to
this switch are:
DELETE deletes the file
from your directory after
processing it.
PRESERVE preserves
the
file after processing it.
This
is
the
default
function.
RENAME renames the file
from your area into the
spooling area,
deleting
it
from
your
area
inunediately.

2-206

SYSTEM COMMANDS
QUEUE Conunand

/DISTRIBUTION:
"text"

Queue
operation

ALL

Specifies text to place
in
the
distribution
field, on the banner page
of output listings.
For
batch input requests, the
distribution
text
is
printed
on the banner
page of the log
file
listing.
You can use
this field to
include
mailing information,
or
the location where the
operator should leave the
listing.
The text field
may
be
up
to
39
alphanumeric characters,
including punctuation and
spaces if the text is
placed
in
quotation
marks.

/ERBINARY

File
control

ALL

Prints an error message
if a binary
file
is
included in the request.
This
is
the
default
function.

/ERNONE

Queue
operation

ALL

Prints an error message
if no files match the
file specification.
This
is the default function.

/ERPROTECTION

Queue
operation

ALL

Prints an error message
if processing the request
involves a violation of
file protection.
This is
the default function.

/ERSUPERSEDE

Queue
operation

LIST

Prints an error message
if a listing file by the
same name already exists.
Without this switch,
the
old
listing
file
is
automatically superseded
by the new listing file.

/ESTIMATE:x

Queue
operation

LIST

Specifies
an estimated
number of blocks for the
listing file.

/FAST

Queue
operation

LIST

Prints the entries in the
queue on your terminal in
a fast format.
Same as
/LIST:FAST.

/FEET:n

Queue
operation

INPUT

Uses n as the maximum
number of feet of paper
tape that your batch job
can punch.

2-207

SYSTEM COMMANDS
QUEUE Command

/FILE:arg

File
control

OUTPUT

Specifies how the file
format
is
to
be
interpreted.
The
following arguments can
be used with this switch:
ASCII interprets the file
as ASCII text.
COBOL interprets the file
as COBOL SIXBIT text.
ELEVEN
interprets
the
file as four 8-bit bytes
in each 36-bit word.
The
bits
are
arranged as
follows:
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte

1:
2:
3:
4:

bits
bits
bits
bits

10-17
2-9
28-35
20-27

FORTRAN interprets
the
file as a FORTRAN data
file.
This
is
the
default for files with
the extension .DAT.
/FONT:name

Queue
operation

OUTPUT

Specifies that the file
should
be
printed
entirely
in
the font
designated in name.
As
fontnames
vary
from
installation
to
installation,
see your
system administrator for
a
list
of
valid
fontnames.

/FORMS:arg

Queue
operation

OUTPUT

Processes
the output on
the specified type
of
form.
The argument to
the switch can be up to
six
alphanumeric
characters.
Available
forms
are
listed
in
SYS:FORMST.DAT.

/GENERIC

Queue
operation

OUTPUT

Sends output to any unit
of the type specified or
implied.
For instance,
if
no
device
is
specified, output goes to
the next available line
printer.
This switch is
the complement to /UNIT.

/HEADER:
YES or NO

Queue
operation

OUTPUT

Prints
block
headers
between copies of
the
file.
This
is
the
default function.

2-208

SYSTEM COMMANDS
QUEUE Command

/HELP:
arg

Prints
information
on
your terminal about the
QUEUE
command.
This
switch does not queue any
files.
This switch can
be used alone or with one
of
the
following
arguments:

Queue
operation

TEXT prints a
message
about
the
format and
switches of the
QUEUE
command.
This is the
same as /HELP with no
arguments.
SWITCHES prints a list of
all
the
switches
available with the QUEUE
command.
/JOBNAME:name

Queue
operation

ALL

Specifies the name of the
job.
The job name can be
up to six alphanumeric
characters.

/KILL

Queue
operation

ALL

Removes
the
specified
entry from the specified
queue.
You must include
the job name,
/SEQUENCE,
or /REQUESTID to the left
of the equal sign in the
command line.
Refer to
the examples.

/LENGTH:n:m

File
control

ALL

Processes
only
files
whose length is between n
and m blocks.

/LIMIT:n

Queue
operation

OUTPUT

Limits the output to the
specified
number
of
pages,
cards,
feet,
or
minutes.

/LIST:
arg

Queue
operation

LIST

Prints information about
the jobs in the queue.
If you use /LIST alone,
it shows the jobs in the
queue.
This
is
equivalent to using the
QUEUE
command with no
arguments or
switches.
/LIST can be abbreviated
to /L.
The switch can
also
take one of the
following arguments:
ALL shows all data about
each queue request.
FAST shows a fast list of
the queue requests.

2-209

SYSTEM COMMANDS
QUEUE Conunand
JOBS shows a list of the
jobs in the queue.
(This
is the same as /LIST with
no arguments.)
SUMMARY shows only the
sununary line of the queue
display.
/LOWERCASE

Queue
operation

OUTPUT (LPT) Forces the output to be
printed on a line printer
with lowercase ability.

/MESSAGE:
arg

Queue
operation

ALL

Specifies the amount of
information to be printed
when an error occurs from
the request.
You
can
specify one or more of
the following arguments:
ADDRESS
prints
the
location in memory where
the error occurred.
CONTINUATION
information
error.

about

prints
the

FIRST prints the one-line
error message.
PREFIX
prints
six-character
prefix.

a
error

/METERS:n

Queue
operation

INPUT

Uses n as the maximum
number of meters of paper
tape that can be punched
by the batch job.

/MODIFY

Queue
operation

ALL

Alters
the
specified
parameter
in
the
specified
job.
This
switch requires that you
have access rights to the
job.
You must include
the job name, /REQUESTID,
or /SEQUENCE, to the left
of the equal sign in the
conunand line.
(Refer to
the
examples.)
This
switch can be used to
modify
a
previously
submitted request as long
as the request has not
been started.

/NEW:
YES or NO

File
control

ALL

Accepts the request even
if the file does not yet
exist.

/NOHEADER

Queue
operation

OUTPUT

Suppresses
the
block
headers at the beginning
of the file.

2-210

SYSTEM COMMANDS
QUEUE Command

/NONEW

File
control

ALL

Does
not
accept file
specifications of files
that do not exist.
This
is the default function.

/NONOTIFY

Queue
operation

ALL

Does not notify you when
when your
request
is
finished.
This is the
default function.
Refer
to /NOTIFY.

/NONULL

Queue
operation

OUTPUT

Prints a fatal message on
a null request.
This is
the default function.

/NOOPTION

Queue
operation

ALL

Does
not
use
the
parameters specified in
the SWITCH.INI file.

/NOPHYSICAL

File
control

ALL

Recognized logical names
for
devices
in
the
command string.
This is
the default function.

/NORE S TART

Queue
operation

INPUT

Prevents your job from
being restarted when it
was stopped because of an
error.

/NOSTRS

File
control

OUTPUT

When searching structures
for the specified file,
uses only the first file
found.
This
is
the
default function.

/NOTES:"text"

Queue
operation

OUTPUT

Includes the text in the
header units of output.
you
should
include
quotation marks if the
text contains spaces or
punctuation.

/NOTIFY:arg

Queue
operation

ALL

Tells the system whether
to send a message to your
terminal
when
your
request is completed.
By
default,
you
are not
notified when a request
is
finished.
To
be
notified,
use
/NOTIFY
with no argument, or with
YES or 1 as an argument.
To suppress notification,
use
/NOTIFY:O,
/NOTIFY:NO, or /NONOTIFY.
In special cases, such as
the printing of log files
and
the
output
of
deferred
requests,
you
will never be notified.

2-211

SYSTEM COMMANDS

QUEUE Conunand
/NULL:
YES or NO

Queue
operation

OUTPUT

Does not print a fatal
error message
if
the
files you specified do
not exist.
/NULL:NO is
the same as /NONULL.

/OKBINARY

File
control

ALL

Accepts
files
whose
extensions indicate that
they
include
binary
information.
Normally
files
with
extensions
.SAV, .SHR,
.LOW,
.REL,
.EXE and .HGH will not be
accepted.

/OKNONE

Queue
operation

ALL

Does
not
produce
a
warning message if none
of the specified files
exist.

/OKPROTECTION

Queue
operation

ALL

Does not
generate
an
error message if a
file
protection
code
is
violated.

/OKSUPERSEDE

Queue
operation

LIST

Does not
generate
an
error if the listing file
already exists.
This is
the default function.

/OPTION:option

Queue
operation

ALL

Uses
the
line QUEUE:
option in the SWITCH.INI
file.
SWITCH.INI files
are discussed in Appendix
B.

/OUTPUT:arg

Queue
operation

INPUT

Determines whether or not
the log file will
be
printed.
The arguments
are
LOG,
NOLOG,
and
ERROR.
LOG prints the log file.
NOLOG suppresses printing
of the log file.
ERROR prints the log file
only if an error occurs.

/PAGES:n

Queue
operation

INPUT

Uses n as the maximum
number of pages of output
that your job can print.

/PARITY:
ODD or EVEN

Queue
operation

LIST

Uses
the
specified
parity, when writing the
listing
file
directly
onto magnetic tape.
The
default is ODD.

/PATH: [dir]

Queue
operation

INPUT

Specifies the directory
to be accessed by the
job.
The directory can
be UFO or an SFD.

2-212

SYSTEM COMMANDS
QUEUE Conunand

/PHYSICAL

File
control

ALL

Does
not
recognize
logical names for devices
in the conunand line.

/PLOT:arg

File
control

OUTPUT (PLT) Plots the file in the
specified mode.
If you
omit /PLOT,
the file is
plotted according to the
data mode specified in
the file.
The argument
can be anyone of the
following:
ASCII plots the
ASCII mode.

file

BINARY plots the file
binary mode.

IMAGE plots the
image mode.

file

/PRESERVE

File

ALL

Saves
the
file after
<le>.I-24
control
processing it.
(This is
the
same
as
/DISPOSE:PRESERVE).
This
is the default function.

/PRINT:arg

File
control

OUTPUT (LPT) Prints
the file using
the argument to determine
the printing mode.
The
default printing mode is
ASCII.
The argument can
be
anyone
of
the
following:
ARROW
converts
all
control characters except
011-015 and 020-024 to
up-arrow format.
ASCII prints the
file
with no changes.
This is
the default.
GRAPHICS causes the LN01
laser
printer
to
recognize
escape
sequences.
These
embedded sequences allow
font
changes within a
file.
Unless this switch
is
specified,
escape
sequences are ignored and
printed as part of the
file.
(See Section 1. 16
for a discussion of LN01
escape sequences.)
OCTAL prints the octal
values
instead of the
characters in the file.
2-213

SYSTEM COMMANDS

QUEUE Command
SUPPRESS
converts
all
control
characters
to
line feeds except
for
ASCII code characters CR
and DC3.
/PRIORITY:n

Queue
operation

ALL

Assigns the
specified
priority (n is 1 to 63)
to the request. A larger
number
has
greater
priority.

/PROCESSING:
node

Queue
operation

INPUT

Specifies the node that
will process the
job.
You must specify the node
by the node name or node
number.
Batch jobs can
be submitted only to IBM
host nodes.
Jobs that
are submitted to nodes
other than IBM host nodes
will wait in the queue
indefinitely.

/PROTECTION:
nnn

Queue
operation

LIST

Specifies
code for
file.

OUTPUT
INPUT

Specifies a
protection
for the queue request.
Queue
requests
are
protected in the same way
that files are protected.
Refer to Section 1.9.4.

/PUNCH:arg

File
control

a protection
the
listing

OUTPUT (COP) Punches the files in the
specified mode.
If you
omit
this switch,
the
files
are
punched
according
to the data
mode specified in
the
file.
The
following
arguments can be
used
with this switch:
026 punches the files
026 Hollerith code.

ASCII punches the files
in ASCII card code.
BCD punches the files
026 Hollerith code.

BINARY punches the files
in
checksummed
binary
card code.
IMAGE punches the files
in image card format.
/QUEUE:queue

Queue
operation

OUTPUT

2-214

Specifies the remote VAX
queue to
receive
the
output from the request.

SYSTEM COMMANDS
QUEUE Conunand

/READER

Queue
operation

INPUT

Causes
a disk-resident
card job to be read as if
it were on punched cards
and had been submitted
through the card reader.

/REMOTE

Queue
operation

ALL

Prints on your terminal a
list of remote queues.
Must
be
used
with
/DESTINATION.

/REPORT:code

File
control

OUTPUT (LPT) Prints COBOL reports by
printing every line in
the file that has the
specified code at
the
beginning of the line.

/REQUESTID:n

Queue
operation

ALL

Specifies
the
request
identification number of
a
job you wish to modify
(/MODIFY)
or
terminate
(/KILL) .
The
request
identification number is
assigned by the system
when
you
queue
the
request.
This
switch
must be used to the left
of the equal sign in the
conunand line.
(Refer to
the examples.)

/RESTARTABLE:
YES or NO

Queue
operation

INPUT

Specifies whether the job
should be restarted after
the system has crashed
and
been
restored.
Arguments are:
YES or 1,
and NO or O.
The default
is NO.

/RUN:file

Queue
operation

ALL

Executes
the specified
file after the request is
queued.

/RUNCORE:nx

Queue
operation

ALL

Executes
the
program
specified in /RUN in nK
of core after the request
is accepted.
The value
can also be expressed in
terms of nP (pages).

/RUNOFFSET:n

Queue
operation

ALL

Executes
the
specified in /RUN
offset
n
after
request is queued.

/SEQUENCE:n

Queue
operation

ALL

Specifies
the sequence
number of a request to be
modified
or
deleted.
This switch must be used
to the left of the equal
sign in the conunand line.

2-215

file
with
the

SYSTEM COMMANDS
QUEUE Conunand
ISINCE:
date-time

File
control

ALL

Queues only
the files
with creation dates after
the specified date and
time.

/SITGO

Queue
operation

INPUT

Specifies that the batch
job be processed by the
SITGO processor.

/SPACING:arg

File
control

OUTPUT (LPT) Prints the files with the
specified
spacing
parameters.
The default
function is to make no
spacing changes to the
file, this is the same as
/SPACING:SINGLE.
You can
use
the
following
arguments
with
this
switch:
SINGLE prints the file
with no spacing changes.
DOUBLE prints a
blank
line between every line
of the file.
TRIPLE prints two blank
lines between every line
of the file.

/STREAM:n

Queue
operation

LIST (INP)

Prints a list of the jobs
that
are
running
or
destined to run in the
specified batch stream.

/STRS:
YES or NO

File
control

OUTPUT

Searches for the file on
all structures in
the
search
list and takes
every occurrence.
The
default is to take just
the first occurrence of
the file.

/TAG:xxx

File
control

INPUT

Starts at the statement
labeled
xxx
in
the
control file.
Equivalent
to GOTO
xxx
at
the
beginning of the control
file.

2-216

SYSTEM COMMANDS
QUEUE Command

/TAPE:arg

File
control

OUTPUT (PTP) Punches paper tape in the
specified code.
If you
do not use this switch,
the
tape
is
punched
according
to the data
mode specified in
the
file.
You can use any
one of
the
following
arguments
with
this
switch:
ASCII punches the tape in
ASCII code.
BINARY punches the
in binary code.

tape

IBINARY punches the tape
in image binary code.
IMAGE punches the tape in
image mode.
/TIME:
hh:mm:ss

Queue
operation

INPUT

Specifies the CPU time
limit for the job.
The
form /TIME:n can be used
to specify a limit of n
seconds.

/TMPFIL:
file: "text"

Queue
operation

ALL

Creates a temporary file
TMP:file.TMP and enters
the text into the file.

/TPLOT:n

Queue
operation

INPUT

Uses n minutes as the
maximum
amount
of
plotting time allowed for
your job.

/UNIQUE:
YES or NO

Queue
operation

INPUT

Specifies whether
more
than one batch job can
run from your PPN at one
time.
If the value is
YES
(or 1), only one job
will run at a time.
Any
other
batch jobs will
wait until the previous
job is finished.
If the
value is NO (or 0),
any
number of batch jobs can
run at the same time.

/UNIT:n

Queue
operation

OUTPUT

Specifies the unit number
or SIXBIT name of the
device that you want the
output sent to.

/UPPERCASE

Queue
operation

OUTPUT (LPT) Forces the output to be
printed
on
an
uppercase-only
line
printer.
This switch is
the
complement
to
/LOWERCASE.

2-217

SYSTEM COMMANDS

QUEUE Command
/USERNAME:
"name"

Queue
operation

ALL

Specifies the user name
field for the banner page
of output listings.
For
batch input requests, the
user name is printed on
the banner page for the
log file listing.
This
field can contain up to
39
alphanumeric
characters,
and
may
include punctuation and
spaces if the name is
placed
in
quotation
marks.
To avoid conflict
with
the
MOUNT/USER
switch,
do not shorten
this switch to less than
/USERN.

/VERSION:n

Queue
operation

LIST

Specifies
a
version
number
in
standard
DECsystem-10 format
for
listing files.

Associated Messages
When a new entry is made in a system queue, the system prints
message on the user's terminal.
The message is in the form:

[device JOB name QUEUED, REQUEST #nnn, LIMIT xxx]
Where:

device is the name of one of
BATCH.

the

output

devices,

name is the name of the job in the queue.
This can be
specified by the user.
Otherwise, it defaults to the
name of the first file in the request.
In the case of
batch requests, the name of the log file is used as the
job name.
nnn is the number that
represents
identification of the job in the queue.

the

xxx is the maximum number of pages that
use.

the

request
job

will

When the entry has been made to the batch queue,
the LIMIT is
changed to RUN TIME.
In this case, the time limit of the job is
displayed.

Characteristics
Leaves your terminal in monitor level.
Destroys your core image.
Does not require LOGIN
entries.

you

2-218

desire

only

list

queue

SYSTEM COMMANDS
QUEUE Command
Examples

Enter file FILEA.LST and FILEB.LST in the line printer
under the job name of FILEA .

queue

. QUEUE FILEA,FILEB<RET>
[PRINTER JOB FILEA QUEUED, REQUEST #4, LIMIT 20]

Enter file TEST.CTL in the batch input queue under
TEST and log file with name TEST.LOG .

job

name

. QUEUE INP:=TEST<RET>
[BATCH JOB TEST QUEUED, REQUEST #33, LIMIT 00;05:00]

Submit the control file TEST.CTL to the batch input queue for
processing after 5:00 P.M.:
.QUEUE INP:
=TEST /AFTER:17:00
[BATCH JOB TEST QUEUED, REQUEST

231, LIMIT 0:05:00]

Modify the processing time of job TEST, identifying
by its request number:
.QUEUE INP:
/REQUESTID:231= /AFTER:16:30 /MODIFY
[1 JOB MODIFIED]

Cancel the batch job TEST:
.QUEUE INP:
TEST= /KILL
[1 JOB CANCELED]

2-219

the

job

SYSTEM COMMANDS
QUEUE Conunand

Display a list of all the entries in all the queues:
. QUEUE<RET>
Event Queue:
Type
Req:fl:

Expiration

Description

*BILCLS
9
dd-mmm-yy hh:nun:ss Prime time rates end
USGFIL
6
dd-mmm-yy hh:nun:ss Usage file closure
OPRFIL
7
dd-mmm-yy hh:nun:ss ORION log file closure
BILCLS
8
dd-mmm-yy hh:nun:ss Discount rates end
There are 4 events in the queue (1 in progress)
Batch Queue:
Job Name
Req:fl:

Run Time

Core

User

MCOFIL
12 00:05:00
512
SPIDER [30,5653]
IAfter: dd-mmm-yy hh:nun
SJH
10 00:04:00
512
SPIDER [30,5653]
IAfter: dd-mmm-yy hh:nun
CHKUSR
22 00:05:00
512
LEO
[10,6056]
IAfter: dd-mmm-yy hh:nun
MAIL
24 00:15:00
512
NED
[30,5674]
IAfter: dd-mmm-yy hh:nun
There are 4 jobs in the queue (none in progress);
00:29:00 runtime
Printer Queue:
Job Name
Req:fl:

Limit

User

* LLINKS
588
1798
DAVENPORT [10,6026]
On Unit:O
IDest:JUNIPR
Started at 16:31:09
RSX20F
221
924
M.J.MAROTTA [27,5434]
ILower
There is 2 jobs in the queue (1 in progress); 2722 pages

2-220

SYSTEM COMMANDS
R Command
R Command

Function

The R command loads a core image from the system device
(SYS:)
and starts it at the location specified within the file (.JBSA in
the Job Data Area.
See the TOPS-I0 Monitor Calls Manual.)
This
command is the same as RUN SYS:file.ext.
The R command is used
to run a system program that does not have an operating system
command to run it.
This command clears all user core.
However, programs should not
count on this action and should explicitly clear those areas of
core that are expected to contain zeros (that is, programs should
be
self-initializing) .
This action allows programs to be
restarted by a CTRL/C, START sequence without another R command.
Format

R file.EXE[directory]
Where:

core/switch

file.EXE is the file name of a file stored on the
file structure.

SYS:

NOTE
Old-style SAVE files (.SAV, .HGH, .SHR) can be
run by the R command.
However, .EXE files are
recommended over SAVE files.
[directory]
is a directory specification.
directory specification is present in the
str~ng,
it overrides the
assumed
SYS:
Directory paths are described in Section 1.14.

If
a
command
device.

core is the amount of core needed to run the program.
If you do not specify core, the default is the minimum
amount of core needed to load the program into memory.

If you do not specify an
currently in memory is run.

argument,

the

program

/switch is one of the following options:

/START:n"addr

Specifies the octal section number (n)
and address
(addr) at which the core
image starts.
Valid section numbers
are 0-37, octal.

/USE:n

Specifies the octal section number (n)
in which the core image runs.

Characteristics

Destroys your core image.

2-221

SYSTEM COMMANDS
R Conunand
Example

Run the SYS:SETSRC.EXE program
.R SETSRC<RET>
SETSRC prompt.

*"C
Use CTRL/C to exit.

2-222

SYSTEM COMMANDS
REASSIGN Command
REASSIGN Command

Function

The REASSIGN command passes a device assignment from one job to
another job.
Both restricted and unrestricted devices can be
reassigned. When you specify a DECtape in this command,
the
system clears the copy of the directory currently in memory.
The
next time you refer to the directory, a new copy is read from
tape into memory.
However,
the logical name that has been
assigned is not reassigned unless you reassign the device to your
own job.
Format

REASSIGN dev:job
Where:

dev:
is the physical or logical name of the device to
be reassigned.
This argument is required. Refer to
Section 1.9.1 for a description of device names.
job is the number of the job to which the device is to
be reassigned.
If no job is specified, the device is
reassigned to your job.
This is useful when you want
to force the next DECtape directory reference to come
from the tape instead of core.

You can reassign a device using the logical name only if your job
and the job to which the device is to be reassigned have the same
project-programmer number,
or you have operator
privileges
(logged in under [1,2] or logged in as OPR) .
Associated Messages

If the job number you specify is out of the range
numbers, the monitor prints:

legal

job

?NOT A JOB
If no arguments are included in the REASSIGN command, the monitor
prints:
?NOT ENOUGH ARGS
If the device specified is not assigned to your job, the
prints:
?CAN'T BE REASSIGNED
Characteristics

Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Will not function during device I/O.
Restrictions

Your job's controlling terminal cannot be reassigned.
Disk and spooled devices cannot be reassigned.

2-223

monitor

SYSTEM COMMANDS
REASSIGN Command
Example

Assign a device to a job .
. ASSIGN CDR:<RET>
CDR261 ASSIGNED
A SYSTAT of your PPN shows you are running two jobs .
. SYS [,]<RET>
13
31
SYSTAT
19
DET
SETSRC
$ MEANS EXECUTE ONLY
BUSY DEVICES:
DEVICE JOB
CDR261 13

WHY
AS

19+5PY
30+4

RN
AC SW

12$

LOGICAL

The card reader is assigned to job 13.
Reassign the device to job 19 .
. REASSIGN CDR:19<RET>
SYSTAT shows that the reassignment was successful .
. SYS [,]<RET>
13
31
SYSTAT
19
DET
SETSRC
$ MEANS EXECUTE ONLY

24+SPY
30+4

BUSY DEVICES:
DEVICE JOB
CDR261 19

LOGICAL

WHY
AS

2-224

RN
AC SW

12$
1

SYSTEM COMMANDS
REATTACH Command
REATTACH Command

Function

The REATTACH command transfers your job from one terminal to
another.
Unlike the ATTACH command, REATTACH does not require a
password or that the terminal be of the same type that LOGIN
recognizes to allow access to the system.
Formats

REATTACH
REATTACH terminal-name/switch
REATTACH line-number/switch
Where:

terminal-name is a device name of the form TTYnnn[:].
line-number is the nnn portion of the terminal-name.
/switch is optional.

/HELP:keyword

The only switch for REATTACH is:

Prints the HELP file.
Valid keywords
are ARGUMENTS, SWITCHES, and TEXT.
The
ARGUMENTS keyword displays a list of
valid
switches
and arguments.
The
SWITCHES keyword displays only a list of
switches without detailed information.
The TEXT keyword displays the full HELP
text.
TEXT is the default keyword.
/HELP may be abbreviated to /H.

Characteristics

Does not destroy the core image of either job.
Requires LOGIN.
Restrictions

Remote users cannot attach to jobs with a project number of 1.
Batch programs cannot use this command.
Example

Enter the command REATTACH .
. REATTACH TTY56<RET> .
If you do not enter the terminal-name or line-number, the
will prompt you.

2-225

system

SYSTEM COMMANDS
REENTER Command
REENTER Command

Function
The REENTER command restarts a program at an alternate entry
point.
You must write the alternate entry point into your
program.
The REENTER
command
is
used
for
a
partial
reinitialization of the program.
The REENTER command copies the saved program counter
(PC)
value
into
.JBOPC and starts the program at an alternate entry point
specified in .JBREN (you must set it or have it set in your
program) .
All Job Data Area locations are described in the
TOPS-10 Monitor Calls Manual.
If the job was executing a monitor call when it was interrupted
(that is,
at monitor level but not in TTY input wait or SLEEP
mode), the monitor continues the job until the monitor call is
completed and then traps to the REENTER address in .JBREN.
If
the job is in TTY input wait or SLEEP mode,
the trap to the
REENTER address occurs immediately and .JBOPC contains the
address of the monitor call.
If the job is at user level,
the trap occurs immediately.
Therefore,
it is always possible to continue the interrupted
program after trapping by executing a JRSTF @.JBOPC.

Format
REENTER

Associated Commands
The START command is used

for

complete

reinitialization

program~

The CONTINUE command is used when
program without reinitialization.

you

want

12+24

35
20,641
TTY45
SOS
12+24
TOTAL KCS USED = 2 AVERAGE KCS=2
#MEANS NON-SYSTEM HI-SEG

Characteristics
Places your terminal at user level.
Example

Run the SYSTAT program for job 35:
.SYS 35<RET>
35
20,641
TTY45
SOS
#MEANS NON-SYSTEM HI-SEG
Reenter the program:
.REENTER<RET>

2-226

continue

the

SYSTEM COMMANDS
RENAME Conunand
RENAME Command

Function

The RENAME conunand changes one or more attributes of the file
specification of files on disk or DECtape. Refer to Section 1.9
for a description of file specifications.
This conunand runs the COMPIL
conunand before running PIP.

program,

which

interprets

the

Format

RENAME file-spec=file-spec,file-spec=file-spec, ...
the new file-spec is placed first, to the left
equal sign (=).

Where:

the old file-spec is placed at the right of
sign (=).

the

the
equal

Device and file~structure names cannot be different for old and
new file-specs.
If you specify the device name in the new
file-spec, that device is the default for the old file-spec.
You
can use RENAME to change the protection code of a file by
specifying the protection codes in the file-specs.
The directory name remains effective throughout the conunand line,
but you can specify a different directory name to change the
directory of a file.
RENAME accepts wildcard constructions.
If the new file name is specified without an extension, the
will not have an extension.
Characteristics

Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Destroys your core image.
Requires LOGIN.
Example

Show the file named PROG .
. DIR PROG. *<RET>
PROG

EXE

<055>

dd-mnun-yy

DSKC: [27,5434]

dd-mnun-yy

DSKC: [27,5434]

Rename PROG to be PRGRM .
. RENAME PRGRM.EXE=PROG.EXE<RET>
FILES RENAMED:
DSKC:PROG.EXE
Show the file named PRGRM .
. DIR PRGRM.*<RET>
PRGRM

EXE

<055>
2-227

file

SYSTEM COMMANDS

RESOURCES Command
RESOURCES Command

Function

The RESOURCES command prints the names of all available devices
(except terminals and pseudo-terminals), all file structures, all
physical units not in file structures, and all running CPUs.
Format

RESOURCES
Characteristics

Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Example

.RESOURCES<RET>
BLKX,RENG,DSKA,BLKB,DSKP,APIO,DSKC,BLKK,DSKR,DSKZ,LOKI,DSKT,
SLAT,SIXT,DSKB,BLKY,RPA2,RPA4,RPB3,RPB6,RPP2,RPP3,RPGI,LPT261,
DTAO,I,2,3,MTAO,1,2,4,S,MTE1,MTFO,1,2,MTCO,MTDO,1,CPUO,1

2-228

SYSTEM COMMANDS
REWIND Command
REWIND Command

Function
The REWIND command rewinds a magnetic tape or a DECtape.
FOrmat
REWIND dev:
Where:

dev:

is a magnetic tape (MTxn) or a DECtape (DTxn).

Refer to Section 1.9.1
names.

for

Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Destroys your core image.
Runs the PIP program.
Examples
1.

Rewind DECtape unit 4:
.REWIND DTA4:<RET>

Rewind magnetic tape unit 1:
.REWIND MTA1:<RET>

2-229

description

device

SYSTEM COMMANDS
RUN Command
RUN Command

Function
The RUN command starts execution of a program.
It loads a core
image from a retrievable storage device and starts the program at
the location specified within the file (.JBSA).
RUN looks for programs stored in files with the extension
Use SAVE or SSAVE to create the executable file.

.EXE.

The RUN command clears all your core. However, programs should
not count on this action and should explicitly clear those areas
of core that are expected to contain zeros (that is, the programs
should
be self-initializing).
This allows programs to be
restarted by a CTRL/C, START sequence without having to issue
another RUN command.
Format
RUN dev:file.EXE[directory] core/switch
Where:

dev: is the logical or physical name of the device
containing the core image.
The default device name is
DSK: .

file.EXE is the name of the
program you want to run.

file

that

contains

the

NOTE
Old-style SAVE files (.SAV, .HGH., .SHR) can be
run with the RUN command.
However, the .EXE
format is recommended over the .SAV format.
[directory] is the directory name,
which is required
only if the core image file is located in a disk area
other than yours.
If a directory specification is
issued in the command string and the device is SYS:,
the specified directory overrides the assumed device
(SYS: ) .
core is the amount of core memory if this amount is
different from either the minimum core needed to load
the program, or the core argument of the SAVE command
that saved the file.
If core is greater than the minimum low segment size
and is less than the sum of the high segment and the
minimum low segment size, then the core assignment is
the low segment size.
If core is greater than the sum of the minimum low
segment and the high segment size,
then the core
assignment is the size of both the low and high
segments.
Core arguments can be specified in units of 1024 words
or 512 words (a page) by following the number with K or
P, respectively. For example, 2P represents 2 pages or
1024 words.
If K or P is not specified, K (1024 words)
is assumed.
2-230

SYSTEM COMMANDS

RUN Command
Iswitch is one of the following options:

/START:n"addr

Specifies the octal section number
(n)
and address
(addr)
at which the core
image starts.
Valid section numbers
are 0-37, octal.

/USE:n

Specifies the octal section number
in which a core image executes.

Characteristics

Places your terminal at user level.
Examp1e

Type a test program .
. TYPE PROG.FOR<RET>
TYPE 69
69
FORMAT ('TESTING EXECUTION')
END
Load the program .
. LOAD PROG<RET>
LINK:
LOADING
[LNKCXT PROG EXECUTION]
END OF EXECUTION
CPU TIME:
0.02 ELAPSED TIME:
EXIT

0.12

Save the program, creating an executable file .
. SAVE<RET>
PROG SAVED
Run the program .
. RUN PROG<RET>
TESTING EXECUTION
END OF EXECUTION
CPU TIME:
0.02 ELAPSED TIME:
EXIT

2-231

0.07

(n)

SYSTEM COMMANDS

SAVE Command
SAVE Command
Function
The SAVE and SSAVE commands create executable image files from
programs
that
are
loaded in core memory.
SAVE creates
non-sharable files with the extension .EXE.
SSAVE creates
sharable files with the extension .EXE.
After you use SAVE or SSAVE to create an .EXE file, you
the program with the RUN command.

can

run

Format
SAVE dev:file.EXE[directory] core/switch
Where:

dev: is the device on which the core image file is to
be written.
The default device name is DSK:.
The
colon following the device name is required if a device
is specified.
file is the name to be assigned to the core image file.
The default file name is your job's current name as set
by your last R, RUN, or GET command; the last command
that ran a program (for example, DIRECT); or the last
SETNAM monitor call .
. EXE is the default file extension.
optional.

This

argument

[directory] is the location on the disk area where
core image file is to be written.

the

core is the amount of core in which the program is to
be run.
This value is stored in JOBDAT as the job's
core area, (.JBCOR) and is used by subsequent RUN and
GET commands.
This argument is optional.
You can specify core arguments in units of 1024 words
or 512 words (a page) by following the number with K or
P respectively.
For example, 2P represents 2 pages or
1024 words.
If you do not specify K or P, K (1024
words) is assumed.
If core is omitted, only the number of blocks required
by the core image area (as explained in the RUN command
description) is assumed.
/switch is the following option:
/START:n"addr

Allows you to save a multi-section
program with a starting address in
section n, address addr.

Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Does not operate while I/O is in progress.
Requires memory.
Can save multiple high segments.
2-232

(SSAVE cannot.)

SYSTEM COMMANDS
SAVE Command
Example

Load a program .
. LOAD PROG<RET>
FORTRAN: PROG
MAIN.
LINK:
LOADING
EXIT
Save the file with SAVE .
. SAVE PROG<RET>
PROG SAVED
Use DIRECTORY to see the new .EXE file .
. DIR PROG<RET>
PROG
FOR
1
PROG
REL
1
PROG
EXE
68
TOTAL OF 131 BLOCKS

<055>
dd-mmm-yy
<055>
dd-mmm-yy
<055>
dd-mmm-yy
IN 5 FILES ON DSKC:

Run the program .
. RUN PROG<RET>
THIS IS PROGRAM OUTPUT
END OF EXECUTION
CPU TIME: 0.02 ELAPSED TIME: 0.07
EXIT

2-233

DSKC:
[27,5434]

[27,5434]

SYSTEM COMMANDS
SCHED Command
SClIED Command

Function

The SCHED command prints the schedule bits set by the operator.
You can obtain this information before you log in to determine
the use of the system (for example, regular timesharing or batch
jobs only).
The schedule bits are as follows:
Meaning

Bits

0000

Regular timesharing.

0001

No further LOGINS allowed except from CTY.

0002

No further LOGINS from remote
and no answering of data sets.

0004

Batch jobs only.

0010

No remote terminals.

0100

Device mounts can be done without operator
intervention.

0200

Unspooling allowed.

0400

No operator coverage.

1000

No automatic downline loading of nodes.

Format

SCHED
Characteristics

Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Does not require that you be logged in.
Examples

Regular timesharing .
. SCHED<RET>
000000

No operator coverage .
. SCHED<RET>
000400

2-234

terminals,

SYSTEM COMMANDS
SCHED Command
3.

No LOG INs allowed from local or
sets are not answered .

remote

terminals

and

data

. SCHED<RET>
000002

Regular timesharing, but no operator coverage. Device mounts
can be accomplished without operator intervention .
. SCHED<RET>
000500

2-235

SYSTEM COMMANDS

SEND Conunand
SEND Command

Function
The SEND conunand provides one-way interterminal conununication. A
single line of information is transmitted from the initiating
terminal to the terminal specified in the SEND conunand string.
The recipient of the SEND receives the terminal line number of
the sender as well as the message.
A busy test is made on a single-destination message before the
message is sent, unless the sender or receiver of the message is
aPR or a job logged in as [1,2].
The receiver of the message is
considered busy if the terminal is not at monitor conunand level.
If the receiving terminal is busy,
the sender receives the
message BUSY and the information is not sent.
However, the
receiving terminal always receives the message if it has the TTY
NO GAG bit set (refer to the SET TTY NO GAG conunand) .
If the receiving terminal is hardwired and turned off,
the
information appears to have been sent because the software cannot
detect an OFF condition on hardwired terminals.
Terminals in
IMAGE and Packed Image Mode (PIM) mode do not receive messages.
Formats
SEND TTYn:

text

SEND JOB n text
Where:

TTYn: is any physical terminal name,
including CTY:
(console terminal) and aPR:.
If you specify aPR:, the
system sends the message to the operator's terminal at
the node to which your terminal is connected.
n is the job-number to which the message is to be sent.
text is the message to be transmitted.

The message is printed on the receiving terminal in the following
format:
; ; TTYn : - text
Where:

n is the sender's terminal number.
text is the message.
A bell sounds on the
message is printed.

receiving

terminal

when

the

You can specify an operator on a particular node by entering
terminal identifier in the form:

the

OPRxx:
Where:

xx is the number of the operator's node.
See Example 4 below.

2-236

SYSTEM COMMANDS
SEND Command
Characteristics

Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Does not require LOGIN.
Restrictions

The SEND command is not available to batch jobs.
Examples

Send a message to TTY62:
.SEND TTY62:

Ask your operator to write-enable a DECtape drive:
.SEND OPR:

YOU HAVE THE SYSTEM STAND-ALONE<RET>

PLEASE WRITE-ENABLE DTA3:<RET>

Send a message to job 69:
.SEND JOB 69 THE TAPE IS WRITE ENABLED<RET>

Send a message to the operator on node 17:
.SEND OPR17:

LPT171 UPPER CASE ONLY?<RET>

2-237

SYSTEM COMMANDS
SESSION Command
SESSION Command

Function
The SESSION command allows you to change the account and remark
strings of your job.
If your system is not running with account
validation, the SESSION command has no effect.
If your system is
running with account validation, you can use the SESSION command
to change the billing profile of your job.
For example, you may have several projects,
each of which is
charged to a separate account.
Therefore,
several account
strings are valid for your PPN.
The SESSION command allows you
to change the account string for your job without logging out and
logging in again.
Thus, all subsequent charges will be made to
the new account.
If account validation is enabled, the string you type must match
one of the accounts assigned to your PPN.
The string must match
in case (lower or uppercase),
although this feature can be
changed by the system administrator.

Formats
SESSION<RET>
ACCOUNT:string<RET>
REMARK: text
This format prompts you for the required information.
string is not required, you are not prompted for it.
Where:

string is the account string for the account
you want any subsequent charges to be made.

either

which

text is the remark string.
You can type anything here
to identify your work.
The remark string is limited to
39 characters.
SESSION/switches
This format allows you to specify one or both strings in
command line.
The valid switches are:

the

/ACCOUNT:"string"

Specifies the account string for the
account to which all subsequent charges
should be made.
The account string must
be enclosed in quotation marks if it
contains any nonalphanumeric characters.
The account string is case sensitive.

/HELP

Prints the HELP text, listing
switches and how to use them.

/REMARK: "text"

Specifies
the
remark
string
for
subsequent
charges.
You
can type
anything for the string ("text")
up to
39 characters.
The remark string must
be enclosed in quotation marks if it
contains any nonalphanumeric characters.

2-238

available

SYSTEM COMMANDS

SESSION Conunand
Characterist1cs

Leaves your terminal at
information is supplied.

monitor

level

when

all

required

Destroys your core image.
Examples

The following example shows the procedure for changing the
account string to DATA-AQ.
In this case, the account string
is required for the job, but the remark string is not
required .
. SESSION<RET>
ACCOUNT:DATA-AQ<RET>

The following example shows the procedure for supplying
the account and remark strings in the conunand line:
.SESSION/A<;::COUNT: "DATA-AQ"/REMARK: "SALES RESEARCH"<RET>

2-239

both

SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET BLOCKSIZE Command
SET BLOCKSIZE Command

Function

The SET BLOCKSIZE command sets a default blocksize (in words) for
the specified magnetic tape.
Format

SET BLOCKSIZE dev:nnnn
Where:

dev:
is either the physical device name,
written in
the format MTxn:,
or the logical name previously
associated with the device.
The device must
be
assigned to your job. This argument is necessary.
See
Section 1.9.1 for information about device names.

nnnn is a decimal number between 3 and 4094 designating
the block size for this magnetic tape. No additional
checking is done for the legality of the specified
number in addition to the check for the maximum 4094
and a minimum of 3.
This argument is required.
Characteristics

Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Example

Assign the logical name WEEK2 to magnetic tape unit 4 .
. ASSIGN MTA4:WEEK2<RET>
MTA4 ASSIGNED
Set the block size of magnetic tape unit 4 to 2000 .
. SET BLOCKSIZE WEEK2: 2000<RET>

2-240

SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET BREAK Command
SET BREAK Command

Function

The SET BREAK command is used during the debugging process on a
KL10 processor only.
It is useful when the program that is being
debugged:
o

will not fail when DDT has been loaded.

Destroys DDT when DDT is loaded.

Destroys the contents of
a
memory
location
unpredictable point during program execution.

It is possible to break when the specified location is read from,
written into,
and/or fetched.
It is also possible to break on
monitor references to items in your address space.
This is
useful when the monitor stores or retrieves arguments to/from
unexpected locations in your address space because of erroneous
monitor call argument lists.
If you are breaking on a WRITE condition,
the WRITE condition
causing the break will not have been executed.
Therefore, the
instruction located at PC and all operands should be examined
before continuing program execution.
Formats

SET BREAK
SET BREAK AT addr ON condition AFTER x, ...
SET BREAK AT n"addr ON condition AFTER x, ...
SET BREAK NO condition
SET BREAK NONE
Where:

AT, ON, and AFTER are optional portions of the
line.

command

addr is an octal number in the range
0-777777,
representing a user virtual address.
The address is
not necessary.
condition is one or more reasons for allowing the break
to
occur.
The condition is not necessary.
The
condition arguments are listed below.

x is the number of times the sequence should run before
the break occurs.
The variable is any decimal number
from 1 to 511.
n is a section number ranging from 0-37 octal.
commas separating nand addr are optional.

2-241

The

SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET BREAK Command

these
Multiple conditions can be specified within one command;
The
conditions are separated from one another by commas.
possible conditions that can be specified are:
READ

Breaks if the contents of addr are read by the program.
This
condition
causes
a
break to occur on a
read-modify-write as well as on a read.

WRITE

Breaks if the location specified
into.

EXECUTE

Breaks if an instruction is fetched from
specified in the command string.

ALL

Breaks if the location specified in the command string
is read from (READ), written into (WRITE), or fetched
from (EXECUTE).

MUUO

Breaks on monitor references
WRITE, and/or EXECUTE.

addr

written

the

location

qualified

READ,

If all three break conditions are to be specified,
you can
include the word ALL in the command line, replacing the command
argument string: WRITE,READ,EXECUTE. When you want breaks on
monitor references for all three break conditions,
you can
include one of the following command argument strings in the
command line:
either MUUO,ALL or MUUO,READ,WRITE,EXECUTE.
If you use SET BREAK with no conditions, the previously specified
conditions are used.
If there was no previous SET BREAK command,
ALL is assumed.
When issuing a SET BREAK command without
specifying any address,
the conditions included in the command
line are ORed with existing break conditions and the previously
specified address is used.
If there are no existing break
conditions, 0 is the default address.
In summary, break addresses remain in effect until
break conditions remain in effect until removed.

changed;

If you want to remove a break condition,
the condition
removed can be specified in the following command:

and
be

SET BREAK NO condition
If all existing break conditions are to be removed, the following
command line can be issued:
SET BREAK NONE
This command will remove all existent break conditions, but will
not remove a previously specified address. An example of setting
a default break location is:
SET BREAK 1000 ON READ,WRITE,EXECUTE
SET BREAK NO READ
SET BREAK NONE
SET BREAK EXECUTE ;1000 IS DEFAULT BREAK LOCATION

2-242

SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET BREAK Command

When a break occurs, one of the messages:
%ADDRESS BREAK AT USER PC xxxxxx
%ADDRESS BREAK AT EXEC xxx xxx UUO AT USER xxxxxx
will be printed, and your terminal will be left at monitor level.
The second message is produced when MUUO was included in the SET
BREAK command line.
If you type:
. CONTINUE
the program will continue
caused the break.

execution

the

instruction

that

written

the

Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Can be used on KL10 processors only.
Does not destroy your job's core image.
Examples
1.

Break if the contents of 1000 are
program .

read

. SET BREAK AT 1000 ON READ,WRITE<RET>

Break if the instruction is
location, in this case 1000.

fetched

from

the

.SET BREAK EXECUTE<RET>
3.

Remove existing break conditions .
. SET BREAK NONE<RET>

Break at any EXECUTE or WRITE monitor references .
. SET BREAK 1000 MUUO,EXECUTE,WRITE<RET>

2-243

default

SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET CDR Conunand
SET CDR Command

Function
The SET CDR conunand sets the file name of the next file to be
read by the card reader.
The card file must be in your UFO.
This conunand is usually unnecessary, but allows you to change the
order of jobs being spooled.
The batch controller uses this
conunand to read card decks.
Format
SET CDR file-name
Where:

file-name must be one to three
extension is assumed to be .CDR.

characters;

Characteristics
Requires LOGIN.
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Destroys your core image.
Example
Create a file for output .
. TYPE FOO.CDR<RET>
THIS IS THE OUTPUT
It may be necessary to spool the card reader .
. SET SPOOL CDR<RET>
The file FOO will be the next to be read by the card reader .
. SET CDR FOO<RET>
Type the output from the card reader on your terminal .
. TYPE CDR:<RET>
THIS IS THE OUTPUT

2-244

the

SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET CPU Command
SET CPU Command

Function

The SET CPU command allows privileged users to change the
processors where jobs can run.
It is used in a multiprocessing
system to specify whether the programs that run under the job can
be processed on the primary CPU, the secondary CPU, or either
CPU.
The job remains with the specified CPU until:
o

another SET CPU command with
given,

different

specification

a KJOB command is issued,

a privileged user's program overrides the SET CPU command
issuing the SETUUO with a different specification.

If the SETUUO overrides the command, the specification given in
the monitor call remains in effect until a RESET or EXIT monitor
call or another SETUUO with a different specification
is
executed.
When an EXIT or RESET monitor call is executed, the
job reverts to the specification given in the last SET CPU
command.
When you log in, the CPU specification is usually set
to ALL.
The schedulers for each CPU compete for jobs with the
ALL specification so that the load is dynamically balanced
between CPUs.
Therefore, this command is generally not needed
but is provided in case you want to change the CPU specification.
Formats

SET CPU CPxn
Adds the specified

CPU to your job's CPU specification.

SET CPU NO CPxn
Removes the specified CPU from your job's CPU specification.
SET CPU ALL
Adds all of the CPUs

to your job's

CPU specification.

SET CPU ONLY CPxn
Changes the CPU specification so that it includes
specified CPU.
Where:

only

the

number

x is:
U designating a logical name,
L

designating a KLIO processor,

n is a decimal number
processors in the system.

2-245

from

the

SYSTEM COMMANDS

SET CPU Command
Characteristics

Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Does not destroy your job's core image.
Restrictions

The privileges required for using this command are determined
bit 5 (JP.CCC) of the privilege word, .GTPRV.
Examp1es

Your job can run only on CPU1 .
. SET CPU ONLY CPUl<RET>

Your job can run on CPU1 .
. SET CPU CPU1<RET>

2-246

SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET DDT BREAKPOINT Command
SET DDT BREAKPOINT Command

Function
The SET DDT BREAKPOINT command enables the DDT breakpoint
facility.
If the breakpoint facility is on and if DDT is loaded
with the program,
you can type CTRL/D to interrupt program
execution and use DDT to examine the state of the program. When
the facility is turned off, CTRL/D is passed to the program.
Format
SET DDT BREAKPOINT argument
Where:

the word BREAKPOINT may be omitted.
argument may be ON, OFF, or omitted.
If the argument is
omitted,
SET DDT reports the breakpoint status without
changing it.

Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at user level.
Does not destroy your core image.
Restriction
Note that CTRL/D is meaningful only to DDT and VMDDT.
It will
not have this effect on programs loaded with a compiler-specific
debugger like FORDDT.
Example
Enable the DDT breakpoint facility .
. SET DDT ON<RET>
[Control-D breakpoint facility is turned on]
Debug a MACRO program that increments and prints a number,
once
per second.
Use the DDT command $G to start program execution.
Then type CTRL/D to stop the program and examine the current
location with DDT.
Then type $p to continue execution.
Use
CTRL/Z to exit to monitor level. Note that CTRL/D is shown here,
although it does not echo on your terminal .
. DEBUG BPT.MAC<RET>
MACRO: BPT
LINK:
Loading
[LNKDEB DDT execution]
DDT
$G

2-247

SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET DDT BREAKPOINT Command
This program will increment a count, once per second.
1

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

10
<CTRL/D>
$OB»LOOpt+12/ JRST LOOpt $p
11
12
13
14
<CTRL/D>
$OB>LOOpt+1/
SLEEP 1,
AZ

2-248

SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET DEFAULT BIGBUF Command
SET DEFAULT BIGBUF Command

Function

The SET DEFAULT BIGBUF command sets the disk buffer size for the
job.
Disk I/O can be improved by increasing the disk buffer
size, but buffers increase the size of the job.
with the SET DEFAULT BIGBUF command, each added block gives you
200 octal words of disk buffer. For example, SET DEFAULT BIGBUF
5 sets the buffer size to 5 blocks
(1200 octal words).
SET
DEFAULT BIGBUF 0 defaults the buffer size to one block.
The
maximum value for SET DEFAULT BIGBUF is 31. When big buffers are
in use,
TOPS-10 defaults to a value of four blocks (1000 octal
words) .
Because the SET DEFAULT BIGBUF command sets the buffer size for
the job, the buffer size will remain the same until the user logs
out, or changes it by using the command again.
NOTE
In order to use big buffers, the program that is
doing disk I/O must be written to utilize the
buffer size.
Otherwise,
this command has no
effect on your job except to increase job size.
Format

SET DEFAULT BIGBUF n
Where:

n is 0 through 31 decimal.
This value indicates
number of blocks (200 octal words) per buffer.

Characteristics

Requires LOGIN.
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Does not destroy your core image.
Example
Set the disk buffer size to 5 blocks .
. SET DEFAULT BIGBUF 5<RET>

2-249

the

SYSTEM COMMA!Jl)S

SET DEFAULT BUFFERS Command
SET DEFAULT BUFFERS Command

Function
The SET DEFAULT BUFFERS command changes the number of buffers in
your memory area.
The default number of buffers for disk is 6;
for all other devices, the default number is 2.
Use this command
to increase or decrease the number of memory buffers that your
program will use.
A larger number of buffers will usually allow your program to run
faster. A smaller number of buffers will allow you to run larger
programs.
NOTE
If you increase the number of buffers,
it may
interfere with the operation of overlay programs
and other large programs.
Format
SET DEFAULT BUFFERS n
Where:

n is the number of disk buffers you want your program
to use.
The argument is a decimal number between 0 and
511. When n is 0, the number of buffers is set to the
system default,
which is 6 for disk, and 2 for all
other devices.

Characteristics
Requires LOGIN.
Does not destroy your core image.
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Examp1e
Set the number of buffers to 4 .
. SET DEFAULT BUFFERS 4<RET>

2-250

SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET DEFAULT PROTECTION Command
SET DEFAULT PROTECTION Command

Function
The SET DEFAULT PROTECTION command sets a default protection code
for files you create during the job. Any value you set with this
command overrides the system's standard protection code.
Your
system administrator sets the system's standard protection code,
which is usually <055> or <057>.
The default protection code set
by using this command will be in effect for any of your programs.
Formats
SET DEFAULT PROTECTION <nnn>
SET DEFAULT PROTECTION ON
SET DEFAULT PROTECTION OFF
Where:

<nnn> is the value that you can specify as
protection code for any files you might create.

the

ON tells the system to use the protection code you
specified previously,
even though you may have since
used the SET DEFAULT PROTECTION OFF command.
OFF tells the system to use the system's standard
protection code when you create files, even if you have
issued a SET DEFAULT PROTECTION <nnn> command.
Associated Commands
PRESERVE - This command can be used to assign a protection code
of <157> or <155> to any or all of existing files.
PROTECT

- This command can be used to assign any protection code
to any or all of existing files.

Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Example
Create a file with TECO .
. MAKE PROTEC.TST<RET>
*EX<ESC><ESC>
Use DIRECTORY to see the protection of the file .
. DIR PROTEC.TST<RET>
PROTEC TST 0 <055> dd-mmm-yy DSKC:
Change the default protection code .
. SET DEFAULT PROTECT <175><RET>

2-251

[27,5434]

SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET DEFAULT PROTECTION Command

Create another file with TECO .
. MAKE PROTEC.TS1<RET>
*EX<ESC><ESC>
DIRECTORY shows both files .
. DIR PROTEC<RET>
PROTEC TST 0 <055> dd-mmm-yy DSKC:
PROTEC TS1 0 <175> dd-mmm-yy

[27,5434]

Note the old protection and the new protection.
Turn the specified protection off .
. SET DEFAULT PROTECT OFF<RET>
Create a third file .
. MAKE PROTEC.TS2<RET>
*EX<ESC><ESC>
A DIRECTORY shows the 3 files .
. DIR PROTEC<RET>
PROTEC TST 0 <055> dd-mmm-yy DSKC:
PROTEC TS1 0 <175> dd-mmm-yy
PROTEC TS2 0 <055> dd-mmm-yy

[27,5434]

Note the protection codes.
Turn the protection code on.
.SET DEFAULT PROTECT ON<RET>
Create a fourth file .
. MAKE PROTECT.TS3<RET>
*EX<ESC><ESC>
DIRECTORY shows the 4 files .
. DIR PROTEC<RET>
PROTEC TST <055> dd-mmm-yy DSKC:
PROTEC TS1 <175> dd-mmm-yy
PROTEC TS2 <055> dd-mmm-yy
PROTEC TS3 <175> dd-mmm-yy

Note the protection codes.

2-252

[27,5434]

SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET DEFER Command
SET DEFER Command

Function

The SET DEFER command causes all output requests (except disk and
tape output)
generated by programs run by your job to be
deferred.
These requests will be processed when you log out.
Any files that are generated implicitly by a system program
(DIRECT, CREF) and automatically output to the line printer, card
punch,
plotter,
or paper tape'punch will be held by QUEUE until
you log out. When you log out,
the files are output to the
appropriate devices, or spooled for output, if spooling is set.
Deferred queuing can also be set by logging in with the
switch.
This function is the default for batch jobs.
To prevent all future
NODEFER.

requests

from

being

deferred,

/DEFER
use

SET

To queue any deferred requests that are being held for your job,
use the appropriate queue command (CPUNCH, PLOT, PRINT, QUEUE, or
TPUNCH) followed by two switches:
/DEFERRED and /CREATE.
To
delete the deferred requests without output, use /DEFERRED and
/KILL.
/DEFERRED releases any requests that are being held for
your job,
and processes them according to the other switch that
you specify.
Format

SET DEFER
Causes all following output requests from
until you log out.

programs

held

SET NODEFER
Causes all following output requests to be handled
This is the default function for timesharing jobs.

immediately.

Characteristics

Does not destroy your job's core image.
Example

The following example
command.

illustrates

the

use

the

SET

DEFER

Set output requests to be deferred
(held)
until you log out.
Also,
if the appropriate devices for your job are not yet
spooled, use the SET SPOOL command to spool them.
(Refer to the
SET SPOOL command.)
.SET DEFER<RET>
.SET SPOOL ALL<RET>

2-253

SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET DEFER Command

Compile a FORTRAN program,
using the /CREF switch to obtain
cross-referenced listing files that can be processed by the CREF
program .
. COMPILE NUMBER.FOR/CREF<RET>
FORTRAN:
MAIN.

NUMBER

When compilation is complete, use the CREF command to run CREF.
the CREF listing is sent
When deferred spooling is not set,
directly to the line printer .
. CREF<RET>
CREF :

NUMBER

After CREF is finished, check your entries in the line printer
queue.
The files produced by CREF are deferred, so there are no
entries in the queue from your job .
. PRINT/CHECK<RET>
[THE QUEUES ARE EMPTY]
Use the PRINT/DEFERRED/CREATE command to print the CREF listings.
The files are released and then spooled .
. PRINT/DEFERRED/CREATE<RET>
[PRINTER JOB NUMBER QUEUED, REQUEST #448, LIMIT 6]
Check the printer queue again.

The CREF listings are queued .

. PRINT/CHECK<RET>
PRINTER QUEUE:
JOB NAME
REQ#

LIMIT

USER

NUMBER
448
6
MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
THERE IS 1 JOB IN THE QUEUE (NONE IN PROGRESS)
Using SET NODEFER, stop having requests deferred .
. SET NODEFER<RET>
Using the DIRECTORY command, obtain a file that contains a list
of the files in the directory.
Using the .LST extension ensures
that the file will be deleted from your directory after it is
printed .
. DIRECT FILES.LST=/L<RET>
TOTAL OF 42 FILES
Check the printer queue.
in the queue .

Your job now has two

. PRINT/CHECK<RET>
PRINTER QUEUE:
JOB NAME
REQ#

LIMIT

USER

NUMBER
448
6
MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
FILES
449
6
MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
THERE ARE 2 JOBS IN THE QUEUE (NONE IN PROGRESS)
2-254

printer

requests

SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET DENSITY Coromand
SET DENSITY Command

Function

The SET DENSITY coromand sets a default density
(bits/inch)
for
the specified magnetic tape.
You must have the device assigned
to your job to use SET DENSITY.
Format

SET DENSITY dev:density
Where:

dev:
is the physical or logical name of the magnetic
tape device for which the density is to be set. Refer
to Section 1.9.1 for a description of device names.
density is one of the following:

200 bits/inch
556 bits/inch
800 bits/inch
1600 bits/inch
6250 bits/inch

(8.1 rows/rom)
(22.5 rows/rom)
(32.2 rows/rom)
(65.3 rows/rom)
(255.5 rows/rom)

Both arguments are required.
Characteristics

Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Associated Messages

If the density argument is not compatible with the list above, an
error message is printed:
?ILLEGAL DENSITY FOR DRIVE
Example

Set the density of magnetic-tape unit 5 to 556 .
. SET DENSITY MTA5:556<RET>

2-255

SYSTEM COMMANDS

SET DSKFUL Command

Function
The SET DSKFUL command controls the treatment of your job when it
is attempting output and there is either not enough space
available on the file structure being referenced or your quota
for that structure is exceeded.

Formats
SET DSKFUL ERROR
Stops output and an error condition is passed to the
program.
Most programs respond to the error condition by
issuing an error message and returning your job to monitor
level without any opportunity for you to continue.
SET DSKFUL PAUSE
Stops output and suspends execution of the program.
An
error message is printed on your terminal and control of the
job is returned to the monitor.
Generally, you should use
the SEND command at this point to request assistance from
the operator.
Execution of the program can be resumed with the CONTINUE
command as long as you do not issue a command that destroys
the core image of the interrupted program.
However,
the
program will again be stopped if the problem of insufficient
disk space or insufficient quota has not been corrected in
the interim.
The default setting is ERROR unless you specify
switch to LOGIN.

Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Example
.SET DSKFUL PAUSE<RET>

2-256

otherwise

SYSTEM COMMANDS

SET DSKPRI Command
SET DSKPRI Command

Function

The SET DSKPRI command allows privileged users to set the
priority for their job'~ disk operations (data transfers and head
positionings).
The standard priority is 0,
and the range of
permissible values is -3 to +3.
This means that a priority lower
than the standard can be specified as well as one higher than the
standard.
The priority specified applies to all disk I/O
channels currently open or subsequently opened whose priority has
not been explicitly set with a DISK. monitor call.
(See the
TOPS-10 Monitor Calls Manual.) The priority specified in the SET
DSKPRI command remains in effect until one of the following
occurs:
o

Another SET
priority.

DSKPRI

command

given

with

different

A KJOB command is issued.

Your program overrides the SET DSKPRI command
DISK. monitor call with a different priority.

issuing

Format

SET DSKPRI n
Where:

is a decimal number from -3 to +3 indicating the
priority
to
be associated with your job's disk
operations. When n is 0, the priority is the normal
timesharing priority.

Characteristics

The SET DSKPRI command:
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Restrictions

The privileges required for using this command are determined by
bits 1 and 2 of the privilege word, .GTPRV.
These two bits
specify an octal number from 0-3.
You are always allowed a 0
priority.
Example

Set your priority to 2 .
. SET DSKPRI 2<RET>

2-257

SYSTEM COMMANDS

SET FORMAT Command
SET FORMAT Command

Function
The SET FORMAT command sets the mode of a tape.
Format
SET FORMAT MTxn:mode
Where:

MTxn: is the physical or logical name of the magnetic
tape device for which the mode is to be set. Refer to
Section 1.9.1 for a description of device names.
mode is one of the following:
ANSI (for ANSI-ASCII)
BYTE
DUMP (for COREDUMP)
INDUST (for industry compatible)
SIXBIT
SYSTEM (for system default)

Characteristics
Requires LOGIN.
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Does not destroy core image.
Example
Set the format of MTA1 to ANSI mode .
. ASSIGN MTA1<RET>
MTA1 assigned
.SET FORMAT MTA1:ANSI<RET>

2-258

SYSTE¥ COMMANDS
SET HQST Command
SET HOST Command

Function

The SET HOST command connects you to another host computer on the
same DECnet or ANF-10 netwo~k.
Using the SET HOST command, you can remain at one terminal and
switch the terminal connection from one system to a different
system.
For ANF-10 networks, the n04e you specify must be a network node
where you can run LOGIN o~ an equivalent program.
The SET HOST
command cannot be used to cQnnect to a node that does not have a
command interpreter.
Use the NETWORK command with the /MCR
switch to determine the nod~s in the network that have command
interpreters.
MCR is a name that is used by the NETWORK program
to signify a command interp~eter.
Once a terminal has been co~nected to a particular ANF-10 system
through SET HOST,
it remains connected to that system until
another SET HOST command i~ issued from that terminal.
For
example:
you log in to a system, issue a SET HOST command to
KS4101 (another host system), do your work, and then log off the
system.
Then, when anothe~ user uses your terminal, he too will
be running on the KS4101 hO$t system until he issues another SET
HOST command or until the system is reloaded.
On DECnet, when you SET HOST to another system and then log off,
you do not remain connected, as you would with ANF-10, but would
drop back to your original ~ystem.
Format

SET HOST node-id
node-id is an ide~tifier of the node to which you want
to connect.
It C4n be a node-name or a node-number.

Where:
Characteristics

If you SET HOST to ANF-lO nodes, the SET HOST command:
o

Does not require LO~IN. However, if you are logged in,
your job is detac~ed when your terminal is connected to
another system.

Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

Does not destroy

yo~r

core image.

If you SET HOST to DECn9t nodes, the SET HOST command:
o

Requires LOGIN

Places your terminal at user level.

Destroys your core !mage.

Runs CTHNRT.

~-259

SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET HOST Command
Restriction

You cannot SET HOST from the TOPS-10 system through DECnet if you
used SET HOST to get to the TOPS-10 system over a DECnet link.
Associated Messages

If the specified node does not have a command interpreter,
your
job remains at your current node and the system prints the
following message:
?NODE DOES NOT SUPPORT REMOTE TERMINALS
If the node you specified is not a recognizable node in the
network,
your job remains at your current node and the system
prints the following message.
This message would occur if the
specified node was not on line, the link between the systems is
down, or you misspelled the node name.
?UNDEFINED NETWORK NODE
If you omit the node-id argument, the system prints the following
error message:
?NOT ENOUGH ARGUMENTS
Examples

You attempt to SET HOST to an ANF-10
node by number:

node,

identifying

the

.SET HOST 26 <RET>
[BC173B KL #1026/1042] hh:mm:ss TTY72 system 1026/1042
Connected to Node KL1026(26) Line # 0
Please LOGIN or ATTACH

You attempt to SET HOST to an ANF-10
node by name:

node,

identifying

.SET HOST TWINKY<RET>
[Twinky KL702/21A] dd-mmm-yy hh:mm:ss TTY111 System 2197
Connected to Host TWINKY(77) via node KL1026(26) Line # 55
Please LOGIN or ATTACH

2-260

the

SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET HOST Command

You SET HOST to a DECnet node, log in,
and log out again.
Notice that after logging out you are returned automatically
to your original node .
. SET HOST QARRY<RET>
[Connected to VMS system QARRY::, using CTERM protocol]
[Type A\,<RET> to return]
Username: FRANCINI<RET>
Password: <RET>
This is MicroVMS version v .

on node QARRY

Last interactive login on Thursday, DD-MMM-YYYY 18:04
Last non-interactive login on Wednesday, DD-MMM-YYYY 18:29
$
$ LOGOUT<RET>
FRANCINI
logged out at DD-MMM-YYYY 15:31:07.28
[Connection closed by remote: User unbind request]

2-261

SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET HPQ Command
SET HPQ Command

Function
The SET HPQ command allows privileged users to place their jobs
in
a
high-priority
run queue.
When your job is in a
high-priority run queue, you can obtain a faster response than in
the normal timesharing queues.
The job remains in the specified
high-priority queue until one of the following occurs:
o

You issue another SET
high-priority queue.

You log out.

Your program overrides the SET HPQ command by issuing an
monitor call with a different value.

HPQ

command

specifying

different

HPQ

If an HPQ monitor call overrides the command, the level specified
in the monitor call remains in effect until a RESET or EXIT
monitor call or another HPQ monitor call with a different value
is executed.
When an EXIT or RESET monitor call is executed, the
job is returned to the high-priority queue specified in the last
SET HPQ command.
Format
SET HPQ n
Where:

n is a decimal number from a to 15 indicating the
high-priority queue to be entered.
When n is 0, the
queue is the normal timesharing queue.
Queue numbers
from 1 to 15 are high-priority queues.
The number of
high-priority queues is an installation parameter and
can be less than 15.

Associated Messages
If you are not privileged, the
message:

system

responds

with

error

?NO PRIVS TO SET PRIORITY THAT HIGH
Characteristics
Does not destroy your core image.
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Requires LOGIN.
Restrictions
The privileges required for using this command are determined by
bits 6 through 9 of the privilege word, .GTPRV.
These four bits
specify an octal number from 0-17,
which is the
highest
high-priority queue you can attain.

2-262

SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET HPQ Conunand
Example

You try to set your run queue to 4 .
. SET HPQ 4<RET>
?NO PRIVS TO SET PRIORITY THAT HIGH
Your job is placed in high-priority queue number 2 .
. SET HPQ 2<RET>

2-263

SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET PHYSICAL Command
SET PHYSICAL Command

Fwlction
The SET PHYSICAL command sets the maximum current physical page
limit (CPPL) that your job can use, if the word LIMIT is included
in the command line.
(CPPL is described in the TOPS-I0 Monitor
Calls Manual.)
By including the word GUIDELINE in the command line,
the SET
PHYSICAL command is used to establish a guideline for the
page-fault handler.
The page-fault handler will then use the
specified figure as a guideline in determining when a program
will go virtual.

Format
SET PHYSICAL LIMIT nP or nK
GUIDELINE nP or nK
Where:

LIMIT or GUIDELINE can be used
The default is GUIDELINE.

the

command

line.

K can be specified within the range 1 to 256K; P can be
specified within the range 1 to 5I2P.

If the command SET PHYSICAL LIMIT is given
argument, the job will never go virtual.

with

NOTE
The monitor regards a limit as a set maximum
number.
When the monitor reaches the specified
limit, it begins virtual handling.
However,
the GUIDELINE argument allows the monitor to
use discretion in determining the page size.

Characteristics
Requires LOGIN.
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Does not destroy your core image.

2-264

SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET PHYSICAL Command
Examples

Check your core memory assignment:
.CORE<RET>
VIRT. MEM. ASSIGNED 2P (CURRENT LIMIT: S12P MAX LIMIT: S12P)
PHYS. MEM. ASSIGNED 2P (GUIDELINE: S12P MAX LIMIT: SlOP)
SWAP SPACE LEFT: 3669P
Change the physical guideline to 100 pages:
.SET PHYSICAL 100P<RET>
Show core assignment:
.CORE<RET>
VIRT. MEM. ASSIGNED 2P (CURRENT LIMIT: S12P MAX LIMIT: S12P)
PHYS. MEM. ASSIGNED 2P (GUIDELINE: lOOP MAX LIMIT:S10P)
SWAP SPACE LEFT: 3671P

Show core memory assignment:
.CORE<RET>
VIRT. MEM. ASSIGNED 2P (CURRENT LIMIT: S12P MAX LIMIT: S12P)
PHYS. MEM. ASSIGNED 2P (GUIDELINE: S12P MAX LIMIT: SlOP)
SWAP SPACE LEFT: 3484P
Set your physical limit to 100 pages:
.SET PHYSICAL LIMIT 100P<RET>
Show your memory assignment:
.CORE<RET>
VIRT. MEM. ASSIGNED 2P (CURRENT LIMIT: S12P MAX LIMIT: S12P)
PHYS. MEM. ASSIGNED 2P (CURRENT LIMIT: lOOP MAX LIMIT: SlOP)
SWAP SPACE LEFT: 3484P

2-265

SYSTEM COMMANDS

SET RETRY Command
SET RETRY Command

Function
The SET RETRY command controls the function of the DXIO tape
drive controller.
When retry is set, the controller recovers
from soft errors, and it reports both soft and hard errors in
SYS:ERROR.SYS.
When retry is off,
the controller does not
recover from soft errors and all errors are reported as hard
errors in ERROR.SYS.

Format
SET RETRY MTxn:

This format of the SET RETRY command sets the recovery
function.
This is the default function of the controller.
SET RETRY MTxn:

OFF

This format of the command turns off the recovery function.
Where:

MTxn: is the individual device name of the magnetic
tape drive.
If you have assigned a logical name to the
drive, you may substitute the logical name for the
device name.

Characteristics
Leaves your job at monitor level.
Does not affect your job's core image.
Example
The following example shows how the recovery function is set:
.SET RETRY MTA5:

ON<RET>

2-266

SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET SPOOL Command
SET SPOOL Command

Function

The SET SPOOL command adds devices to or deletes devices from the
current list of devices being spooled for your job.
Spooling is
the mechanism by which I/O to or from slow-speed devices is
simulated on disk. Devices capable of being spooled are the line
printer, the card punch, the card reader, the paper tape punch,
and the plotter.
Formats

SET SPOOL dev1:,dev2:, ... ,devn:
Adds the specified devices to your job's spool list.
SET SPOOL ALL
Places al} spooling devices into the spool list.
SET SPOOL NONE
Clears the entire spool list.
SET SPOOL NO dev1,dev2, ... ,devn
Removes the specified devices from your job's spool list.
Where:

are the physical device names of
one or more devices to be added to or deleted from the
current spool list.
These names can be taken from the
following list:
CDP:, CDR:, LPT:, PLT:, PTP:.
Refer
to Section 1.9.1 for device name formats.
devl:,dev2:, ... ,devn:

Characteristics

Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Restrictions

To remove devices from your list of
must have one of the following:
o

spooled

devices,

your

job

The privilege bit set in .GTPRV.

oBit 28 (200 octal) set in the STATUS word by the operator SET
SCHED command.
o

Logged in under [1,2].

2-267

SYSTEM COMMANDS

SET SPOOL Command
Examples

Add the card punch to your list of spooled devices .
. SET SPOOL CDP:<RET>

Delete the line printer from your list of spooled devices .
. SET SPOOL NO LPT:<RET>

Clear your

lis~

of spooled devices .

. SET SPOOL NONE<RET>

2-268

SYSTEM COMMANDS

SET TERMINAL or TERMINAL Command
SET TERMINAL or TERMINAL Command

FWlction

The SET TERMINAL command (or TERMINAL command) is equivalent to
the SET TTY command.
Refer to the SET TTY command for a
description of its function.

2-269

SYSTEM COMMANDS

SET TIME Command
SET TIME Command

Function
The SET TIME command sets a CPU time limit for your job.
When
your job reaches the time limit, the job stops, and a message is
printed on your terminal.
You can continue your job by typing
CONTINUE, but no time limit is in effect unless it is reset.
Format
SET TIME n
Where:

is the number of seconds of CPU time that the job is
limited to.
An argument of 0 turns the time limit off.

Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Restrictions
The SET TIME command is illegal in a batch job. A batch job has
its time limit set by the /TIME switch in the QUEUE or SUBMIT
command string or on the $JQB card.
Example
Create a program with an infinite loop .
. MAKE LOOP.FOR<RET>
*110

CONTINUE<RET>
GO TO 10<RET>
END<RET>

<ESC><ESC>
*EX<ESC><ESC>
Compile and load the program .
. LOAD LOOP<RET>
FORTRAN: LOOP
MAIN.
LINK:
LOADING
EXIT
Set the time limit to 5 seconds .
. SET TIME 5<RET>

2-270

SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET TIME Cdmmand

Clear the incremental run time, so that the SET TIME command
be checked .
. TIME<RET>
11.08
11.28
KILO-CORE-SEC=95
Start the program .
. START<RET>
?TIME LIMIT EXCEEDED<RET>
As expected, the time limit was exceeded .
. TIME<RET>
5.00
16.08
KILO-CORE-SEC=134

2-271

can

SYSTEM COMHANDS

SET TTY or TTY Command

Function
The SET TTY command (or TTY command) declares properties of the
terminal on which the command is typed.
The word TERMINAL can be
used instead of the word TTY in the SET TTY command.

Defaults
The system has a terminal default for any terminal that has not
been declared to be of a particular type.
This default is
generic TTY. Before you specify the characteristics of your
terminal, the TTY defaults are in effect. The exceptions to this
are terminal input and output speeds.
To discover the characteristics that the system has assigned to
your terminal,
use the INITIA TTY command.
This is illustrated
in the example.
If you use the SET TTY TYPE command, the system assumes defaults
according to the terminal type you declared.
These defaults, and
the defaults for TTY, are listed in Table 2-1.

Table 2-1:

T
Y
P
E

Terminal Hardware Characteristics

L
0
W

T
A
B
S

F
0
R
M

I
S
P
L
A
Y

I
L
L

C
A
S
E
GIGI
LA30
LA34
LA36

Y
N
Y

Y
N

Y
Y

L
E
N

A
L
T

N
N
N
N

80
72
132
132

Y
N
N
N

0
1
0
0

24
N/A
N/A
N/A

N
N
N
N

LA38
LA120
LA180
LN01S

N
N
Y

Y
Y
Y
Y

N
Y
Y
Y

132
132
132
80

N
N
N
N

0
0
0
0

N/A
N/A
N/A
66

N
N
N
N

LN03
LT33
LT35
TTY

Y
N
N
N

Y
N
Y
N

80
72
72
72

N
N
N
N

0
1
1
1

66
N/A
N/A
N/A

N
Y
Y

TTY33
TTY35
VK100
VT05

N
N
Y
N

N
Y
N
N

72
72
80
72

N
N
Y
Y

1
1
0
2

N/A
N/A
24
20

Y
Y

2-272

Y
N
N

SYSTEM COMMANDS

SET TTY or TTY Command
Table 2-1:

Terminal Hardware Characteristics (Cont.)

T
Y

T
A

F
0

W
I

D
T
H

R
C

A
S
E

D
I

S
P

F
I

L
L

L
A
Y

VT06
VT50
VT52
VT61

N
Y
Y
Y

N
N
N
N

72
80
80
80

Y
Y
Y
Y

VT100
VT101
VT102
VT103

Y
Y
Y
Y

N
N
N
N

80
80
80
80

Y
Y
Y
Y

VT125
VT131
VT180
VT185

Y
Y
Y
Y

N
N
N
N

80
80
80
80

Y
Y
Y
Y

VT200
VT220
VT240
VT300

Y
Y
Y
Y

N
N
N
N

80
80
80
80

Y
Y
Y
Y

VT320
VT330
VT340

Y
Y
Y

N
N
N

80
80
80

Y
Y
Y

a
a
a
a
0
a
a
a
a
a
0

a
0
a
a
a
a

L
E
N
G
T
H

A
L
T

25
12
24
24

N
N
N
N

24
24
24
24

N
N
N
N

24
24
24
24

N
N
N
N

24
24
24
24

N
N
N
N

24
24
24

N
N
N

NOTE
The page length is set by default for
video
terminals only.
Therefore,
the notation N/A (not
applicable) appears in the table under LENGTH for
hard-copy terminals.
Formats

SET TTY arg
Sets a characteristic for your terminal.
SET TTY NO arg
Deletes a characteristic for your terminal.

2-273

D
E

SYSTEM COMMANDS

SET TTY or TTY Command
Where:

arg is the characteristic that can be set by this
command. The arguments to SET TTY are listed below.

turns off the bits set by the argument it
For example, SET TTY LC sets lowercase
accompanies.
SET TTY NO LC turns off lowercase
capability.
ability.

The word SET is an optional portion
line.

the

command

Function

Argument

ALTMODE

Converts the ALTmode codes of 175 and 176
to the ASCII standard ESCape character 033.
NO
ALTMODE
restores
the
individual
identities
of
the
codes
175
(right
brace: }) and 176 (tilde: -).

BLANKS

Controls the output of blank lines.
NO
BLANKS suppresses the output of consecutive
RETURNS.
This is useful
for
display
terminals, because NO BLANKS will conserve
space on the screen, allowing more output
to be displayed at one time.

COpy

Controls the output of the ESCape character
to a VT5x terminal.
Refer to the VT52
Owner's Manual.

CRLF

Controls the automatic carriage return and
line feed at the end of the line. Used
with the WIDTH argument,
CRLF gives an
automatic carriage return/line feed at the
edge of the terminal screen. NO CRLF will
cause lines wider than the set WIDTH to be
truncated.
The default setting
varies
according to the terminal type.

DEBREAK

No longer supported.

DEFER

Suppresses echoing to a video terminal
until output to the terminal is finished.
This is used when you type characters
before the output is finished.
DEFER hold
the characters until the program requests
input; NO DEFER allows them to be echoed on
your terminal as soon as normal output is
complete.

DISPLAY

Notifies the system that the terminal you
are using is a display terminal. Programs
use this information to control output to
the terminal.

ECHO

Controls echoing on the terminal. NO ECHO
suppresses echoing of all characters you
type.

EIGHTBIT

Enables the terminal to accept and generate
eight bit characters. A terminal set with
the EIGHTBIT switch will be
able
to
communicate with a program that uses seven
bit characters.
2-274

SYSTEM COMMANDS

SET TTY or TTY Command
ELEMENT nnn

No longer supported.

FILL n

Assigns filler class n to the terminal.
Some terminals require one or more filler
characters to be sent following certain
control characters such as line feed (LF)
and horizontal tab (HT).
with the DN87S
front-end, there will be a short time lapse
before each character is sent.
Table 2-2 illustrates the number of fillers
sent for each character and filler class.
The
filler
characters
are
CR
(carriage-return),
and
DEL
(DELETE or
RUBOUT) for all other characters.
No fillers are supplied for image mode
output.
The default is determined by the
declared terminal type.

Table 2-2:

Fill Characters

Character
Name

Octal

Number of Fillers for Filler Class
1
2
0
3

BS
HT
LF
VT
FF
CR on output
automatic CR (3)
CRLF on output
XON
TAPE
XOFF
NTAP

010
011
012
013
014
015

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

015-012
021
022
023
024

2
1 OR 2
2
2
12
1
2
3
1
1
1
1

1 OR 2 (1)

6
6

21
3
4
9

1
1
1
1

21
3 (2)
4
9 (4)
1
1
1
1

1 if 0-3 spaces to tab stop; 2 if 4-7 spaces to tab stop.
Output only; no fillers on input.
Refer to the SET TTY CRLF command.
Sum of the fillers output for a CR and LF.

2-275

SYSTEM COMMANDS

SET TTY or TTY Command
Function

Argument

FORM

Controls the output of line-feeds for the
formfeed and vertical tab characters. NO
FORM instructs the system to output the
line-feeds.
FORM is a declaration that the
terminal has the capability of generating the
line-feeds.
The default is determined by the
declared terminal type.

GAG

Controls the reception of messages that were
sent with the SEND command. GAG instructs
the system to prevent messages from reaching
the terminal when the job is at user level.
NO GAG allows messages to reach the terminal
at any time.
The default setting is GAG.

HOLD

Controls the use of the SCROLL key on VT5x
terminals.
Refer to the VT52 Owner's Manual
for instructions on the use of this key.

IGNORE

Sets input
useless.

ISO

Controls
compatibility
with
ISO
(International
Standards
Organization)
Latin-l supplemental graphic character set.
NO ISO means DEC Multinational Character Set.
To display the current setting, you must use
the command INITIA ATTRIBUTES.

Controls the translation of lowercase letters
to
uppercase letters.
NO LC allows all
characters to be translated to uppercase by
the monitor.

speed

making

terminal

Frequently,
it is convenient to have
a
terminal with both uppercase and lowercase
simulate the behavior of one with uppercase
only.
TTY NO LC causes the monitor to
perform this simulation. The echo sent back
by the monitor always matches the case of the
characters after translation. By looking at
the
output,
you
can determine whether
translation was performed by the monitor.
The default condition is determined by the
declared terminal type.
LENGTH n

Defines the number of lines of your terminal
page.
To stop output on your terminal after
a page of length n, use the arguments STOP or
PAGE.
SBELL, SSTOP,
STOP,
XONXOF
value as the page length.

LOCALCOPY

will

use

this

Controls echoing to the terminal.
Local-copy
terminals (terminals that automatically print
each character as you type it) do not require
that
the system echo characters to the
terminal.
NO LOCALCOPY
is
the
default
setting.
Use LOCALCOPY for a local-copy
terminal.
2-276

SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET TTY or TTY Command

OVERSTRIKE

Indicates
the
terminal
allows
a
three-character
sequence
to
create one
composite output character by printing one
character, backspacing,
and then printing
another' character over the first.
To display
the current setting of this attribute, you
must use the command INITIA ATTRIBUTES.

PAGE n

Defines the number of lines on your terminal
page,
enables recognition of CTRL/Q and
CTRL/S (XON/XOFFi see Section 1.6.) and stops
output to your terminal after n lines.
That
is, TTY PAGE n is the same as TTY LENGTH n
XONXOF STOP.
The default value of n is
determined by the declared terminal type.
TTY PAGE and TTY PAGE 0 have the same effect
as TTY XONXOF.
This argument is useful for display terminals
because it prevents output from scrolling off
the screen. When output is stopped by the
system after n lines,
the terminal bell
rings.
Use CTRL/Q to continue output to your
terminal.

QUOTE

Causes a
AV
(control-V)
and character to
behave as a single super-quote character.
They will not echo separately, and a single
delete erases them both.
NO QUOTE is the
default argument.

REMOTE

Clears the "local" access characteristic for
your job. REMOTE is not recommended for use
by non-privileged users because the action
can be reversed only by an operator [1,2].
The monitor'does not -allow CTY:
to be set
REMOTE. NO REMOTE sets your terminal so that
you can log into an account that requires
local access.
For specific information on
account characteristics, including local and
remote access types, refer to the description
of REACT in the TOPS-10 Software Installation
Guide.

RTCOMPATIBILITY

Disables the CTRL/R and CTRL/T features.
(Refer to Section 1.6 for a description of
CTRL/R and CTRL/T.) NO RTCOMPATIBILITY is the
default argument.

SBELL

Sets the terminal to ring the bell when
output is automatically stopped (this is the
default action) .
NO SBELL suppresses the
bell.

2-277

SYSTEM COMMANDS

SET TTY or TTY Command
SLAVE

Specifies that the terminal becomes slaved,
so that no commands can be typed on the
terminal.
This is useful for terminals that
are ASSIGNed by another job. This command is
not recommended for use by non-privileged
users because the actions can be reversed
only by an operator [1,2], using NO SLAVE.

SPEED m n

Sets the terminal transmitting speed to m and
the receiving speed to n.
To set the same
transmitting and receiving speed, use the m
argument alone. You must adjust the speed of
your terminal to match m and n using switches
on your terminal.
NO SPEED is an invalid argument.
NOTE
Certain hardware configurations do
not allow transmit and receive speeds
to be different (also called "split
speed") .

SSTOP n

Ignores CTRL/Q until ,output is stopped either
automatically by the system,
or by CTRL/S
from user.
The page length n is optional.

STOP n

Stops output to the terminal automatically
after
n
lines.
The page length n is
optional. When you type CTRL/Q,
the page
length counter is reset to O.

TAB

Specifies that this terminal has hardware TAB
stops every eight columns.
The default is
set according to the declared terminal type.
When you use NO TAB, the monitor simulates
tabs by sending the necessary number of SPACE
characters.

TAPE

Causes CTRL/S and CTRL/Q to stop and start
the paper tape reader on a Teletype. Refer
to the TOPS-10 Monitor Calls Manual.
NO
TAPE,
the default, causes CTRL/S and CTRL/Q
to stop and resume output from the system to
the terminal.
Refer to Sections 1.6.7 and
1.6.8.

TIDY

No longer supported.

2-278

SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET TTY or TTY Command

Sets terminal characteristics defined by
declared terminal type (nnnn).

TYPE nnnn

For a list of the terminal
by the system, type:
HELP

types

the

recognized

The dutput from HELP * includes
supported terminal types.

list

TTY is a generic terminal and is the default
for terminals whose types have not been
declared.
The characteristics set for these
types are described in Table 2-2.
The characteristics that are set by declaring
the terminal type are:
LOWERCASE
TABS
FORM
WIDTH
DISPLAY
FILL
PAGE
ALTMODE
TYPE is not a necessary portion of the
command string.
For example,
you can set
your terminal type to that of an LA120 by
typing SET TTY LA120.
UC

Equivalent to SET TTY NO LC.
Translates all
lowercase letters to uppercase.
NO UC is
equivalent to SET TTY LC.

WIDTH n

Sets the terminal width (the length of the
line) to n characters.
This command combined
with the SET TTY CRLF command enables you to
specify the widest possible margin for your
terminal.
The default setting is determined
by the declared terminal type.

XONXOF

Allows you to use CTRL/S
(XOFF)
and CTRL/Q
(XON) to stop and resume system output to the
terminal.
This is the default.
NO XONXOF
prevents the system from recognizing CTRL/S
and CTRL/Q.

Characteristics

Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Does not require LOGIN.
Restrictions

The SET TTY (or TTY) command is not available to batch jobs.
Associated Commands

INITIA

displays the TTY parameters
2-279

SYSTEM COMMANDS

SET TTY or TTY Command
Example

Tell the system that your terminal is a VT340 .
. SET TTY VT340 <RET>
Issue the INITIA TTY command.
The system responds
terminal characteristics of a VT340 terminal .

with

. I TTY <RET>
RL353A DEClO Development 16:02:49 TTY162 system 1026/1042/1322
Connected to Node KL1026(26) Line. 162
TYPE:VT340
ECHO
FILL:O
CRLF
NOTAPE
NOREMOTE
NOEIGHTB
NOS LAVE

MODEL:VT340
WIDTH:80
LC
NOGAG
BLANKS
XONXOF
NOQUOTE

CLASS:VT300
LENGTH: 24
TABS
SBELL
NOALTMOD
NOUNPAUS
IDLEDI:O

2-280

APC : HARDWIRED
NOSTOP
NOFORM
DISPLA
NORTCOMP
NOESCAPE
EDITOR

the

SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET VIRTUAL LIMIT Command
SET VIRTUAL LIMIT Command

Function
The SET VIRTUAL LIMIT command sets the current virtual page limit
(CVPL).
CVPL is described in the TOPS-10 Monitor Calls Manual.
Format
SET VIRTUAL LIMIT nK
nP
Where:

K can be specified within the range 1 to 256K; P can be
specified within the range 1 to 512p.
1K equals 1024 words and 1P equals a page of 512 words.
If K and P are omitted, K is assumed.
If you use 0 for the argument, the value of CVPL is
assumed.
CVPL is set by the system administrator and
is the default virtual page limit.
LIMIT is an optional portion of the command line.

Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Example
Set your page limit to 32 pages .
. SET VIRTUAL LIMIT 32P<RET>
Run the SORT program:
.R SORT<RET>
*TEAM.RNO=TEAM.RNO/RECORD:80/KEY:1:80
/COLLATE:FILE:COLLATE.RNO<RET>
System message says that you set your page limit too low.
?SRTNEC NOT ENOUGH CORE FOR SORT/MERGE

Reset page limit .
. SET VIRTUAL LIMIT 132P<RET>
.R SORT<RET>
*TEAM.RNO=TEAM.RNO/RECORD:80/KEY:1:80
/COLLATE:FILE:COLLATE.RNO<RET>

2-281

SYSTEM COMMANDS

SET VIRTUAL LIMIT Command
Program ran successfully in the 132 pages that you specified.
[SRTXPN EXPANDING TO 130P]
SORTED 14 RECORDS
34 KEY COMPARISONS,
2 . 43 PER RECORD
16 RECORD LEAVES IN MEMORY
o RUNS
0:00:00 CPU TIME, 16.71 MS PER RECORD
0:00:00 ELAPSED TIME
*"'C

2-282

SYSTEM COMMANDS

SET WATCH Command
SET WATCH Command

Function
The SET WATCH command provides a means with which to measure the
performance status of your program.
This command tells the
system to print (or suppress) job statistics.
Formats
SET WATCH arg,arg, ...
Prints the specified WATCH statistics.
statistics using the arguments.

You

specify

the

SET WATCH ALL
Prints all the WATCH statistics.
SET WATCH NONE
Stops printing all WATCH statistics.
SET WATCH NO arg,arg, ...
Stops printing the specified WATCH statistics.
Where:

arg can be one of the following arguments:
DAY
VERSION
READ
RUN
WAIT

WRITE
MTA
CONTEXTS
FILES

The following arguments enable printing whenever a
command passes the job from monitor level to user level.

monitor

DAY

Prints the time of day, as [hh:mm:ss]

VERSION

Prints the version of the program in standard format
(refer to the VERSION command).
The version is printed
when your job issues a GET or RUN command;
a SETNAM,
GETSEG,
or SEGOP. monitor call; or if a DAEMON wait
occurs.

The following arguments print a message whenever the terminal is
returned to monitor level through the CTRL/C, EXIT, HALT, ERROR
IN JOBn, or DEVICE xxx OPR zz ACTION REQUESTED messages.
READ

Prints the incremental
modulo 4096.

RUN

Prints the incremental runtime.

2-283

number

disk

blocks

read

SYSTEM COMMANDS

SET WATCH Command
WAIT

Prints the wait time.
(That is, the time elapsed since
you started or continued your program.)

WRITE

Prints the incremental number of
modulo 4096.

When an UNLOAD command, the unload
DEASSIGN command is executed,
MTA

function

blocks
a

UUO,

written
or

When a, b, and c are 0, the information
READ will not be printed.

pertaining

When d, e, and f are 0, the information
WRITE will not be printed.

pertaining

Prints magnetic tape statistics in the form:

[MTxn:reelid READ (C/H/S)
Where:

disk

= albic WRITE (C/H/S) = d/e/f]

represents the tape controller

represents the drive unit number

reelid is the reel identification
a is the number of characters read
b is the number of hard-read errors
c is the number of soft-read errors

d is the number of characters written
e is the number of hard-write errors
f

is the number of soft-write errors

When any files are accessed,
FILES

Prints a message for each file
takes the form:

accessed.

The

message

[Fxn: dev:file.ext[ppn,sfd, ... ], error z]
Where:

(where it appears) signifies a FILOP

L for Lookup
E for Enter
R for Rename

is the channel number

is the error if the LOOKUP, ENTER, or RENAME fail.
Error codes can be found in the TOPS-10 Monitor
Calls Manual.

Note that, in the case of
suppressed.

execute-only

2-284

jobs,

this

message

SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET WATCH Command

Whenever the current context changes,
PUSH, or POP commands),
CONTEXTS

Prints information about
message is in the form:

(by the use of the CONTEXT,
the

current

context.

The

[CONTEXT contextname (n) prog]
Where:

contextname is the name (if any) of the current context
N is the current context number

prog is the name of the program
(if
current context has stored in core.

any)

that

the

Any combination of the arguments can be specified in any order.
Statistics are not printed for commands that do not run programs,
such as ASSIGN or PJOB. When you log in,
your job is set to
WATCH the statistics for which you notified the system manager.
The information on what statistics to WATCH is kept in ACCT.SYS.
The default is MTA.
Associated Messages

If you type SET WATCH with no arguments,
or
argument, the following error message occurs:

with

invalid

?ARGS ARE: CONTEXTS,DAY,RUN,WAIT,READ,WRITE,VERSION,MTA,
FILES,ALL,NONE
NOTE
Enabling WATCH
output
interacts
with
the
incremental data printed by the TIME and DSK
commands.
Characteristics

Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Examp1e

List the arguments:
.SET WATCH<RET>
?ARGS ARE: CONTEXTS,DAY,RUN,WAIT,READ,WRITE,VERSION,MTA,
FILES,ALL,NONE
Set the statistics for time, run time, wait time, version number:
.SET WATCH DAY<RET>
.SET WATCH RUN<RET>
.SET WATCH WAIT<RET>
.SET WATCH VERSION<RET>

2-285

SYSTEM COMMANDS
SET WATCH Command
Run a program:
.RUN LOOP<RET>
[hh:mm: ss]
?LOOP.SAV NOT FOUND
[0.06 0.91
]
.R PIP<RET>
[hh:mm: ss]
[S:PIP

33B(260) + ]

*C
[0.08 6.08
.R TECO<RET>
[hh:mm: ss]
[ S: TECO 230 (1 62 ) + ]

*C
[2.05 6.10

2-286

SYSTEM COMMANDS
SHOW ALLOCATION Command
SHOW ALLOCATION Command

Function
The SHOW ALLOCATION command prints information on your terminal
about the resources that are allocated to your job.
SHOW
ALLOCATION prints the names of the tape and disk volumes and
volume sets that are allocated and mounted for your job, and the
drives on which they are mounted.
The information is printed on
form:

your

terminal

the

following

ALLOCATION FOR JOB x user-name [ppn]

volume

name

TYPE

RESOURCES

VOLUME SET

description

ALL

OWN

no.

Where:
x is the number of your job.
user-name is your user name.
[ppn] is your project-programmer number.
name is the name of the volume set,
if it applies.
For
example,
if the resource is a drive, " ___ " is printed in
this column.
volume is the name of the volume that is allocated or
mounted for your job.
If the resource is a tape volume set,
the name shows the volume that is currently mounted.
Disk
structure names,
disk drives,
and tape drives are also
shown.
description is the description of the type of volume.
This
identifies whether the resource is a structure, disk drive,
magtape drive, or magtape volume.
The description is useful
when resources have identical names.
no. is the number of disk packs, drives, or tapes that are
allocated to your job and that are mounted for your job for
each resource.
Format
SHOW ALLOCATION
Characteristics
Runs the QUEUE program.
Requires LOGIN.
Destroys your core image.

2-287

SYSTEM COMMANDS
SHOW ALLOCATION Command
Examp1e

The following example shows the use of the ALLOCATE,
DEALLOCATE,
MOUNT, DISMOUNT, and SHOW ALLOCATION commands. The resources are
reserved for a multivolume tape volume set with the ALLOCATE
command.
The name of the volume set is TAPE-SET, and it contains
three volumes.
The logical name TS is assigned to the tape set.
The tape is wri·te enabled, and it does not have standard labels .
. ALLOCATE TAPE-SET (VOL1,VOL2,VOL3) : TS/WRITE-ENABLE/LABEL:NONE<RET>
[ALLOCATE REQUEST TS QUEUED, REQUEST #672]
A file structure named DSKR: is mounted for the job:
.MOUNT DSKR:<RET>
[MOUNT REQUEST DSKR QUEUED, REQUEST #673]
[STRUCTURE DSKR MOUNTED]
The job's resources are shown using the SHOW ALLOCATION command:
ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
TYPE
RESOURCES
VOLUME SET

--------------------- -----------------

DSKB
DSKC
DSKR
TAPE-SET
TAPE-SET
TAPE-SET

9 TK 800/1600
RP06
RP20
DSKB
DSKC
DSKR
VOL1
VOL2
VOL3

------------

MAGTAPE UNIT
DISK UNIT
DISK UNIT
STRUCTURE
STRUCTURE
STRUCTURE
MAGTAPE VOL.
MAGTAPE VOL.
MAGTAPE VOL.

ALL

OWN

1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

0
2
1
1
1
1
0
0
0

The tape set is mounted, and the resources are again displayed:
.MOUNT TS<RET>
[MOUNT REQUEST TS QUEUED, REQUEST #673]
[MAGTAPE TS MOUNTED]
. SHOW ALLOCATION<RET>
ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
VOLUME SET
RESOURCES
TYPE
--------------------- ----------------- -----------9TK 800/1600
MAGTAPE UNIT
RP06
DISK UNIT
RP20
DISK UNIT
DSKB
DSKB
STRUCTURE
DSKC
DSKC
STRUCTURE
DSKR
DSKR
STRUCTURE
VOL1
TAPE-SET
MAGTAPE VOL.
VOL2
TAPE-SET
MAGTAPE VOL.
VOL3
TAPE-SET
MAGTAPE VOL.

2-288

ALL

OWN

1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

1
2
1
1
1
1
1
0
0

SYSTEM COMMANDS
SHOW ALLOCATION Command

After work is finished by accessing the tape set and the
structure, the structure is dismounted. Because the structure
was no explicitly allocated, it is automatically deallocated .
. DISMOUNT DSKR<RET>
[VOLUME SET DSKR HAS BEEN DISMOUNTED]
The tape volume set is dismounted:
.DISMOUNT TS<RET>
[VOLUME SET TS DISMOUNTED]
The job's resources are displayed:
. SHOW ALLOCATION<RET>
ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
VOLUME SET
RESOURCES
TYPE

DSKB
DSKC
TAPE-SET
TAPE-SET
TAPE-SET

9 TK 800/1600
RP06
RP20
DSKB
DSKC
VOL1
VOL2
VOL3

ALL

OWN

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0

MAGTAPE UNIT
DISK UNIT
DISK UNIT
STRUCTURE
STRUCTURE
MAGTAPE VOL.
MAGTAPE VOL.
MAGTAPE VOL.

At this point, the tape set can again be mounted, or
deallocated.
The tape set is deallocated:

can

.DEALLOCATE TS<RET>
[VOLUME SET TS HAS BEEN DEALLOCATED]
. SHOW ALLOCATION<RET>
ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
RESOURCES
TYPE
VOLUME SET

ALL

OWN

RP06
RP20
DSKB
DSKC

1
1
1
1

--------------------- -----------------

DSKB
DSKC

2-289

------------

DISK UNIT
DISK UNIT
STRUCTURE
STRUCTURE

SYSTEM COMMANDS

SHOW QUEUES Command
SHOW QUEUES Command

Function
The SHOW QUEUES command displays a list of the entries in the
system queues on your terminal.
You can specify the system
queues that you want displayed, or you can see all of the system
queues.
SHOW QUEUES lists the mount queue, batch queue, event
queue, and output queues.
Format
SHOW QUEUES argument/switches
Where:
argument specifies the queue or queues to be displayed.
The
argument is optional.
If you do not specify an argument,
all of the system queues are displayed.
The following arguments are valid:
ALL-REQUESTS

Shows queue requests in all system
queues.
This
is
the default
function.

BATCH-REQUESTS

Shows batch requests.

CARD-PUNCH-REQUESTS Shows card punch requests.
EVENTS-REQUESTS

Shows scheduled system events.

MOUNT-REQUESTS

Shows mount requests.

OUTPUT-REQUESTS

Shows requests
queues.

all

output

PAPER-TAPE-REQUESTS Shows paper tape punch requests.
PLOTTER-REQUESTS

Shows plotter requests.

PRINTER-REQUESTS

Shows line printer requests.

/switches is one or more of the following switches.
The
switches define the amount of information to be displayed
about each queue request and which queue requests to
display.
By default,
SHOW QUEUE displays all the system
queues for all jobs.

2-290

SYSTEM COMMANDS
SHOW QUEUES Command
Function

Switch
/ALL

Displays a list of all the queue requests.
This is the default function.
When showing
the mount requests, /ALL prints a list of all
the structures that are mounted and, for each
structure, a list of every job that has the
structure in its search list.

/BRIEF

Displays a short description of each request.

/FULL

Displays all available information about each
request.

/HELP

Prints information about SHOW ALLOCATION and
SHOW QUEUES.
To use this switch,
type:
SHOW/HELP.

/USER: [ppn]

Displays the queue requests for the specified
user.
The project-programmer number must be
typed in brackets.

Associated Messages
[THE QUEUES ARE EMPTY]
This message occurs when there are no queue requests
the specification.

that

match

The following example illustrates the output from the
QUEUES command, used with the MOUNT-REQUESTS argument:

SHOW

Characteristics
Runs the QUEUE program.
Destroys your core image.
Leaves your job at monitor level.
Example
1.

.SHOW QUEUES MOUNT-REQUESTS<RET>
MOUNT QUEUE:
VOLUME STATUS

TYPE

WRITE

REQ#

JOB#

USER

MTB2
WAITING TAPE LOCKED 614
52
MAROTTA [27,5434]
VOLUME-SET: MTB2
LABEL-TYPE: BYPASS, TRACKS: 9, DENSITY: 1600 BPI
THERE IS 1 REQUEST IN THE QUEUE

2-291

SYSTEM COMMANDS

SKIP Conunand
SKIP Command

Function
The SKIP conunand moves a magnetic tape forward a specified number
of files or records or to the logical end of tape.
This conunand runs the COMPIL program,
conunand before running the PIP program.

which

interprets

the

Formats
SKIP MTxn: x FILES
Advances forward x files.
SKIP MTxn: x RECORDS
Advances forward x records.
SKIP MTxn: EOT
Advances forward to the logical end of tape.
Where:

MTxn:

unit.

is the physical device name of the magnetic tape
Device names are discussed in Section 1.9.1.

x is a decimal number representing
records or files to skip over.
Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Destroys your core image.
Example
Space the tape MTA2: forward 2 files:
.SKIP MTA2: 2 FILES<RET>

2-292

the

number

SYSTEM COMMANDS

START Command
START Command

Function
The START command begins execution of a program that you loaded
previously with either the LOAD or GET command, or that you
interrupted while running (for example, with a CTRL/C) .
You can optionally specify an explicit start address.
If
omitted,
the address supplied in the file (.JBSA) is used.
If
you specify an address argument and the job was executing a
monitor call when interrupted (that is, it was at monitor level
but not in TTY input wait or SLEEP mode), the monitor continues
the job at the location at which it was interrupted and
eventually traps to the specified START address.
If you try to START an execute-only program at a specified
address,
you receive an error message.
If the high segment of
this program is sharable, execution of the START command turns on
the user-mode write protect bit.

Format
START addr
Where:

addr is the octal address where execution starts if
other than the location specified within the file
(.JBSA).
This argument is optional.
If you do not
specify this argument,
the address comes from .JBSA.
You can specify a starting address of O.

Characteristics
Places your terminal at user level.
Does not function during device I/O.
Requires memory.

Example
Type a program .
. TYPE PROG.FOR<RET>
TYPE 69
69 FORMAT (' TESTING EXECUTION')
END
Load the program .
. LOAD PROG<RET>
FORTRAN:PROG
MAIN.
LINK: LOADING
EXIT

2-293

SYSTEM COMMANDS
START Command
SAVE the program .
. SAVE PROG<RET>
PROG SAVED
START the program .
. START<RET>
TESTING EXECUTION
END OF EXECUTION
CPU TIME: 0.01 ELAPSED TIME: 0.03
EXIT

2-294

SYSTEM COMMANDS
SUBMIT Command
SUBMIT Command

Function
The SUBMIT command places entries into the input queue for the
batch system. Refer to the QUEUE command for further information
and examples.
Refer to the TOPS-10/TOPS-20 Batch
information about batch jobs.

Reference

Manual

for

Format
SUBMIT jobname=control-file-spec,log-file-spec
Where:

jobname is the name of the job to be entered into the
queue.
The jobname is optional.
If you omit it, the
default job name is the name of the log file.
The equal sign is required only if you specify the
name.

job

control-file-spec is the name of the input file.
This
file contains all monitor-level and user-level commands
for processing by the batch controller
(BATCON).
If
you do not include a device in the file specification,
and if the monitor does not find the control file in
your job search list, the monitor will search ersatz
device CTL for the control file.
log-file-spec is the name
batch
controller
uses
processing of the job.

of the output
this file to

file.
record

The
its

Only the two files mentioned above can be specified in a request
to the batch input queue.
The name of the control file is
required; the log file name is optional and, if omitted, is taken
from the control file.
If the job name is omitted, it defaults
to the name of the log file, if present,
or the name of the
control file if no log file is specified.
If an extension is
omitted, the following are assumed:
.CTL for the control file
.LOG for the log file
If you type SUBMIT with no arguments or switches, a list of
jobs in the batch queue will be printed on your terminal.

the

The switches to this command can be divided into two categories,
depending on whether the switch can be used only once, or can be
used more times, in a single command string. The two categories
are:
o

Queue-Operation Switches
These switches can be used only once in the command string.
They affect the entire request,
and you can place them
anywhere in the command string.
If you have used one of
these switches in a command string, you cannot use it again
in the same string. Many switches have a INO construction,
which has a negative effect. Be sure you do not use the INO
construction of a switch in the same command string with the
positive construction.
2-295

SYSTEM COMMANDS
SUBMIT Command
o

File-Control Switches
These switches can be used any number of times in the command
string.
You can also use the /NO construction of a switch in
the same command string with the positive construction.
To
achieve a temporary or permanent effect by the placement of
the switch, refer to Section 1.8.4.

Switch

Category

Function

/ABEFORE:
date-time

File
control

Queues the file only if the access
date is before the specified date
and time.

/ACCOUNT:
"string"

Queue
operation

Specifies the account to which the
job should be charged.
If the
account
contains
any
nonalphanumeric
characters,
you
must
enclose
the
string
in
quotation marks.

/AFTER:
date-time

Queue
operation

Processes the request after
specified date and time.

/ALLFILES:
YES or NO

Queue
operation

Accepts the request only if all of
the files in the request exist.
That is,
if any specified file is
not
present,
no
files
are
processed.
/ALLFILES is the same
as /ALLFILES:YES.
By default
(or
/ALLFILES:NO),
if all of the files
do not exist,
the existing files
are still processed.

/ASINCE:
date-time

File
control

Queues only the files
been accessed since the
date and time.

/ASSISTANCE:
YES or NO

Queue
operation

Specifies whether the
job needs
or
does
not
need
operator
intervention. Arguments are YES or
1 and NO or O.
If you specify NO
and then request assistance, your
job is cancelled.
Assistance is
any action the operator must take
before the
job
can
continue,
including
PLEASE
and
MOUNT
requests.

/BATLOG:arg

Queue
operation

Controls the output of the log file
on disk. Arguments are:

the

that have
specified

APPEND Appends the log file to any
existing file of the same name.
SUPERSEDE Replaces any
existing
file of the same name with the new
file.

2-296

SYSTEM COMMANDS

SUBMIT Command
SPOOL Spools the log file
for
output to the printer instead of
writing
the
file
into
your
directory.
This prevents a large
log file from using up your disk
quota.
Will
not
override
/OUTPUT:NOLOG.
/BATOPT:
option-name

Queue
operation

Specifies a LOGIN option line to
read for LOGIN switches to apply to
the batch job.
The option name
that you specify with the /BATOPT
switch must match a line in the
SWITCH.INI file that appears as:
LOGIN: option-name/switches

/BEFORE:
date-time

File
control

Queues
the file
created before the
and time.

/BEGIN:n

File
control

Starts the output on the nth line
of the control file.

/CARDS:n

Queue
operation

Uses n as the maximum number of
cards that can be punched by the
batch job
(up to 10,000).
If you
omit the switch, no cards will be
punched.

/CHECK

Queue
operation

Prints on your terminal a list
the batch queue entries made
your job.

/CORE:n

Queue
operation

Uses
n
(in decimal K)
as the
maximum amount of memory that your
job can use.

/CREATE

Queue
operation

Makes a new entry in the batch
input queue.
This is the default
function
except
when
you are
listing queue entries.

/DELETE

File
control

Deletes the control file
after
processing it.
(This is the same
as /DISPOSE:DELETE.)

/DEPENDENCY:n

Queue
operation

Specifies the initial value of the
dependency count in decimal.
When
used
with /MODIFY,
this switch
changes the dependency count of a
previously submitted job.
If n is
a signed number
(+ or -),
that
number is added to or subtracted
from the dependent job's count.
If
n is not a signed number,
the
dependent job's count is changed to
n.

2-297

only if it was
specified date

of
by

SYSTEM COMMANDS
SUBMIT Command

/DESTINATION:
node

Queue
operation

Specifies
the
node
that will
process output requests from this
batch job,
including the printing
of the log file.
Use the node name
or the node number to specify the
node.
If you specify another host
or a node that does not exist, the
job will
wait
in
the
queue
indefinitely.

/DISPOSE:
arg

File
control

Controls the disposition of the
control file after it is processed.
The arguments to this switch are:
DELETE deletes the file from
directory after spooling it.

your

PRESERVE preserves the file after
processing it.
This is the default
function.
RENAME is no longer supported.
/DISTRIBUTION:
"text"

Queue
operation

Specifies text to place in the
distribution field, on the banner
page of output listings. For batch
input requests,
the distribution
text is printed on the banner page
of the log file listing.
You can
use this field to include mailing
information, or the location where
the
operator
should leave the
listing.
The text field may be up
to
39
alphanumeric characters,
including punctuation and spaces if
the text is placed in quotation
marks.

/ERBINARY

File
control

Prints an error message if a binary
file is included in the request.
This is the default function.

/ERNONE

Queue
operation

Prints an error message if no files
match the file specification.
This
is the default function.

/ERPROTECTION

Queue
operation

Prints
an
error
message
if
processing
the
request
would
require
a
violation
of
file
protection.
This is the default
function.

/FAST

Queue
operation

Prints a list of the entries in the
batch queue in a fast format on
your terminal.

/FEET:n

Queue
operation

Uses n as the maximum number of
feet of paper tape that the batch
job can punch.
If the switch is
omitted, no paper tape is punched.

2-298

SYSTEM COMMANDS
SUBMIT Command

/HELP:
arg

Queue
operation

Prints information on your terminal
about the QUEUE command.
This
switch does not queue any files.
/HELP can be used alone or with one
of the following arguments:
TEXT prints a message about the
format and switches to the QUEUE
command.
This is the same as /HELP
with no arguments.
SWITCHES prints a list of all the
switches available with the QUEUE
command.

/JOBNAME:name

Queue
operation

Specifies the name of the job.
job name can
be
up
to
alphanumeric characters.

The
six

/KILL

Queue
operation

Removes the specified entry from
the queue.
You must give the job
name,
/SEQUENCE, or /REQUESTID, to
the left of the equal sign in the
command
line.
Refer
to
the
examples.

/LENGTH:n:m

File
control

Processes only files whose length
is between nand m blocks.

/LIST:arg

Queue
operation

Prints information about the jobs
in the queue.
If you use /LIST
alone,
it shows the jobs in the
queue.
This is equivalent to using
the QUEUE command with no arguments
and no switches.
/LIST can be
abbreviated to /L.
The switch can
also take one of the following
arguments:
ALL shows all data about each queue
request.
FAST shows a fast list of the queue
requests.
(This is the same as
/FAST. )
JOBS shows a list of the jobs in
the queue.
(This is the same as
/LIST with no arguments.)
SUMMARY shows only the summary line
of the queue display.

/MESSAGE:arg

Queue
operation

2-299

information

SYSTEM COMMANDS
SUBMIT Command

FIRST prints
message.

the

one-line

error

PREFIX prints a six-character error
prefix.
/METERS:n

Queue
operation

Uses n as the maximum number of
meters of paper tape that can be
punched by the job.

/MODIFY

Queue
operation

Alters the specified parameter in
the specified job.
This switch
requires
that
you have access
rights to the job. You must give a
job name, /SEQUENCE, or /REQUESTID,
to the left of the equal sign in
the command line.
This switch can
be used to modify a previously
submitted request as long as the
request has not
been
started.
Refer to the examples.

/NEW:
YES or NO

File
control

Accepts the request even if the
file does not yet exist. Does not
search for control file on CTL:

/NONEW

File
control

Does not
accept
the
file
specification of a file that does
not exist.
This is the default
function.

/NONOTIFY

Queue
operation

Does not set the system to notify
you when a request is completed.
Refer to /NOTIFY.

/NOOPTION

Queue
operation

Ignores
the
SWITCH.INI
file.
SWITCH.INI files are described in
Appendix B.

/NOPHYSICAL

File
control

Searches
for
the
file
by
recognizing any
logical
names.
This is the default function.

/NORE S TART

Queue
operation

Prevents
the
job
from
being
restarted if it was stopped because
of a system crash.
This is the
default function.

/NOTIFY:
YES or NO

Queue
operation

Sets the system to notify you when
your request is completed.
To be
notified,
use
/NOTIFY with no
argument, or with YES or 1 as an
argument.
To
suppress
notification,
use
/NOTIFY:O
or
/NOTIFY:NO.
By default,
you are
not notified when a request is
finished.

/OKBINARY

File
control

Accepts
files
whose extensions
indicate that they include binary
information.
Normally, files with
extensions .SAV, .SHR, .LOW,
.REL,
.EXE, and .HGH will not be accepted
for processing.
2-300

SYSTEM COMMANDS
SUBMIT Command

/OKNONE

Queue
operation

Does not produce a warning message
if no
files
match
the
file
specification.

/OKPROTECTION

Queue
operation

Does not output an error message
when a protection code is violated.

/OPTION:option

Queue
operation

Uses the option line QUEUE:option
in the SWITCH.INI file.
SWITCH.INI
files are discussed in Appendix B.

/OUTPUT:arg

Queue
operation

Determines whether or not the log
file will be printed.
This switch
has three arguments only one of
which can be specified at a time.
The arguments are LOG, NOLOG, and
ERROR.
LOG prints the log file.
NO LOG suppresses
log file.

printing

ERROR prints the log file
an error occurs.

the

only

/PAGES:n

Queue
operation

Uses n as the maximum number of
pages of output that your job can
print.

/PATH: [dir]

Queue
operation

Specifies
accessed.

/PHYSICAL

File
control

Does not recognize logical names
for devices in the command line.

/PRESERVE

File
control

Saves the
control
file
after
processing it.
This is the default
and
it
is
the
same
as
/DISPOSE:PRESERVE.

/PRIORITY:n

Queue
operation

Gives the specified priority (n is
1 to 63) to the request. A larger
number has greater priority.

/PROCESSING:node Queue
operation

Specifies
the node that is to
process the batch job.
Use the
node name or node number to specify
the node.
Batch jobs
can
be
submitted to IBM host nodes only.
Jobs submitted to nodes other than
IBM host nodes will wait in the
queue indefinitely.

/PROTECTION:
nnn

Queue
operation

Specifies a protection code for the
queue request.
Queue requests are
protected in the same way that
files are protected.
Refer
to
Section 1.9.4.

/READER

Queue
operation

Causes a disk-resident card job to
be read as if it were punched on
cards
and
had
been submitted
through the card reader.
2-301

the

Category

Function

/ABEFORE:
date-time

File
control

Queues the file only if the access
date is before the specified date
and time.

/ACCOUNT:
"string"

Queue
operation

Specifies the account to which
job should be charged.
If
account
string
contains
nonalphanumeric
characters,
must
enclose
the
string
quotation marks.

/AFTER:
date-time

Queue
operation

Processes the request after the
specified date and time. Refer to
Section 1.8.3 for a description of
date-time arguments.

/ALLFILES:
YES or NO

Queue
operation

Accepts the request only if all of
the files in the request exist. By
default, if any of the files do not
exist, the others will be processed
appropriately.
This
switch
specifies that if any file is not
present,
no
files
should
be
processed.
The value of YES or NO
is optional.
If you specify YES,
all of the files you specified must
exist, or none of the files will be
punched.

/ASINCE:
date-time

File
control

Queues only the files that have
been accessed since the specified
date and time.

/BEFORE:
date-time

File
control

Queues only the files with creation
dates before the specified date and
time. Refer to Section 1.8.3 for a
description of date-time arguments.

the
the
any
you
in

/CHARACTERISTIC: Queue
arg
operation

Specifies an output characteristic.
You can find a
list
of
the
characteristics arguments defined
for your system
in
the
fi,le
SYS:CHARTY.DAT.

/CHECK

Queue
operation

Prints on your terminal a list of
the queue entries made by your job.

/COPIES:n

File
control

Repeats the output the specified
number of times
(n must be less
than 64).
The default is one copy.
If you need more than 63 copies,
make two or more entries.

/CREATE

Queue
operation

Makes a new entry in the tape punch
queue.
This switch is the default
function,
except
when you are
listing the entries in the queue.

2-312

SYSTEM COMMANDS
TPUNCH Command

/DEFERRED

Queue
operation

Causes
deferred
output
to be
released to the paper tape punch
queue.
You must use one of the
following switches with /DEFERRED:
/CREATE completes
output requests.

all

released

/KILL
eliminates
output requests.

the

released

Refer to the SET DEFER command
more information and examples.

for

/DELETE

File
control

Deletes the file after spooling.
(This
is
the
same
as
/DISPOSE:DELETE.)

/DESTINATION:
node

Queue
operation

Specifies
the
node
that will
process the request.
Use
this
switch to specify that the paper
tape punch be connected to the
specified node.
Use the node name
or node number to specify the node.
Files cannot be punched at a host
other than the host node to which
your terminal is connected.
If the
request is made to punch files at
another host,
or at a node that
does not exist,
the request will
wait in the queue indefinitely.

/DISPOSE:arg

File
control

Controls the disposition of
file after it is queued.
arguments to this switch are:

the
The

DELETE deletes the file from
directory after punching it.

your

PRESERVE keeps the file in your
area after punching it.
This is
the default function.
RENAME renames the file into the
spooling area.
This deletes the
file from your
directory
area
immediately.
/DISTRIBUTION:
"text"

Queue
operation

/ERBINARY

File
control

Prints an error me~sage if a binary
file is included 1n the request.
This is the default function.

2-313

SYSTEM COMMANDS
TPUNCH Command

/ERNONE

Queue
operation

Prints an error message if no files
. match the wildcard construction.
This is the default function.

/ERPROTECTION

Queue
operation

Prints
an
error
messa~e
if
processing the request requ~res a
violation of file protection. This
is the default function.

/FAST

Queue
operation

Prints a list of the entries in the
paper tape punch queue in a fast
format.
This
is the same as
/LIST:FAST.

/FILE:arg

File
control

Specifies how the file format is to
be interpreted.
The
following
arguments can be used with this
switch:
ASCII interprets the file as
text.

ASCII

ELEVEN interprets the file as four
8-bit bytes in each 36-bit word.
The bits are arranged as follows:
Byte
Byte
.. Byte
Byte

1:
2:
3:
4:

bits
bits
bits
bits

10-17
2-9
28-35
20-27

/FORMS:arg

Queue
operation

Processes the file on the specified
kind of paper tape.
The default is
NORMAL. Available forms are listed
in SYS:FORMST.DAT.

/GENERIC

Queue
operation

Sends output to the next available
paper tape punch.
This is the
default function.
This switch is
the complement to /UNIT.

/HEADER:
YES or NO

File
control

Makes header units before each file
~f
you type /HEADER or if you
specify YES. Does not make headers
between files if you specify NO.
1
may be used for YES; 0 may be used
for NO.
/HEADER:NO is the same as
/NOHEADER.
/HEADER is the default
function.

/HELP:arg

Queue
operation

Prints information on your terminal
about the QUEUE command.
This
switch does not queue any files.
This switch can be used alone or
with
one
of
the
following
arguments:
TEXT prints a message with the
format and switches to the QUEUE
command.
This is the same as /HELP
with no arguments.
SWITCHES prints a list of all the
switches available with the QUEUE
command.
2-314

SYSTEM COMMANDS
TPUNCH Command
/JOBNAME:name

Queue
operation

Specifies the name of the job.
. job name can
be
up
to
,alphanumeric characters.

The
six

/KILL

Queue
operation

Removes the specified ~ntry from
the queue.
You must g~ve a
job
name,
/SEQUENCE, or /REQUESTID, to
the left of the equal sign in the
'command line.

/LENGTH:n:m

File
control

Processes only files whose length
is between nand m blocks.

/LIMIT:n

Queue
operation

'Limits the output to the specified
number of feet.

/LIST:arg

Queue
operation

Prints information about the jobs
in the queue.
If you use /LIST
alone,
it shows the jobs in the
queue.
This is equivalent to using
the QUEUE command with no arguments
and no switches.
/LIST can be
abbreviated to /L.
The switch can
take
one
of
the
following
arguments:
ALL shows all data about each queue
request.
FAST shows a fast list of the queue
requests.
(This is the same as
/FAST. )
"JOBS shows a list of the jobs in
the queue.
(This is the same as
/LIST with no arguments.)
SUMMARY shows only the summary line
of the queue display.

/MESSAGE:
arg

Queue
operation

the

information

one-line

error

PREFIX prints a six-character error
prefix to the error message.

2-315

SYSTEM COMMANDS
TPUNCH Conunand
/MODIFY

Queue
operation

Alters the specified parameter in
the specified job.
This switch
requires
that
you have access
rights to the job. You must give a
job name, /SEQUENCE, or /REQUESTID,
to the left of the equal sign in
the conunand line. This switch can
be used to modify a previously
submitted request as long as the
request has not been started.

/NEW:YES or NO

File
control

Accepts the request even
file does not yet exist.

if the

/NOHEADER

File
control

Suppresses
header
file.
/HEADER is
function.

units
the

before
default

/NONEW

File
control

Forces
the system
to
use an
existing file.
This is the default
function.

/NONOTIFY

Queue
operation

Does not set the system to
notify
you when the request is finished.
Refer to /NOTIFY.

/NONULL

Queue
operation

Prints an error message if none of
the files in the request exist.
This is the default function.

/NOOPTION

Queue
operation

Suppresses
the SWITCH.INI file.
SWITCH.INI files are described in
Appendix B.

/NOPHYSICAL

File
control

Recognizes
logical
names
for
devices in the conunand
string.
This is the default function.

/NOSTRS

File
control

Does not scan each structure for
files of the same name.
This is
the default function.

/NOTES:"text"

Queue
operation

Punches the text in the
header
units.
The text can be up to 12
characters, and it mustpe enclosed
in quotes if it
contains
any
nonalphanumeric characters, such as
spaces.

/NOTIFY:
YES or NO

Queue
operation

Notifies you on your terminal when
request is
completed.
To
be
notified,
use
/NOTIFY with no
argument, or with YES or 1 as an
argument.
To
suppress
notification,
use
/NOTIFY:O,
/NOTIFY;NO,
or
/NONOTIFY.
By
default, you are not notified when
a request is finished.
In special
cases,
such as the
output
of
deferred requests,
you will never
be notified.

2-316

SYSTEM COMMANDS
TPUNCH Command

/NULL:YES or NO

Queue
operation

Does
not
print a fatal error
message if the specified file does
not exist.

/OKBINARY

File
control

Accepts
files
whose extensions
indicate that they include binary
information.
Normally, files with
·extensions .SAV, .SHR, .LOW,
.REL,
.EXE, and .HGH will not be accepted
for processing.

/OKNONE

Queue
operation

Does not print a warning message if
no
files
match
the
wildcard
construction.

/OKPROTECTION

Queue
operation

Does not print error messages
a protection error occurs.

/OPTION:option

Queue
operation

Uses. the option line QUEUE:option
in the SWITCH.INI file.
SWITCH.INI
files are discussed in Appendix B.

/PHYSICAL

File
control

Does not recognize logical names
for devices in the command line.

/PRESERVE

File
control

Saves the
control
file
after
processing it.
This is the default
and
it
is
the
same
as
/DISP0SE:PRESERVE.

/PRIORITY:n

Queue
operation

Gives the specified priority number
(n is 1 to 63) to the request.
A
larger number has greater priority.

/PROTECTION:
nnn

Queue
operation

Specifies a protection code for the
queue request.
Queue requests are
protected in the same way that
files are protected.
Refer
to
Section 1.9.4.

/REMOTE

Queue
operation

Prints on your terminal a list of
remote queues. Must be used with
/DESTINATION.

/REQUESTID:n

Queue
operation

Specifies
the
request
identification number of the job
you wish to modify or terminate.

/RUN:file

Queue
operation

Executes the specified file after
the job is done.

/RUNCORE:n

Queue
operation

Executes the file specified in IRUN
in nK of core after the job is
done.

/RUNOFFSET:n

Queue
operation

Executes the file specified in IRUN
with offset n after the job is
done.

/SEQUENCE:n

Queue
operation

Specifies a sequence number to help
identify a request to be modified
or deleted.

2-317

when

SYSTEM COMMANDS
TPUNCH Conunand

files with a
the specified

/SINCE:
date-time

File
control

Queues
only
the
creation date after
date and time.

/STRS:YES or NO

File
control

Searches
for the
file on all
structures in the search list and
takes
every
occurrence.
The
default is to take just the first
occurrence of the file.

/TAPE:arg

File
control

Punches paper tape in the specified
mode.
If you do not use this
switch,
the
tape
is
punched
according
to
the
data
mode
specified in the file.
You can use
anyone of the following arguments
with this switch:
ASCII punches
mode.

the

tape

ASCII

BINARY punches the tape
mode.

binary

IBINARY punches the tape
binary mode.

image

IMAGE punches
mode.

image

the

tape

/TMPFIL:
file:text

Queue
operation

Creates a temporary file TMP:file
and enters the text into the file.

/UNIT:n

General

Specifies the unit number of the
device to which you want the output
sent.

/USERNAME:
"name"

Queue
operation

Specifies the user name field of
the banner page of output.
This
field
can
contain
up
to 39
alphanumeric characters,
and may
include punctuation and spaces if
the name is placed in quotation
marks.

Associated Messages

When a new entry is made in a system queue, the system prints
message on the user's terminal.
The message is in the form:

[PAPERTAPE JOB name QUEUED, REQUEST #nnn, LIMIT xxx]
Where:

name is the name of the job in the queue.
This can be
specified by the user.
Otherwise, it defaults to the
name of the first file in the request.
non is the number that
represents
identification of the job in the queue.

the

is the maximum number of feet

the

xxx

use.

2-318

that

request
job

will

SYSTEM COMMANDS
TPUNCH Command
Characteristics

Leaves your terminal in monitor level.
Destroys your core image.
Does not require LOGIN if a list of queue entries is desired.
Examp1e

Punch 3 copies, in binary mode, of the file DSK:SENDMP.REL .
. TPUNCH SENDMP.REL/TAPE:BINARY/COPIES:3<RET>
[PAPERTAPE JOB SENDMP QUEUED, REQUEST #131, LIMIT 10]

2-319

SYSTEM COMMANDS

TYPE Command
TYPE Command

Function

The TYPE command prints the contents of the specified file(s)
on
your terminal.
If more than one file is requested in the command
string, the files are printed one after another without an
indication of the beginning and ending of a file.
This command runs the COMPIL
command before running PIP.

program,

which

interprets

the

Fo.rmat

TYPE file-spec
Where:

file-spec is one or more file specifications separated
by commas.
The file name (including any extension) is
required. File specification is discussed in Section
1.9.

If you omit the device name, the default is DSK:.
If you omit
the directory,
the default is the directory you are currently
logged in to.
The full wildcard construction can be used for the file name
the extension.

and

Switches can be passed to PIP by enclosing them in parentheses in
the TYPE command string.
When COMPIL interprets the command
string, it passes the switches on to PIP.
Characteristics

Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Destroys your core image.
Example

.TYPE WONDER.ALG<RET>
BEGIN
INTEGER S, C, B, A;
!THIS PROGRAM WILL ADD THREE NUMBERS AND;
!PRINT THE RESULT;
WRITE (It [2 C] WHAT ARE THE NUMBERS TO ADD [1 C]
READ (S);
READ (C);
READ (B);
A:=C+S+B;
WRITE (It [2 C] THE SUM OF It);
PRINT (S, 3, 3) ;
WRITE (It AND It);
PRINT (C, 3, 3) ;
WRITE (ltAND It);
PRINT (B,3,3);
WRITE (" IS: It);
PRINT (A, 3, 3) ;
WRI TE ( It [ 2 C] ");
END

2-320

It);

SYSTEM COMMANDS
UNLOAD Command
UNLOAD Command

Function

The UNLOAD command rewinds and unloads a tape,
either magnetic
tape
or
DECtape.
When magnetic tape is unloaded,
WATCH
statistics are printed on the operator's terminal.
These
statistics also print on your terminal by default.
To turn off
the printing, use the SET WATCH NO MTA command.
Format

UNLOAD dev:
Where:

dev:
is a magnetic tape (MTxn) or a DECtape (DTxn).
Device names are discussed in Section 1.9.1.

Characteristics

Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Runs the PIP program.
Destroys your core image.
Examples

Unload DECtape unit 7 .
. UNLOAD DTA7:<RET>

Unload magnetic tape unit 3 .
. UNLOAD MTA3:<RET>

2-321

SYSTEM COMMANDS
USESTAT Command
USES TAT Command

Function

The USES TAT command (CTRL/T)
returns status information about
your job.
If your job is currently doing I/O to a file, then
CTRL/T will disclose that status, unless the job is execute-only.
The information printed includes:
0

incremental daytime in seconds

incremental run time in seconds

incremental disk reads

incremental disk writes

program name

core size

job state

current context

program counter (PC)

Refer to Section 1.6.9
information returned as
CTRL/T) .

for a description of
the
status
a result of the USESTAT command (or

The results obtained from
obtained by typing CTRL/T.
well as at monitor level.

the USES TAT command can also be
CTRL/T can be typed at user level as

Formats

CTRL/T
USES TAT
Characteristics

CTRL/T:
Leaves your terminal at -the same level from which you issued
CTRL/T.
Does not echo on your terminal.
Does not interrupt program execution.
Does not disclose file information for execute-only jobs.
The USESTAT Command:
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Does not interrupt program execution.
Does not disclose file information for execute-only jobs.
2-322

SYSTEM COMMANDS
USESTAT Conunand
Examples
1.

Use CTRL/T for a job that is not execute-only.
Note that
although it is shown here, CTRL/T does not echo on your
terminal .
. R PIP<RET>
*COP FILES.ALL=*.*<RET>
<CTRL/T>
Day:13.53 Run:
0.03 Rd:2 Wr:1 PIP 4+10P Ctx:1 RN PC:403171
Input wait for DSKBO:SWITCH.BAK[10,5763] block 1

Use USESTAT for an execute-only job:
.USESTAT<RET>
Day: 29.60 Run:
PC:423003

0.61 Rd:3506 Wr:1 DIR 15+44P Ctx:1 AC

2-323

SYSTEM COMMANDS

VERSION Command
VERSION Command

FWlction

The VERSION command prints on your terminal the version number of
the program in your core area (that is, the last program you ran
implicitly or explicitly).
One use of this command is to
determine the program that printed an error message on your
terminal.
If your terminal is still at user level
(that is,
a
character other than a period was printed) after the message, you
can type the following:

(two CTRL/Cs if the program is not waiting for input)

.VERSION

The monitor returns with the name of the program in core
(that
is, the one presumed to have printed the message) and the version
number of that program. After receiving the information, you can
type CONTINUE to return your terminal to user mode.
If the
message was a fatal message (that is, a period was printed after
the message), you do not have to type CTRL/C because the terminal
is already at monitor level.
In most cases,
you cannot type
CONTINUE after a fatal error message.
The version number is obtained from .JBVER and .JBHVR in the job
data area and is printed in standard format.
Similar output is
automatically generated by the SET WATCH VERSION command.
(Refer
to the SET WATCH command description.) The output from these two
commands is in one of the following forms:
[low + high]

The low and high segments are different.

[low]

There is only a low segment.

[low +]

The low and high segments are the same.

[+]

A GETSEG monitor call has been performed
to a high segment that matches the low
segment.

[+ high]

A GETSEG monitor call has been done to a
high segment that does not match the low
segment.

[+ high + high]

A SEGOP. monitor call has been done to
bring a high segment into core without
destroying the existing high segment.

[blank]

The high segment has been released.

[+ FROM file-spec]

The file has been read into memory.

[+ high NOT SHARABLE FROM file-spec]
The file read
sharable.

with the VERSION command,
represented in the format:

the

name version

2-324

low

into

and

memory

high

not

segments

are

SYSTEM COMMANDS
VERSION Command

with the SET WATCH VERSION command, the low and high segments are
represented in one of three formats:
name version

The program is not from SYS:.

:name version

The output is the result of a SETNAM
monitor call
(for example, at the end of
loading) .

S:name version

The program is a program loaded from the
system device
(actual SYS:, not logical
device SYS:) .

The name is the name of the program and the version is in
standard format.
When the version number is output, the standard
format is:
major-version minor-version(edit)-group who modified program
The major version is octal; the minor version is alphabetic;
the
edit is octal and enclosed in parentheses and the group who last
modified the program is octal and preceded by a hyphen (0 is DEC
development,
1 is all other DEC personnel, and 2-7 is customer) .
There are no spaces separating the items, and if an item is zero,
it does not appear in print.
The parentheses and hyphen also do
not appear in print if the corresponding item is zero.
The
following are examples of version numbers output in standard
format.
10B(335)-1

edit
major version 10, minor version B,
number 335, group that last modified program
1.

7 (5)

major version 7, minor version 0, edit number
5, group that last modified program O.

54A

major version 54, minor version A,
edit
number 0, group that last modified program O.

Format
VERSION
Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Does not destroy your job's core image.

2-325

SYSTEM COMMANDS

VERSION Command

Examples
1.

Run the TECO program .
. R TECO<RET>
Halt the program.
*"C
Find version number .
. VERSION<RET>
TECO 23B(162) +
Continue the program and exit .
. CONTINUE<RET>
*EX<ESC><ESC>

Type a file .
. TYPE WONDER.ALG<RET>
BEGIN
INTEGER S, C, B, A;
THIS PROGRAM WILL ADD THREE NUMBERS AND;
PRINT THE RESULT; "C
Find version number of PIP, which executes TYPE .
. VERSION<RET>
PIP 33B(260) +
Run and halt the SYSTAT program .
. R SYSTAT<RET>
STATUS OF

R5743A SYS #40/2 AT 14:45:44 ON 22-APR-75

UPTIME 7:36:20+7:34:33, "C
"C
Find the version number of SYSTAT .
. VERSION<RET>
SYSTAT 472(156)

2-326

SYSTEM COMMANDS
WHERE Command
WHERE Command

Function
The WHERE command allows you to determine the system or network
node to which a specified device is physically connected. The
information given includes:
o

node name

node number (ANF-IO and DECnet)

software-identification (ANF-IO only)

creation-date of software (ANF-IO only)

server locat'ion string (LAT terminal only)

Format
WHERE devn:
devn: is the physical device name. OPR:
allows you
to find the location of the operator's controlling
terminal.
The colon
(:)
in the device name
is
optional.

Where:

Associated Messages
Output form depends on the type of node.

Formats are:

Node type

Format

Local

name

number system ID/creation date device line no.

ANF-IO

node name

number system ID/creation date device line no.

DECnet

name

number device (NRT) or (CTERM)

LAT

name

location-string device

If the system does not recognize the
prints the message:
?NO SUCH DEVICE
Characteristics
Does not require LOGIN.
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Does not destroy your core image.

2-327

device

you

specified,

SYSTEM COMMANDS
WHERE Command
Examples

To find the location of a'specific device LPT262:,
command:

type

the

.WHERE LPT262:<RET>
Local KL1026(26) R2364A KL t 1026 mm-dd-yy LPT262

This example shows that the node name is 1026.
System
identification is RZ364A KL t 1026/1042. Creation date of
software is mm-dd-yy.
The specified device is LPT262.
2.

To find the physical node of your job's
command:

terminal,

type

the

.WHERE TTY:<RET>
Local NOVA(31) DN87S vt#(##) mm-dd-yy TTY70 LINE #70

This example shows that the terminal is connected to node
NOVA(31).
The version number is V##(t#).
The creation date
was mm-dd-yy.
Your terminal number and line number are 70.
3.

To find the physical node and terminal line of the operator's
terminal, type:
.WHERE OPR:<RET>
Local KL1026(26) RZ345A KL # 1026/1042 mm-dd-yy TTY4 LINE #4

To display the location of the system
type:

controlling

terminal,

.WHERE CTY:<RET>
Local KL1026(26) RZ345A KL # 1026/1042 mm-dd-yy CTY LINE #7

2-328

SYSTEM COMMANDS
ZERO Command
ZERO Command

Function
The ZERO command clears the directory in the specified file
structure.
ZERO
deletes all the files in the specified
directory.
The files cannot be recovered.
This command runs the COMPIL program,
command before running the PIP program.

which

interprets

the

This

argument

Format
ZERO dev: [directory]
Where:

dev: is a
required.

DECtape

disk.

[directory] is a directory you have access to,
if you
specify a disk structure.
If you do not specify a
directory, your directory is assumed.
Characteristics
Leaves your terminal at monitor level.
Destroys your core image.

Examples
1.

Delete the files on -DECtape 4 .
. ZERO DTA4:<RET>

Delete all files in your search list .
. ZERO DSK:<RET>

Delete all files in your SFD named CBDDT .
. ZERO DSKB: [27, 4072, CBDDT] <RET>

2-329

APPENDIX A

FUNCTIONAL GROUPS OF COMMANDS

Table A-I lists the operati~g system commands, divided into groups by
function.
The commands 1n each group are arranged in alphabetical
order.
Each command is accompanied by a
short description of its
function.
For an explanation of
through 2.1.10.

each

functional

group,

read

Sections

2.1.1

NOTE
Table A-I lists the commands that are described in
Section 2.2.
Do not use the commands and programs
listed in Table A-I until you are familiar with them.

Table A-I:

Functional Groups of Commands

Command

Functional Description

Job-Control Group
ATTACH

Connects your terminal to a previously
job.

CONTEXT

Allows you to create, delete, and switch between
contexts.

DETACH

Releases your terminal from the current job.

DISABLE

Disables
ENABLEd.

ENABLE

Enables privileges that
job.

KJOB

Terminates your job.

Allows you to access the system.

PASSWORD

Allows you to change your password.

POP

Destroys an inferior context.

PUSH

Creates an inferior context.

REATTACH

Transfers your job from one terminal to another.

SESSION

Changes the account string of your job.
A-I

the

privileges

that
are

you

DETACHed

previously

assigned

your

FUNCTIONAL GROUPS OF COMMANDS
Table A-I:

Functional Groups of Commands (Cont.)

Command

Functional Description

Information Group
ACCOUNT

Prints

CONTEXT

Displays the status of a context.

CORE

Prints the amount of
your job.

CPUNCH

Prints a list of
queue.

DAYTIME

Prints the date and time.